Home

L-BOSS User Manual - Orca Dynamics Ltd.

1. 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 223 e Enter the vendor number double click or press Alt Enter to obtain a list of your vendors e You may enter an invoice number if required e Enter the order number you are receiving against e Enter the date of this transaction You may want to select a previous date for example you were on holidays and this entry needs to be done as of 3 days ago e You may not have access to the Inventory store number if you are controlling inventory in a single store e The Cost target is normally used in multi store environments It allows you to select a different cost zone for your products being received e tis compulsory to enter a remark for tracking purposes e The Load all items flag can be used when you want to view all items that can be received for the vendor you have selected 5 1 2 2 1 Manual receiving When you select the Manual option the system requires header information to begin the transaction Select vendor information Vendor 4 20 2005 Le Inv PO Inventory Store number Cost target 003 H Store 3 Inc PAL All stores Remark M Load all items You need to provide the information required to store the transaction for future reference Vendor number is a compulsory field Enter the vendor you are receiving products from The date field can be used to modify the date the transaction will be saved for Inv can be used to enter
2. oe This example shows the System Log viewer Used as a trouble shooting tool the viewer provides a complete system report tool The View Log information is also color coded making it simple to distinguish between normal functionality and error situations When opened the View Log utility searches all terminals in the system Each terminal listed shows arrows for in out and Unprocessed mail boxes These arrows change color depending on the mailbox status Logs and Messages Viewing Logs and Messages View Log allows you to view urgent messages terminal status and mailboxes normal system messages and the system log tables The folder icon is used to open a log file that was saved on the system The amp printer icon is used to print a message file 2001 2008 Logivision 258 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 The a icon is used for a print preview The x delete icon is used to delete a selected file The OK icon saves any changes and exits the active screen The urgent message icon switches the screen to display any urgent messages available on the system Right click this icon to obtain a history of the urgent messages that you have deleted recently The ES status information icon will show the different folders used by L BOSS and the front end terminals and display the contents of those folders In normal situations the folders should be empty Files in the Local I
3. LOGIVISION L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 by Logivision Logivision is a corporation specialized in the development of software for the retail industry with a particular focus on operation systems for front end terminals Innovative and always at the forefront of new technological developments Logivision is committed to improving the service and the products we provide to our customers Contents l Table of Contents Section About the L BOSS application 6 1 NAVIGATION ome crest chs orotate ete AOA 7 2 Printing Help as a Manual cccceseececeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeesneeseeesneeseeesneeseeesneesesesneeseeeseesesesnenseessnaes 8 3 Understanding Communications ccceseceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeenseeeeseneeseaeseseeeenseaeeseeeesnaeeaseneneeees 9 4 Datal MAINTENANCE e e ararnar aa Taa e Te Taaa paaa aa Aa A aana a E Eee E Aea E AAAA a aaa ea aE EOE ee raia 10 5 Protecting Your Dala oessresseann 11 GPCL COMP IANCY voaa r aa aara cane eee a a aaa ca eee araea tule et bent stay euaeesccecerseapeuawetiventesties 11 Section Il L BOSS Main Menus 14 1 File Men aa Taaa ara a aa aaa aaae a ae a a a Daa a Aa sed austen AA Aa AAA rela A aa Eana aaas ELA AEREN tx AEn 14 LOGIN kdstcesndcasasancsdnacanscsvecavessvacsb sanocsssscaucsasdsanenaiddpaecauasasacapesanecsassuuasssabandsabddedecnusrsvacsndsabasesnebiarsvacubesabassnscnuar 1
4. displays different aspects of PLU programming The help pages under the Item Table topic explain the PLU fields in order of the tabs The item maintenance screens are divided into tabs to make viewing simpler The top portion of the screen is consistent to all tabs This includes the item number the main item description the active price and the next price The Quick tab is a shortcut to fields that are also found on other tabs in the PLU set up screen The relational nature of the LBoss database is easy to understand when you are working in the PLU maintenance You may create item 1 as Oreo cookies attached to sub department 10 and with a price of 2 39 as in the example below You have therefore added a record to the object table item 0000000000001 but you have also added a record to the POS table the sub department link tax status and register flags and you have added a price record to the Price table You now have one record in each of the 3 tables When you want to add a second price level for Oreo cookies you do not create a new item you only add a new price on level 2 So you will have 2 price records but only one object record and only one POS record The same would be true in the cost table if you have more than one supplier for product 1 Multiple cost records can be associated with the item The PLU information centres on the object table It is the the table that contains the unique identifier for each product in the system
5. function table and add records to the totalizer table Totalizer 5000 plays a special role in relation to those reports It acts as a template in a sense Data is captured whenever the PLU function is used or when the sub department function is used or when a department function is used In order to capture sub department data in the Cashier report database you need to instruct L POS to generate that data It does not occur automatically Once you have decided to collect either sub department or department data by cashier you will need to add a totalizer into the system for each sub department or department that must be reported The new totalizers that you create will be numbered using the following convention create a new totalizer that is the sub department number plus 5000 So if you want to see information for sub department 15 on the cashier report you will need to create totalizer 5015 If you want to see information for sub department 132 on the cashier sales report you will need to create totalizer 5132 The same would be true if you decide to report department activity by cashier You would create the totalizer 5022 to report sales for department 22 Remember that you can only report one or the other on the cashier or customer reports Here is an example of the correct programming for totalizer 5010 This will allow sales of sub department 10 GROCERY to appear on both cashier and customer reports Totalizer cu 44 gt v Tlar
6. s Hours Nest event will occur on 200270671 4 01 00 PM e Days Months J Execute one past event J Execute at loading time JV View on all terminals Terminal JV Executed on controller Terminal This example shows the Task Editor scheduled event programming NOTE For more about scheduling tasks for automatic execution see the Events Tasks Utility help pages in this manual Note 2 The Send to host option of the File menu options of the Maintenance application is only available when the Host active option is selected to return data to a headquarter system The send to host option will output the changes made on the local L BOSS machine back to a host system This means that changes to prices accounts and other files can be made at a store and sent back up to the host system Select this option for the tables that may be edited locally in a store Please consider as well that changes sent back up to the headquarter system will be deployed to all terminals that are part of the same target group for that file type This means that if a price is changed at store 3 and all stores share the information on that product the change will make it to the other stores in the next communication cycle 2001 2008 Logivision 42 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 2 1 8 6 Cleanup Cleanup Tab Settings As the L BOSS L POS system functions it is constantly adding data to the report tables and creati
7. SQL Editor Cashiers sql of x Files Query Select RPT F1185 RPT F1034 RPT F1031 sum RPT F64 as F64 sum RPT F65 as F65 sum RPT F67 as F67 TLZ F2168 TLZ TLZ IF LANG FR THEN F2120 as F1039 ELSE F1039 TL2 CLK F1126 CLK F1127 Re Read from rpt_CLK RPT LEFT OUTER JOIN TLZ_TAB TLZ on RPT F1034 TL2 LEFT OUTER JOIN CLK_TAB CLK on CLK F1185 RPT F1185 where vv P Pres rigs Popea res fre oo Paes LANG EN DATE1 12 19 2001 DATE2 SEAE PERIODT D STORE1 001 CSHA1 View Ory Save el Lh Close 3D 5 15 64 0 10 FMT F64 4 21 D 1 1 99 0 10 MOV F65 F9998 22 D 1 0 14 0 20 GROUP 3 F64 F65 25 D 1 1 99 0 60 MOV F65 F9998 26 D 1 0 15 0 70 GROUP 3 F64 F65 2D 5 15 93 0 9999 BLD 101 D 2 15 93 0 10 GROUP 193 F64 F65 1201 D 2 15 93 0 GROUP 1299 F64 F65 This example shows the cashier report in the Report SQL Editor Report SQL Editor Window The SQL editor window is divided into four 4 parts e The SQL editor is the top left portion of the screen and contains the commands for the report e The tool bar e The upper right of the window shows the prompts used in the Report SQL file to collect the language start and end dates period type store number and cashier number from the user The editor reads the code at load time and displays all prompts it finds in the report file when you open the Editor e The bottom portion of the ed
8. The remark field shows the items are leaving store 3 and are being transferred to store 1 Transfers Printed Monday April 25 2005 9 10 58 PM Date 4 21 2005 Cost group PAL Remark PB 4 21 3 gt 1 Cashier Programmer Vendor PLU A code Description oooo0000000001 699712 OREO COOKIES 00000000000004 Nachos 8 oz bag Count sheet Use this report to enter stock counts or variations Stock count Printed Wednesday April 27 2005 8 36 38 PM Store 003 item group PAL All stores Price group PAL All stores Cost group PAL All stores From sub dept lt First to lt Last gt PLU Description 00000000000001 OREO COOKIES 00000000000003 PREMIUM PLUS SODA BISCUITS 00000000000004 Nachos 8 oz bag 00000000000005 IDEAL CREAM CORN 00000000000006 COKE CLASSIC 12 OZ CAN 00000000000007 DIET COKE 12 OZ CAN 00000000000013 LARGE COFFEE 00000000000017 25 EXPORT A REGULAR 00000000000100 Beer 355ml cans 00000000000101 REGULAR UNLEADED GAS Logivision LW 450 464 2131 450 464 5673 Weight 0 000 0 000 Qty z 2 Logivision LV 450 464 2131 450 464 5673 Cases 0 0833 2 Page 141 Reg cost Total 18 01 1 50 0 50 51 00 Page 141 Counted Oty Weight 151 300 000 378 517 000 626 426 130 816 0 86 Entry tracking This report shows all items ordered or received from the supplier over the period of time requested 2001 2008 Logivision 244 L BOSS Use
9. 5010 Description GROCERY Alternate description EPICERIE Files Kat D or C Debit Credit General Ledger ce Report section Tlar sequence Report formula GROUP 5099 F64 F65 Notice that in the Files area we have inserted CLK and CLT CLK instructs L POS to send the data to the cashier report database and to use total 5010 CLT instructs L POS to send the data to the customer by sub department report database If you do not need to see a totalizer in either of those reports you would remove the file type For example if you do need to see all sub department movement totals per customer but only need to see lottery sales per cashier all of the 5xxx totalizers would have CLT and only the Lottery totalizer would have CLT CLK in the Files area of the totalizer set up window NOTE 2 Don t forget to adjust function 710 715 or 716 or L POS will not output the report data you want to see Please refer to function set up for more information 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 167 3 8 4 3 8 5 Note 3 When you edit the totalizer table the file menu includes the send to host option Send to host The Send to host option of the File menu options is only available when the Host active option is selected to return data to a headquarter system The send to host option will allow output of the changes made on the local L BOSS machine back to a host system This means that changes can b
10. 999 Headquarters Locate 3 OK Enh Search Cancel Now you will open the transaction entry screen The system is similar to other entry module screens You will select an item the quantity and store to send the item into This procedure will repeat for each item for each store to send to 2001 2008 Logivision 240 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 i Transfer Files Edit view Store Inventory date 003 901 14 21 2005 Portable device F8 Review PAL Remark T a oo OREO COOKIES 1 50 Case cost C1800 Unitcost 150 Qty es 12 PLu 0000000000000 Minimum 100 ROO 1 Onorder 0 PLU Description I PREMIUM PLUS SODA Vendor code Cases Units Amount Transfer to oo H Store 1 Inc Fit Save F2 Add F3 Delete F4 Cost Worksheet F6 Info F12 Post When you complete the transfer transaction and post the data the system will allow you to print the transfer sheet for each store that items are being sent to This transaction data will be available at the receiving store after communication among the stores has sent the data The store receiving the transfer will use the Receiving and select from an order as receiving type The remark field will show the store that sent and the store that is receiving as the last characters of the remark field i Select order DER PTEE mean a mami 4 21 2005 PB 4 21 Select Cancel NOTE Although the Transfer option affects the inventory report i
11. PLU Description Vendor code Cases Units Amount Weight BERETE E eae F2 Add F3 Delete F4 Cost Worksheet FE Info The screen is similar to the order and receive screen There are a few differences e No prompt for header information you are adding or subtracting items from stock irregardless of the different suppliers you may have for the product e Adjustments on a unit level only e The remark field is compulsory Make the necessary adjustments Use the minus button to enter a negative quantity to remove a damaged piece for example Post or save the transaction as you would for an order or receiving Stock Counts The count function is used when you want to confirm current inventory levels and freeze them at this point as the starting reference level for a new period There is no exact time a count transaction must be executed on L BOSS Typically people may execute a count once a month or once a year You may count the inventory by sections it does not need to all be counted at the same moment Every time a count transaction is performed the transactions dated previous to the count date are no longer considered in the calculation of the on hand values This sounds complex but it isn t Imagine that we are June 1 e You verify Kleenex and you have 50 boxes in stock e June 2 you receive 25 boxes and now have 75 boxes 2001 2008 Logivision 234 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 5 1 2
12. Select ending date Weekly BAR 7 weeks Daily BAR Daily line 14 2006 4 21 2006 1 28 2006 2 4 2006 If there is no weekly closing for the last weeks the Maintenance application shows a warning message asking if you have run the MAKEWEEK command Normally the daily weekly and monthly closing commands are configured as events in the Events Tasks manager at 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 95 installation to run automatically at appropriate times Quick Object POS Price Cost Inventory Sales Picture Promo E Quantities E Amounts Weekly sales statistics 02 02 02 This example shows the PLU weekly Sales tab The sales figures quantity and amount are displayed in graphic format to give the viewer a quick overview of recent sales for the item selected 3 6 1 9 Picture Tab Item PLU Maintenance Picture Tab Associating Pictures With Items It is possible to associate pictures with items so that when an item is scanned the L POS terminal displays the item being purchased There are several factors to consider before using images such as system capabilities including terminal and server processor strength disk access POS display type network components etc The time required to display the image will vary according to these factors which might out weigh the benefits of displaying the image The Picture tab Browse butto
13. Store Terminal Descriptor oor 301 LBOSS 001901 Terminal type LBOSS Inactive Path Terminal s InBox CAMAILNINBOX_001 Group Descriptor Teminefs OuBox Poi STORE 001 Program C AMAIL OUTBOX_001 Report Items Terminal s program path I Exchange I Price V Program l Cost Sample target list P01 STORE 001 Program PRG 001 901 LBOSS 001901 P02 STORE 002 Program PRG 002 901 LBOSS 002901 PAL Store program PRG ITM PRI COS 001 901 LBOSS 001901 002 901 LBOSS 002901 RO1 STORE 001 Report RPT 001 001 LPOS 001001 001 002 LPOS 001002 001 901 LBOSS 001901 R02 STORE 002 Report RPT 002 001 LPOS 002001 002 002 LPOS 002002 002 901 LBOSS 002901 RAL Store total RPT 101 901 LBOSS 101901 RHO HEAD OFFICE Report RPT 2001 2008 Logivision 280 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 10 3 10 4 101 901 LBOSS 101901 101 902 LBOSS 101902 XAL EXCHANGE LIST EXC 001 901 LBOSS 001901 002 901 LBOSS 002901 P01 is a program target that allows sending program data individually to that store It will include the terminal LBOSS 001901 only The data will go to the L BOSS in store 001 L BOSS in store 001 will be used to send that program data to the POS lanes in store 001 PAL is a program target used to send program data to all remote stores at the same time The data will also transit to the remote L BOSS which will be used to send it to the POS lanes RO1 is a report target created at he
14. customer account information and front end system information such as operators The Maintenance application menus are divided into these categories as well to simplify user access Like the L BOSS desktop the Maintenance application s title bar displays the application s name and logged user name The Maintenance menu provides access to all system options The main toolbar allows you to access the most commonly used options In other words you can access options either by clicking the button or opening the menu and selecting the option from that menu s option list The Maintenance application menus are dynamic and change depending on the category of data that you are accessing For example when no data tables are open for editing the maintenance File menu allows login logout bubble help on off toggle and execution of an SQL command line Launching a data table editor PLU for example causes the File menu to change content to include options specific to PLU maintenance The Maintenance application provides a common set of editing tools even though the table editor changes content according to the data table being edited NOTE f you leave the Maintenance application open but inactive not being used for more than 10 minutes it will automatically close This is because the Maintenance application accesses data tables locking them to prevent simultaneous access If there are data tables open and modified the changes will be
15. 10 x at 4d Bv tim F2 ltem number Meta Next E Ee E OREO COOKIES REG Over 50 Promo Quick Obiect POS Price Cost Inventor Sales Picture ECL Sub Dept 10 Sugg Retail Sale price GROCERY 2308 1 E OREO COOKIES Package E MaMe Sale M M t _ Follow sub dept L Prohibit discount From GST PST _J Scalable To rr Vendor 202 Kraft Foods 202202 SKU Inventory tracking Case Cost x Inv XF Ord 24 31 00 Minimum QDC On hand 1 29 Unit cost 36 1 p54 This example shows the Item table editor 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 73 3 6 1 1 Quick Tab Item PLU Maintenance Quick Tab The PLU price look up screen contains all the relevant information and parameter flags required to program an item for use on a front end POS system The screen is divided into several sub screens that can be selected by clicking on the Tab for that sub screen By default L BOSS displays the Quick tab This view shows a combination of fields from other tabs These fields were selected to make day to day operations easier The quick tab would be easier to explain last but since it shows first we will continue on The Quick tab is actually a repetition of fields available on other tabs in PLU maintenance The Quick screen allows you to access the basic information that changes most frequently for a product The example below in
16. 13 2 GL Interface Please take some time to read through the help manual to gain insight into how the GL Export program works Logivision s documentation and manuals are subject to change as new software versions become available Please ask your Logivision dealer about manual updates Logivision has attempted to make this document accurate Logivision is not responsible for any direct incidental or consequential damages resulting from this documentation or inaccuracies within Specifications are subject to change L BOSS export to GL is designed to take summarized transaction data and send the totals to an accounting system The export does not transfer each transaction separately It is an execution that reads the financial totals from L BOSS and sends summary data for the specified totals Getting started The GL export program is installed during the installation of the L BOSS program This guide explains how to set up and use the GL export program It does not explain how to set up a chart of accounts in your accounting application or notions like debits and credits It does not explain all the totals in L BOSS that need to be posted to have an interface that will balance That information should be available from an accountant familiar with your business operation Steps to follow to be able to use the Export to General Ledger module e Make sure the software option is licensed for use This should be done by a qualified agent
17. 2 2 1 L BOSS Main Menus The Main Menu The L BOSS main menu is the host or central application to all back store applications A L BOSS 003 901 File Modules Special Help Maintenance is Entry a gt Tasks I gt View log Tracker k gt Close This example shows the L BOSS Desktop e Click the L BOSS icon at the left of the main menu to select whether L BOSS will run as a service from the system tray or normally as an application from the button bar You will be prompted once to start L BOSS every time from the system tray When this option is selected the EXIT shortcut changes dynamically to a CLOSE shortcut button e This is useful in situations where L BOSS is being used as a store controller and thereby eliminating unnecessay shutdown e To return to running the system from the button bar repeat the operation selecting start L BOS from button bar Note You may see a money bag flashing to the lower left hand corner of the L BOSS screen This is a warning that cashier drawer limits have been exceeded Double click the icon to get a list of the operator on line You can also generate a report that shows cahisres with in drawer amounts different than 0 00 File Menu File Menu Options 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS Main Menus 15 2 1 1 With the exception of the Login Logout and Viewer options the File menu option accesses system set up options that are usually configured at
18. bd Access No User New Cashier Assistant Manager Owner Programmer Jv IV Iv IV Clerk IV 7 IV Iv 2 TOTAL SALES 3 Net Sales 5000 Dept mask Functions of Xv gt Bv Func 716 Host SAL Desc Department Alternate 57 Desc D partement Alpha parameters E Access A v A Iv IV Iv A Iv No User New Cashier Clerk Assistant Manager Owner Programmer 2 TOTAL SALES 3 Net Sales 5000 Dept mask 163 Functions 710 715 and 716 were modified to include totalizer 5000 in the bottom of the window By assigning a D in the operand we are advising L POS to generate department 2001 2008 Logivision 164 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 8 3 totals instead of generating sub department data as with the operand S Note When you edit the function table the file menu includes the send to host option Send to host The Send to host option of the File menu options is only available when the Host active option is selected to return data to a headquarter system The send to host option will allow output of the changes made on the local L BOSS machine back to a host system This means that changes can be made at a store and sent back up to the host system Select this option for the tables that may be edited locally in a store Please consider as well that changes sent back up to the headquarter system will be deployed to all termina
19. Common types of industry standard bar codes used throughout the retail sales market Vendor Code Vendors or suppliers usually have a proprietary code they use to track items they wholesale Often used when ordering or returning items to vendors linked to a cost 2001 2008 Logivision Index 335 Index item discount field 81 A About 52 About LogiVision 6 Account Customer Related Tables 142 Account View 142 Acrobat Reader 8 Active and Next prices 81 Adding 106 New Items 106 New Items by Copying 106 Adding new Batches 130 Alias 30 75 Allow 253 manual 253 scheduled 253 Allow multi store selection 26 Alpha Parameters 158 alternate lookup code 75 Always 106 copy 106 modify 106 New 106 An example of a markup calculation 81 applications 51 archiving data 11 assigned drawer 156 assigning security levels to operators 45 Associating a Photo witha Customer 143 associating items with labels 112 Associating Pictures With Items 95 Auto Declare 35 Auto load last file 323 Auto repaint 323 Auto Update from Batch 63 Automating Events 252 average merge time 18 B back end station 9 Back Office System Software 6 backup utility 11 Balancing cashiers 249 Base 81 Batches 130 Beep on red 285 behind the scenes 17 Best Price Option 130 Blank Fields 128 Bottle Link 76 Bottle Link Programming 120 Bottle Return 76 Brand 75 Bubble help 49 C Calcultate P
20. Description Value 0 05 Amount Totalizer number Environmental fee Description Amount Totalizer number This example shows a Bottle Link table record Link is the number you wish to assign to the value being programmed Link to is used to assign the current bottle link to a specific PLU rather than assigning a value to the bottle link This can be useful if the store wants to account for the bottle sales as department revenue By using a PLU to sell the bottle deposits the sales will be part of the sub department and department the PLU is linked to Note that the internal advanced flags bottle follows WIC status bottle follows FS status and bottle follows TAX status is only functional with bottle link records from the bottle link table If you use a PLU number in the Link to field the WIC FS and tax status of the deposit PLU will take the settings of the bottle deposit PLU not the PLU that it is linked to Also note that scanning empty containers after pressing a bottle refund button does not function with PLU linking Description Enter the description you want to use for this bottle link This description will not be used on the POS it is only a reference on the back end system The description used for the bottle deposit is taken from the totalizer 510 unless a different totalizer is specified in the set up on an individual record in this table Amount Enter the amount to be assigned to this bottle link Total
21. FROM company server com PS If there is no TO FROM or if the server is not defined there will be no error generated If you are not connected to the internet you may get an urgent message System System Tab Settings Information in the system tab is critical to L BOSS operation and should be fully understood before making modifications Settings depend largely on the type of station being installed such as server or secondary office station In network situations L BOSS uses the same database for all back office stations 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS Main Menus 31 Configuration BDE Server s main Directo CALBOSS Store Server s office directo 003 CALBOSS OFFICE i a ae Terminal las atabase type a 901 LBOSSsql MSSQL Controller User Password pon g Messages LPOS A EE V Use internal stored procedure System date Change manually f Change at midnight Last day of the week Compression 30 o Aal Messages 2 oo V Force date change Leading 0 14 Polling local This example shows the Configuration panel s System tab Server s main directory Enter the path that this PC will use to locate the main program directory on the L BOSS server notice the beside the mouse pointer when it s over the field double clicking in the field will browse the windows file directory On the L BOSS server this setting should point to C LBOSS yes we do need the tra
22. Jac J 3G Phone a Locate I Fax OK Cancel Once this type of list is open you can search several ways You can use the scroll bar to search manually or you can enter the first few letters or numbers if the field is numeric of the data you are searching for in the Locate box The search is eft justified which means that when you begin typing a description in the search table the cursor will move to the record in the table that meets the search criteria For example searching for the description bread in the PLU database descriptor field will move to the section of the file beginning by b Next it will attempt to move ahead to br If it finds br it will attempt to move to bre As soon as it cannot find the full description you searched for the cursor will stop moving and display the first record it finds with as much as possible of the descriptor you requested To begin a new search you must clear out the search data you entered the first time Once you find the data item you are searching for you may want to leave the search window and navigate up or down the list being displayed You can do this by clicking with the mouse anywhere on the list You can also press Enter to move from the Search box to the current list and move up or down the list to select the record you were searching for 2001 2008 Logivision 60 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 The second type of search window allows advanced users t
23. Nxt F3 Search This example shows the Electronic Journal Basic version The electronic journal allows reviewing sales transactions made on the L POS system The program is executed by running the EJ EXE executable in the POSWIN or LBOSS folder You can also use the EJ menu option from the L BOSS software Two program versions are available Basic and Professional version The basic version is included with L POS on each lane while the Professional EJ version is an optional purchase Call your L POS dealer to purchase the Professional version if it has not been enabled The first window shown here is the normal EJ layout This view of the EJ is used to review transactions The File menu allows rebuilding the pointer files and exiting from the software 8 1 Using the Electronic Journal EJ Viewer Menu Options File menu options 2001 2008 Logivision 262 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Missing transactions will list any transactions that are mising in the EJ file sequence Rebuild pointers will create files that assist LBoss in positioning start tranaction position for a given day Set printer font is used to define the font that will be used when print options are selected with the EJ utility Set journal directory is used to define the location where your journal files are stored Edit menu options The top menu section displays the search commands that have been defined on your system The bottom menu secti
24. Operator Table Programming This example shows an Operator table record As with all tables the edit tools on the toolbar allow you work with the selected record Modified As with other tables the a icon will change to 2 when a record is modified The flag will be reset after the modified record is successfully transferred to the front end Operator Enter the number this operator will use to log on to the L POS system Print name Enter the descriptor that will print on the cash register receipt when this cashier is using an L POS terminal Level This field is used to associate the operator with a security level to restrict usage of certain functions An operator with level 4 for example will have access to functions designated as level 4 and less First and Last name Enter the operator s first and last names here Target Enter the target where this cashier will be active This can be used to send certain 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 157 cashier records to certain stores only A cashier cannot be part of more than one target The default value is PAL which sends to all lanes in all stores Drawer L POS supports dual physical cash drawers Enter the drawer number that should open when this cashier works on the register Language This field is used to determine the language of the messages used on the system when this operator is signed on In the current release of L POS English
25. PLU Vendor code Cases Units Amount Weight F11 Save F2 Add F3 Delete F4 Cost Worksheet F6 Info F12 Post The screen is divided into 4 sections to improve data entry 1 Header information displays the general information you entered related to this order 2 Products on order shows a list of the items that have been placed on order 3 Item detailed information displays the information available from the database that may assist in establishing the order quantity including cost minimum stock level on hand etc 4 Operator input fields are used to enter the items and modify order quantity 2001 2008 Logivision 216 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Orders Files Edit View Vendor name Store Inventory date Vendor 1 Vendor 1 003 901 4719 2005 Inv PO Hh 013 F8 Review PAL Remark Po 1013 PB mus Versor cose Joescrgton eases urs amount _ vege Sores Case cost ST Untcost al Onhand OP Qty Ses Pug Vendor code Minimum Roan a Onordel 0 PLU Description l Vendor code Cases Units Amount We PS lr F2 Add F3 Delete F4 Cost F5 Print F6 Info When you request a manual order the form will appear blank as shown above Now you are ready to begin entering the items that you want to place on order For each item you want to add to the PO Select the item Confirm a quantity Confirm the cost Post the record into the order You can select an item by enteri
26. Terminal Table Programming 167 Terminals and Groups 167 Test 63 No sub department 63 PLU at zero price inlevel1 63 PLU price over 100 00 63 Show POS targets 63 Show Price targets 63 Unreferenced bottle link 63 Unreferenced sub department 63 Unreferenced tare link 63 Testing Item tables 137 text wrapping 320 Tizr sequence 164 To restore a file from a backup 327 totalizer files 164 Totalizer Link List 158 totalizer number 164 Totalizer Table Programming 164 tracking a process 17 18 19 Tracking cashier activity 285 transfer data to remote stores 167 Transfer Menu 177 trouble shoot 17 Type 76 U Unit of Measure 75 Unprocessed Files 259 unwanted access 16 Urgent Messages 259 Use scanner 63 user 45 user level 45 username 15 usernumber 15 user preference 16 Using Command directories 253 Using the inventory feature 91 Using the keyboard 7 Using the Statistics Data Test 137 Validation Req d 76 Var Tare 76 Vendor 88 Vendor Coupon 76 Vendor Table Programming 126 Version numbers 52 view 142 customer accounts 142 internal process 17 menu 19 PLU or Item list 58 polling process 21 View Log Utility 257 View on all terminals 253 View Previous Transactions 248 View Qry 193 Viewer 17 viewer menus 19 Viewing 58 Data Table Contents 58 Logs and Messages 257 Unprocessed Files 259 Urgent Messages 259 Visual customer confirmation 143 Visual Verify 76 W Watching the Front End 285 WIC 76 Windows Menu
27. The file list shows all the database tables then the INI files then the images SFiles and advertising files Define the exclusions and pres OK to return to the terminal programming screen When this data has been entered you will need to set the path that the server will use to send data or receive data from this terminal The Terminal s Inbox must be set to the location where the L POS terminal expects to see its received mail L POS normally monitors the C Inbox on its own hard drive for its mail That means that on the L BOSS server you must set the path as a remote directory by using the UNC for the location If you are programming the first terminal and you named the terminal POSO1 and set up its drive sharing to allow access to C the path to set for Mail Box Out would be POS01 C Inbox The Terminal s outbox is the location the server monitors to receive data from the L POS terminal This is set in the same format as the example above for register terminal 1 POS01 C Outbox In this case the back office will search for data from the L POS terminal in the outbox directory on the remote terminal Note An L BOSS terminal in a store should not have an inbox or an outbox At store level L BOSS does not need to send or receive data from itself An L BOSS created on a terminal list at the headquarters will normally have an inbox and an outbox because data will be sent to and received from that terminal The terminals you create must be a
28. To 003901 Date 4 28 2005 2 01 50 PM Subject System error 2 0 2 15 MSSQL X PRIORITY 1 Error The last file that caused the error is missing It is extremely important that each file is being process in the order received The processing of all files has been suspended until next re start The file was F1234567690001 001 Open the LBOSS gt File menu use the option Bypass file processing order security Typing accept is your acknowledgement that the normal data processing routine has been aborted and you accept the risk of information being processed out of sequence CA L BOSS 003 901 Programmer Modules Special Help Login LogOut Language Bypass file processing order security view internal process n view Polling status v Maintenance Execute command file Deploy Individual file Configuration Entry Send urgent messages to L POS E i Tasks Date conversion Messages View log Show Tips F Tracker Exit System ready 901 901 901 901 901 2001 2008 Logivision Electronic Journal 261 8 Electronic Journal Electronic Journal Utility Electronic Journal Viewer ioj x Fil e Edit View Print Help Transaction Cashier Customer 647 Programmer Date Time Cust Store Terminal 2001 09 24 21 41 47 001 001 2001 09 24 7 26 0 Kb PLU 6 COKE CLASSIC 12 02 CAN Bottle deposit PLU 2 UNCLE BEN S RICE H Esc Exit F2 Date PgUp Prv PgDn
29. Trigger quantity Discount rate Client Level Promo ID This number is used to associate products to the free item promotion The promo ID number is assigned to the product or products in PLU maintenance For example every 10 purchases of a 10 pound bag of dog food entitles the customer to the next bag for free If the purchase is only applicable on one specific item you will assign a unique Promo ID code to that item Then you create the Free item record here by entering the same Promo ID code you assigned to the dog food product The Promo ID setting is entered in PLU maintenance on the POS tab If you want to allow different flavors of the dog food to accumulate together you would enter the same Promo ID code to each of the different flavors of dog food Then you create the Free item record here by entering the same Promo ID code you assigned to the qualifying dog food products The Promo ID setting is entered in PLU maintenance on the POS tab Description This is a reference field only The system will print information on the customer receipt telling him how many more items are required to achieve his discount When many items are in the same product reward promotion for example different flavors of dog food you would want the receipt to show something generic to the customer like Your next Science Diet 20KG will be free There is a flag in the PosSetup gt System gt General gt Advanced settings that allow you to cho
30. Valid entry 0 01 to 99 99 this is a percentage field Address 14 on the TEC ECR F1203 Base Price Valid entry 0 00 to 9999 99 positive entry only F1204 Package Qty Max 2 digit entry Valid entry 0 to 99 Address 8 on the TEC ECR NOTE Package Quantity will not be sent unless Package Price has a price set other than 0 00 F1207 M amp M Mix and Match Mix and Match Group Number M amp M number will not be sent unless base and package price and package quantity are set Valid entry 0 to 255 Address 13 on the TEC ECR F1225 Dollar Discount Valid entry 2 digits 0 99 100 or greater will send 99 to the TEC 2001 2008 Logivision L Register interface 311 ECR Adress 15 on the TEC ECR F1237 Divisor Unit Weight Code Valid entry 0 to11 Address 12 on the TEC ECR Subdepartment field numbers and description F03 Link Group Valid entry field 0 to 30 Address 1 on the TEC ECR Department programming F05 Bottle Link Link Plu Table Number Valid entry 0 to 99 Address 10 on the TEC ECR F30 Preset Price Valid entry 0 00 to 9 999 99 or 999 999 Address 3 on the TEC ECR Department programming F239 Max Amount Valid entry 0 00 to 99 999 99 Address 7 on the TEC ECR Department programming F240 Min Amount Valid entry 0 00 to 99 999 99 Address 8 on the TEC ECR Department programming 2001 2008 Logivision 312 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 13 13 1
31. You can also enter the dates manually keeping in mind that the date format for these fields follows the Windows Regional settings setup for date formats on the host computer Discount Enter the discount amount in dollars if the vendor offers a dollar based discount for this cost break Discount Enter the discount amount as a percentage if the vendor offers a percentage based discount for this cost break Unit Cost The Unit cost field is the calculated cost per unit based on the information entered above You cannot edit this field directly and appears as a confirmation This field is handy to quickly see the difference between the Regular Cost unit price and the Cost break unit cost 3 6 1 7 Inventory Tab Item PLU Maintenance Inventory Tab 2001 2008 Logivision 92 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Using the inventory feature The system can track inventory levels to assist the ordering and receiving process The first step is to define whether stock on hand and reordering is being used on the item These settings are available in the PLU maintenance The inventory settings are located in the same column as the regular retail price on level 1 Note that changing to another level does not affect the inventory settings you make All price levels share the same stock on hand The table below shows the fields that can be defined in regards to the inventory tracking for each item There are four fields
32. application from the L BOSS desktop For help on printing labels refer to the Printing Labels help page under the Report System section in this manual Sub department Table Sub department Overview L POS requires the linking of an item to a sub department for several reasons Rather than taking a daily list of each product sold which be very lengthy for certain types of stores a sub department report is used as an overview of what each area in the store is doing Sub departments are in turn linked to departments to provide a more consolidated view overall Examples of departments may be Grocery services etc The Grocery department could in turn be broken down to many more sub departments grocery taxable grocery meat diary etc Sub departments all have individual flags for taxability scale etc Once programmed item programming time can be reduced by associating the item with a sub department using the 2001 2008 Logivision 114 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 6 3 1 Follow sub department option available in the item s Quick or POS tab This way you only need to manage the exceptions within a sub department When you edit the sub department table the file menu includes the send to host option Send to host The Send to host option of the File menu options is only available when the Host active option is selected to return data to a headquarter system The send to host option will allow outpu
33. from the kit item The POS uses the tax flags of each individual item included in the kit A kit can be set as price required or as visual verify But items in the kit will not use those flags even if they are set Keep in mind that if customer entry is required it must be made before kit items are entered in the POS transaction 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 101 oe ho d By Seles f m Item number F2 0000000005899 Deluxe aquarium kit Active Next REG Over 50 Promo Quick Object Pos Price Kit Categor kooo Family 11997 Item detail N Kit Report code Inventory Sales Picture EEL Alias Brand anua 200 Unit of mesure Size description 5 Gallon each v Comment Ss This will toggle the cost tab to become the kit tab Access the kit tab to select the items that should be deducted from inventory when the kit PLU is sold 2001 2008 Logivision 102 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 ca oe 4 gt Bv fm ltem number F2 Active Next 0000000005899 11995 M a REG Over 50 Promo Quick Object POS Price Kit Inventory Sales Picture ECL Deluxe aquarium kit PLU Description Oty Price _ Amount Ratio Cost No 0000000000058 Aquarium 5GAL 41 79 95 7995 60 01 4500 Iv 0000000000588 Aquarium stones 2 14 95 2990 2244 1500 Iv 0000000000589 Aquarium
34. situations only used for the head office L BOSS only Cleanup Database maintenance options Load Files Used to bring information into the database from external sources Security Assign user access levels for functions and tables Configuration This menu option opens the L BOSS configuration menu described in the help pages below this heading 2001 2008 Logivision 26 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 2 1 8 1 Configuration Company Email System Misc Host Cleanup Load files Security Company name Logivision Address 210 Sir Wilfrid Laurier City prov state Zip Postal code Beloeil ac J3G 4G Phone number 450 464 21 31 Configure format Fax number 450 464 5673 M Allow multi store selection Compiled date 31 05 2007 Update until 31 10 2007 Advanced This example shows the L BOSS File menu Configuration panel Company Company Tab Settings The Company information is normally entered the first time you launch the L BOSS application This information is used throughout the application For example when report pages are generated L BOSS uses the company name and address to personalize the printed and on screen result Enter your company information in the appropriate spaces Allow multi store selection This option is used to determine if this L BOSS installation will control multiple stores for pricing inventory etc When selected this option wi
35. the transaction files within the dates selected The same for cashier Leaving eithe field blank will ignore the filter and display the transaction files with STORE COUPONS for all customers or for all cashiers Note The Transaction field is used to enter a specific transaction number and will locate only the transactions with that number within the selected date range Once the dates terminal store customer cashier and transaction fields have been set L Tracker is ready to begin the filtering process The first time the program is used the processing time will vary depending on several factors Journal size and date range will determine the time it takes for L Tracker to build the database table it needs to perform the further data searches available with the Tracker program To begin the processing press the Go icon Each transaction in the date range you selected will be read by the program and records will be inserted into a new system database table As explained in the previous paragraph this may take some time so be prepared to wait for the results list Once the process is complete the transactions that respond to your pre selection criteria will be displayed in a list below the selected criteria As you scroll up and down this list you will be able to view the details of each transaction to the left Now it is time to add the search criteria to locate transactions containing STORE COUPONS The area below the results list is used t
36. 1 00 aj June 2003 B Balancing type Daily Sun Mon Tue Wedl Thu Fri Sat 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 B12 13 14 i a 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 View 29 30 Today 6 11 2003 Past This example shows the Entry application s Pickup Loan and Declaration utility Choose the cashier date and balancing type for the transaction entry then press the View button to see the theoretical amounts that should be in the POS drawer or have already been picked up The selected cashier s name appears at the top of the screen as a reference so you can tell which cashier is being treated If you use Loans at the beginning of a cashier s shift to create the drawer or float amounts enter the Loan amounts by tender type for the current cashier 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 251 If you use Pickups during a cashier s shift to remove tender types from the drawer amounts enter the Pickup amounts by tender type for the current cashier Pickups can also be done from the front end L POS and appear along with all entries made within the Entry application s Pickup option At the end of a cashier s shift you can enter the declared amounts by cashier To declare amounts enter each tender type counted from the cashier s drawer When all entries are complete press the POST button to save the data All posted entries will appear in all financial and cashier rep
37. 167 Eala EE el aE A E A E E E E 167 Gift Certificate S cecc cecescecteecectd icosaeder adsan ddira ct deccuecededatecescceceutecdevsuedeccuecedadatecescereeey cctenssudseveniccoversedes 173 Navigation Menu sssri tsuarekin iinn Aana ANNAA AAAS AA ARANAN ARAN AANA AAA ARRENA ANANAS KARKAAN ANENA 175 Transier Ment sssaaa AAAA EAEL AA 177 Windows Menu os cine ccec cece cece cece cet ceete cient a ete cee eb beeare sien eboeediestbenese shacestertneceers 177 Report System 178 Report TY POS sissi E EESE Report Selection Opening Reports ss ssiiiiasuninrennnennaenvnnn datena nunnien teceteceseueredelaestecectuetecelanssncneueteeeeues aceesenteeeauees 182 RE PONt VIC WON aces tesserae aca cee EA AA 184 Repor prinio sscscsnennna cece ede ccetet eeece de lectec hex ence edecetteceectelecct havewcthedeceds 186 Printing Labels ian ices cs se cccns Secs ceit Seen ene cee cee ch eeente tte ened ceenennt deen send ceceente denecent doeseustdeeetentdbeeensectoesnute 186 Report Properes siinne n KEENE EEEE An AAS EAEE EA 190 Report SOL Edit t scisitccccccsccecesecssctctesscteeecscetee sacesansceceteue sna casenscetenestuerucecueateuestuceecesetvsiesstaeeeses 193 Entry Module 196 Inventory WACKING esssrcneenmnnn ctteccestteeenne cccescancttestus ctdeccuettdeeene cccesusctdesnuecttesuetterentes 199 Inventory item MAINTENANCE cccecceeeeeeeesseeeeeeeseeeeseeesseeenenenseeeaseeseenenenessenesseeenenecsneeaseeeseeesenesseeesseneneeeseneeasees 199 Greate vendor Til
38. 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 235 June 2 you receive 25 boxes and now have 75 boxes June 3 at 8 00 am you open the store verify Kleenex and find 72 boxes because 3 were sold last night You decide to Post the count at 72 boxes on June 3 Then your shipper says he was sleeping on May 30 and forgot to open a pallet that contained 100 boxes of Kleenex He shows you the receive slip and you tell him to post the transaction on May 30 the day it was really received He posts the receiving transaction of 100 boxes of Kleenex on inventory date May 30 prior to the most recent count This transaction will be added to the inventory on hand then and will add to the inventory on hand now But as soon as the internal inventory calculation procedure is invoked the system will return to the 72 boxes of Kleenex that you declared on June 3 The current stock level is computed by taking the last count found removing sales adding receives and adjusting for transfers and adjustments according to the movement in those transactions Since the last count date found for Kleenex was June 3 9 everything done prior to that date is ignored To correct the error that your received caused you would need to post the receiving on June 3 after the count was done Other things that needs to be taken into account before using the count function No matter when it is actually done a count is reputed as performed at the stroke of midni
39. 3 e June 3 at 8 00 am you open the store verify Kleenex and find 72 boxes because 3 were sold last night e You decide to Post the count at 72 boxes on June 3 Then your shipper says he was sleeping on May 30 and forgot to open a pallet that contained 100 boxes of Kleenex He shows you the receive slip and you tell him to post the transaction on May 30 the day it was really received e He posts the receiving transaction of 100 boxes of Kleenex on inventory date May 30 prior to the most recent count e This transaction will be added to the inventory on hand then and will add to the inventory on hand now But as soon as the internal inventory calculation procedure is invoked the system will return to the 72 boxes of Kleenex that you declared on June 3 The current stock level is computed by taking the last count found removing sales adding receives and adjusting for transfers and adjustments according to the movement in those transactions Since the last count date found for Kleenex was June 3 everything done prior to that date is ignored To correct the error that your received caused you would need to post the receiving on June 3 after the count was done Other things that needs to be taken into account before using the count function e No matter when it is actually done a count is reputed as performed at the stroke of midnight on that transaction date This means that sales or receives done the same date will be removed or
40. 9 40 11 PM Sample 12 7 2005 9 40 12 PM Touch 1024x 768 12 7 2005 9 40 12 PM Gas pump server SimCtrl 3 22 2007 11 43 03 AM Gas 1024x766 8 Pumps samples 3 22 2007 11 43 43 AM Gas sample data 3 22 2007 11 44 34 AM Gas pump server SmartEcho 3 22 2007 3 54 11 PM Available loads 11 pumps 200 07 12 16 pumps 2007 0 12 Basic Must load EN 1024 x768 touch round EN 1024 x768 touch round taskbar EN 1024 x768 touch square taskbar v Load selected files From disk Cancel From the Load file menu press the From disk button Locate the LRegister option file on the CD or from your download location Select the file and press the Open button This will copy the LBO data from the CD to your LBOSS Available loads list the lower portion of the Load files tab window 2001 2008 Logivision 294 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 12 3 Configuration Company Email System Misc Comm Cleanup Loadfiles Security File load history list Basic Must load 12 7 2005 9 40 11 PM Sample 12 7 2005 9 40 12 PM Touch 1024x 768 12 7 2005 9 40 12 PM Gas pump server SimCtrl 3 22 2007 11 43 03 AM Gas 1024x766 8 Pumps samples 3422 2007 11 43 43 AM Gas sample data 3422 2007 11 44 34 AM Gas pump server SmartEcho 3 22 2007 3 54 11 PM Available loads Gas sample data GLExpoarty2 L HTML Terminal Monitor Logivision 2007 09 2 Logivision 2007 10 12 LRegister v 2 0 0 2 ROM 1 00 1 008 Load selected fi
41. 999 99 100 000 or greater L BOSS will send 99 999 99 the maximum value and a message is reported Max void This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR Max refund This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR ECR s specific Preset Price Preset price set to the ECR department The TEC ECR will only support 6 digit 0 00 9999 99 or 999 999 10 000 or greater L BOSS will send 9 999 99 the maximum value and a message is reported Programmable address 3 in department programming on the MA 1595 The field is a price field but does support 3 digits to the right of the decimal point for gas EX Gas Flag no set on L BOSS Enter Data Display ECR 1 789 1 79 1 79 1 999 2 00 2 00 1 225 1 22 1 22 1 235 1 24 1 24 Sub Link Forced Link in department programming at the TEC ECR Single Item The entry sequence will immediately finalize the sale as cash sale when operated outside a sale Negative Allows a department to have negative transactions Gas Used to enter gasoline sales Gasoline sales cannot be used as the preset type The sale amount of gasoline must be entered NOTE Scalable and Gas Cannot be set at the same time at the ECR however L BOSS can set and send both settings and the ECR will accept it Split Package This feature is only supported by the TEC MA 1595 and MA 1650 Store Coupon This feature is only supported by the TEC MA 1595 and MA 1650 Compulsory Manual Tare To allow a manual weight entry for this product
42. BOSS that it should call the L Register program sending all information through the ECR Interface e The Terminal s Outbox is a physical disk location As with L POS lanes the folder must exist Be sure to create the actual Outbox folder then indicate its location in the Terminal s Outbox field 12 4 Events to communicate with the ECR The LBO installation creates several new events to handle ECR communications These events are all contained in the ECR communication event after the LBO is installed 2001 2008 Logivision 296 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 P Task list Description Scheduled Load Nextevent 3 lt DIR gt ECR Daily 2 Stack Report 0 Manual Auto ECR EJ Stack Report 1 Manual Auto ECR amp stack report 0 Manual ECR Financial Manual ECR Cashier x Manual ECR PLU x Manual ECR Department x report SDP Manual ECR Hourly Manual ECR Send Time Manual LRegister Setup Manual LRegister Backup Manual Execute Edit Add Close Refer to the Events set up for more information on how to add modify or remove events 12 5 L Register set up event Use the LRegister setup event to modify the settings L BOSS uses with the ECR s The following windows appear 2001 2008 Logivision L Register interface 297 LRegister setup Register type TECIS95DRV ll V Clear report Don t send to register Ok Cancel Clear report Don t send t
43. Event Task editor Daily Backup event The backup files are created in folders under the LBOSS Office Backup with the day of the week as the folder name When and How to Use the Data Table Backups These backups are only used if the data tables become corrupt or if for some reason they do not contain the correct data If this situation should arise it may become necessary to replace the data table restoring it to a previous last known as good state It is rare that all tables become corrupt so it is essential to know which table to restore By default the File 2001 2008 Logivision 330 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Maintenance utility displays all the tables and their internal names it finds in the current database when it opens To restore a file from a backup e Open the File Maintenance View menu and select the day of the week to restore the table from e The table list now shows the table names and the associated backup files for that weekday e Select the table to restore you can hold down the Ctrl key to select more than one table e Press the Restore button at the bottom of the File Maintenance utility NOTE The Edit menu also has preset selection patterns that simplify the selection process For example if you want to select all the report tables use the Edit menu s Select Report files option View File Properties and Contents The File Maintenance utility can also
44. Items not Found in the database o Inventory Flag not turned on o No vendor associated with this item o Items are not sold by this vendor Do you want to see the exception file now Press Yes to view a list of the items that will not be processed as part of the order If the items are not set up properly in the database you need to correct them and assign the inventory status to each item as explained previously Once you have viewed the skipped items list all other items that were processed will be sent to the order screen for you to process the order The skipped items are saved in an exception file that be processed after the corrections are made to the product set up This file will be named RF0013_Except Ord if the original file was named RF0013 Ord L BOSS appends _ Except to the filename to distinguish from other files Orders to multiple suppliers with Hand Held device When you place an order with either the Worthington RF or the Unitech RS232 model hand held devices you need to segregate your orders manually for each vendor The system will not automatically split an order from multiple vendors when the orders are made with the Worthington RF or the Unitech RS232 type device If you are working with a device the uses the HTML wireless device monitor application the L BOSS will split the file you collect into orders for the different suppliers of the products you scanned and ordered L BOSS uses the default vendor flag to lo
45. L Tracker stores information from the transaction files in smaller pointer files Place the From date calendar selection on the first date that you want to create or rebuild the pointers for Only dates that need to be rebuilt will be processed Set printer font Set the font used by your printer when a print option is selected within the L Tracker menu Set receipt width Set the width of the transaction details viewer to the left of the results list Language L Tracker language of operation can be set manually using this option The program will run according to the language set up of the current user If no language was defined for the user L Tracker will use the language defined in Windows regional settings This language setting over rides any programmed or automatic use of language Exit Use this option to terminate the L Tracker properly You can also use the program close icon red X to terminate L Tracker Edit menu The edit menu is split into two sections The top section which may be empty on your system displays search queries that were saved from previous sessions The bottom section allows you to add serach queries to the top section of the menu or ro remove search queries from the top section e Remember actual search Use this option to store the custom search statement you are currently using For example you have set the Custom search window to find all transactions containing the text Marlboro light If you select Reme
46. Margin of profit C Markup of cost F Allow duplicate alias MV Process returns as payments Set the system to automatically send the totals to the declared totalizers Auto declare Cancel OK This example shows the Configuration panel s Misc tab 2001 2008 Logivision 36 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Gift certificate section Gift cert valid for is used to determine the expired date that will be printed on gift certificates issued by L POS Next number is the number that L BOSS will assign to the next gift certificate issued by the POS when the POS button is configured to issue the gift certificate number at the time of sale rather than using pre programmed numbers Gift certificate expiration 1 If there is no date in the EXPIRATION field in the gift certificate maintenance AND there is no setting in LBOSS for number of days for gift certificate expiration the gift certificate will never expire 2 If the number of days for gift certificate in the miscellaneous tab of the configuration of L BOSS is set to 0 the expiration of the gift card if any will not be modified when it is sold If there is a number in that field L POS will set the expiration date to the date the certificate is sold plus the number of days in the configuration field for gift card expiration days 3 There is a new flag in the advance set up System Gift certificate never expires This option takes
47. Menu Register Menu Options The Register menu contains several less frequently used options that access system tables normally configured at installation Use the Register menu to access the following tables to create or modify entries Operator Table All system users must have a record in the operator table even if they are not cashiers Function Table The front end terminals use functions to define the keyboard keys or touch screen buttons Totalizer Table Functions used on the front end terminals must collect quantities and or amounts during normal operation used for the reporting aspects of the system software Terminals and Terminal Groups Every terminal or back end station that accesses the system must have a record in the Terminal table and terminals must exist in groups for communication or database access Gift Certificates If your store uses certificates as tender they must exist as records in the certificate table to show up in reports 2001 2008 Logivision 156 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 8 1 Operator Table M Operators ae He ao Bv 003000003 Operator fo Date hired Termination date Print name Level 2007 09 04 Lay Social Security Birth date First Last name Lary Curran Target Drawer Language Email Address Security Address 1 12134 Grand Address 2 E i i City lloisbug SS Prov State oN Postal Zip L6Y7T8 Comp Phones o ooo
48. New creates the new item and blanks all the existing data fields and continues using the same process for every new item code entered The QueryForm panel will not be presented again until the Maintenance application is restarted This will save time by reducing the operator prompting Copy uses the item on the screen as a template for the new item being added Most of the data fields will be copied to the new item This is time saving when creating items that have common information You can control how the system copies multiple targets In the L BOSS configuration advanced settings select the way you want your system to behave You can choose to always copy multiple target items to the new item never copy the multiple targets oir to prompt the user So if you are working with a multi store system with fifferent price zones or different cost targets this should help you save time when copyingin new records Always copy uses the item on the screen as a template for all new items being added All data fields will be copied to the new items The QueryForm panel will not be presented again until the Maintenance application is restarted Modify existing actually replaces the item number UPC for the item on the screen Once deployed the old code will no longer exist in the database Please read the warning below before using the Modify option Always modify replaces the UPC for all subsequent items being modified The QueryForm panel will not be
49. Non referenced Price above In other words items that have information in the L BOSS Object table but have no associated record in the Price table NOTE f you double click the number field a list of the items without a Price table record appears PLU too short This is the number of items that have an invalid PLU number because it is too short 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 141 PLU too long This is the number of items that have an invalid PLU number because it is too long Deleted Items L BOSS keeps track of items that have been deleted from the Object table but not yet removed from the POS table used to program the front end terminals Records not Deployed These are items in the current Object table that have been modified but not yet deployed to the target front end terminals Sub departments This is the number of Sub departments programmed in the Sub department table Departments This is the number of Departments programmed in the Department table Batches If you are using batches this shows the batches that exist in the system including their status Promo Price or Not Active For more about Batches in L BOSS see the Batches help topic in this manual Items in Batch Shows the number of items in the batch type above Item Target The target data that is being tested for the results that show in the Statistics panel This determines which Object table is being used fo
50. PLU changes When you change the price of an item in the store and use the satellite to send it to the lanes it will also be sent to the head office If you use deploy all changes in the store the changes are not sent to the host 2001 2008 Logivision Monitoring Utility 285 11 Monitoring Utility Watching the Front End L BOSS includes a monitoring utility that allows you to view the current transactions from any L POS lane in the installation To launch the Monitoring utility open the Windows Start menu Programs LBOSS and select the Monitoring option The Monitoring utility is useful in watching cashiers activity during transactions Note Monitoring is also used to output transaction data to security systems Consider placing a shortcut to the Monitor exe application in the system startup folder Users should be trained to leave the application open at all times 11 1 Monitor menu These selections are available on the File menu New This will clear the current monitor session so yo can start over Open Use this selection to manually open a POS lane to monitor Enter the store number and lane number of the terminal you want to see Note that terminals should be in the same workgroup to facilitate monitoring Note You can also use the button to select the terminals to monitor Place a check mark beside the terminals you want to view then click the check mark button above the list You can o
51. Print F5 buttons becomes Worksheet Some buttons or menu options may appear grayed out at some points in transactions This is normal because they are not available at that point For example the Delete option is not available for an order you are working on It is available if you recall an order that was posted but not yet received The Entry module is used for transaction entries that affect stock control as well as some cashier balancing operations Inventory control has a prerequisite each item must be created in the L BOSS item maintenance You must assign the purchase format and the cost for each vendor that supplies the product in the Cost PLU table tab In the Inventory tab you must assign the Inv flag to activate Inventory tracking if you want to receive the item and maintain the stock on hand To use the suggested re order option the Ord flag must be set to on NOTE tems should have a Count before L BOSS can accurately report on hand inventory When you manually set an item to be tracked in the Inventory tab L BOSS sets the starting count to 0 However if you use a global change to set the inventory tracking on all items at once you must perform a count Before trying to maintain inventory on items make sure that all items to track have a starting count before receiving or adjusting stock For detailed help on item maintenance please refer to the Item Table help section in this manual You can use the Entry mod
52. ROD 1 Onode 85 2 PLU Description pi Vendor code Cases Units Amount Wer Fit Save F2 Add F3 Delete F4 Cost Worksheet F6 Info F12 Post For a count transaction you must enter the item using the PLU number you cannot enter the item using the vendor code You may use an alias to find the main PLU programmed in the system Count can only be entered as units weight may be used for scale items Proceed to save post or use the other functions the same way they are used for orders receiving etc Counting Inventory NOTE tems must have a Count before L BOSS can accurately report on hand inventory When you manually set an item to be tracked in the Inventory tab L BOSS sets the starting count to 0 However if you use a global change to set the inventory tracking on all items at once you must perform a count Before trying to maintain inventory on items make sure that all items to track have a starting count before receiving or adjusting stock 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 237 Physical inventory counting is required to reset the inventory levels to actual on hand amounts e Access the Count option and enter the store number and other header information to store with the count data Choose the date this count was made on Note that the count for a given date is added to other transactions done the same day For example if you receive 10 pieces and you sell 5 pieces the stock on
53. Remote Support Service full usage tracking with unique session tokens created by customer support rep httos Awww iremotepc com Go To Meeting tracking of meeting IDs used and persons involved need to be tracked in support tickets https www gotomeeting com LiveMeeting tracking of meeting IDs used and persons involved need to be tracked in support tickets http office microsoft com en us livemeeting default aspx UltraVNC configure to require customer to initiate access and to connect to a specific IP address or range for support connectivity and persons involved need to be tracked in support tickets http Awww uvne com 2001 2008 Logivision About the L BOSS application 13 Encryption Logivision does not use any data encryption because it is not needed within our application The credit interfaces we provide do not control pin pads or card data communication No sensitive card data is stored in the L POS or other Logivision applications Nonetheless it is important to know that Logivision has chosen software partners that are PCI CISP approved These partners have been validated to ensure that data is not stored that can lead to any type of compromise For detailed information on requirements to meet PCI compliancy you should review the PCI Implementation guide for L POS v1 01 Pdf document delivered with this application 2001 2008 Logivision 14 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0
54. Send to host is selected when you are editing PLU s all PLU changes will return to host Please consider as well that changes sent back up to the headquarter system will be deployed to all terminals that are part of the same target group for that file type This means 2001 2008 Logivision 62 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 that if a price is changed at store 3 and all stores share the information on that product the change will make it to the other stores in the next communication cycle NOTE As with most Windows style programs the Maintenance application s desktop supports Multi Windowing meaning there may be several tables windows open at the same time The dynamic File menu always displays the options for the currently selected or in focus table The selected table will always be on top of the others its top bar will be different than other not selected tables The table top bar colors are based on the colors that you have selected for your Windows desktop File Menu Options Login Logout and Language are identical to the same options in the L BOSS main application described in the L BOSS Main Menus help section in this manual Bubble help When toggled on the Maintenance application will show short help when the mouse hovers over an area that has hints SQL Command Warning This option should only be accessible to programmers You should only use this option if you are certain that you und
55. Sl 1 Selective Itemizer 1 To allow discounts on selective items Sl 2 Selective Itemizer 2 To allow discounts on selective items Price Print off TEC MA 1535 option only 2001 2008 Logivision L Register interface 309 Gift card dept Use this to set the item as a gift card sales department 12 10 Operator programming An extra tab related to the TEC ECR is added when the L Register option is installed M Operators 003000001 Operator 2222 Date hired Termination date Print name Level Terminal 2 Social Security Birth date First Last name Virtual ls Terminal 2 Email Target Drawer Language r PAL Address Security ECR specific Type of operator Open the ECR Specific tab to set the operator type for the TEC MA 1595 Operators can be set to Cashier Cashier for training Supervisor Refer to the L BOSS operator guide section for further information on programkig operators NB You must use sequential numbers when programming the operators If the register was set up for 20 operators you must create operators 01 to 20 Youy cannot use a number higher that 99 when working with the TEC ECR The user number must be 2 digit numeric The password must be 2 digit numeric 2001 2008 Logivision 310 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 12 11 12 12 ECR Reports The LRegister option adds new reports to allow X or Z of the ECR You
56. The other item 7763 will not be added to the advertisement unless a picture is associated to the item 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 135 File menu gt Select primary image folder Select the folder where your advertising images are placed If you want AddBatch to associate an image to a PLU automatically you need to name the image file with the same PLU number as the item in the batch Take care that a 14 digit plu number will search for a 14 digit image file the images can be BMP JPG GIF etc If no corresponding image is found in the Primary image folder AddBatch will search for a corresponding image in LBOSS Office lmages Take note that these images will usually be too small to use for the advertising module View menu The view menu allows you to choose between several different layouts for the item list 3 6 6 1 1 Selecting an image Promotion Advertising File view Help Batch List Batch t 2 agak v z Place a check in the EndDate 01 03 2008 Total 6 Item s bix to add a batch to HE 3 Price Pek Price teh advertising file 0 69 0 79 Fa 00000000000066 0 69 0 69 0 69 00000000007763 1 25 Generate When no image is found for a PLU in the batch the item will not be advertised Items that have no image display a red X rather than the image on the item list To assign an image to the item you need to follow this procedure 1 Double click the item number 2 Brow
57. a new Label object for the template Clicking it opens a Label editor where you can edit the text that the label will display in the report The Justify option is used to position the field value or text within the object It does not affect the object s template position After clicking the OK button point the mouse cursor anywhere in the template and click to have the new label object appear You can then determine its final template position and size using the nodes NOTE You can also change the label s justification after it has been created by selecting the object and right clicking it to open the object menu and selecting the Justify option Select Field is used to create a new template field object Field objects are normally associated with the report s sq file When the report is generated the field object value is 2001 2008 Logivision Form Manager 323 determined by the query Line Tool Use this tool to create horizontal or vertical lines to graphically define special report or form areas in the template The line is a graphic object only it cannot have any values Rectangle Tool Use this tool to create rectangles to graphically define special report or form areas in the template The rectangle is a graphic object only it cannot have any values The rectangle tool is also used to define a frame for a graphic object bmp file format only After drawing a rectangle right click the object an
58. added to the count no matter when the count is actually input e This means that if you come in at 10 00 and count 5 boxes of Kleenex and post that count the system should show 5 in the on hand field for Kleenex e f you had sold 2 boxes of Kleenex that morning the system will show 3 boxes on hand for Kleenex because the Count transaction is reputed as performed at midnight to start the day e So you need to make sure that the counts are made first thing in the morning before other transactions that affect the inventory e Or you can count your stock after close today and make the count entry tomorrow morning No matter what else you do it will still be accurate because what you had last night will be input as what you started with the next morning Physical count Stock Counts The count function is used when you want to confirm current inventory levels and freeze them at this point as the starting reference level for a new period There is no exact time a count transaction must be executed on L BOSS Typically people may execute a count once a month or once a year You may count the inventory by sections it does not need to all be counted at the same moment Every time a count transaction is performed the transactions dated previous to the count date are no longer considered in the calculation of the on hand values This sounds complex but it isn t Imagine that we are June 1 You verify Kleenex and you have 50 boxes in stock
59. all positive sales plus the absolute value of all negative sales This is the Total Sales Tlzr 2 of every SIL file taxes included Its range is 0 00 to 19 999 999 999 98 e Negative GT with L POS version 2 1 5 9 and up and with L BOSS only Totalizer 4002 is the total of all negative sales This is the Total sales Tlzr 2 of every SIL file taxes included where the transaction total is negative Its range is 9 999 999 999 99 to 0 00 e The grand totals do not represent the sales information They are provided as a simple verification method to insure that no report has been misplaced To verify data continuity subtract the previous day totals from today s total HALO Highest Allowable Limit Override function used to allow sales over the programmed limit often manager required security level protected Inbox A physical disk location folder where information is received as a file when deployed a target Key Protection A physical device used to protect from illegal use of the software copies number of stations lanes etc The key is installed on one system station and runs a special program that allows access to registered modules Key Reader The program that runs on the machine in the system that physically hosts the software protection key Launch Start a process execute a command file Loans The in drawer amounts used to begin a cashier s shift LQD Limited quantity discount or the maximum number of an item a cus
60. allows using a single PLU code to track all different package sizes of the product Note Items using price type P cannot be placed in a batch for sale or price change Now the items exist in the database and you are ready to use the inventory transaction module Inventory transactions Entry module 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 207 Entry module Programmer Files Modules Yiew Help Recetving Orders R Adjustment l Count R Transter R Pickup o i L The Entry module is used for all inventory transactions except for the sale or return of items on the POS terminals The menu options for entry are structured as follows File menu accesses the following options Login to enter your operator ID Language selection Compute on hand inventory This will force the system to re calculate on hand values This may be required if you have re processed transactions from past days View log Exit Modules provide access to the different applications included in the entry system Receiving Adjustment Orders Count Pickup Transfer View is used to access past transactions made on the Entry system Receiving Orders Adjustment 2001 2008 Logivision 208 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Count Transfers Help provides access to the help file and version information Contents Function keys and menu options available in the Entry transaction screens Within the receiv
61. are the coupon family If vendor authentication is used this coupon would be accepted when products with in the leading sequence of the 10 digit code are scanned If Coupon family authentication is also used then only products beginning with 12345111 would qualify the coupon to be accepted Link to Use this field to link the sale of another PLU record to this first PLU record This is useful for businesses that have normally accounted for bottle sales as department revenue By using link PLU L BOSS will account for bottle revenue in the sub department the item is associated with Note that the internal advanced flags bottle follows WIC status bottle follows FS status and bottle follows TAX status is only functional with bottle link records from the bottle link table Label The Print flag is used internally by the system It is selected when a price is changed so that a label will be printed for this item the next time you print labels The Type window allows you to select a label type that you want to use for this item Double click to select from the available labels you have on your system 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 81 3 6 1 5 Price Tab Item PLU Maintenance Price Tab The L POS PLU pricing is modified in the Item Maintenance screen If you are using single item pricing you should change the price from the Quick tab To modify any other price type you will need to select the Price tab
62. be a front end operator function that sends a request to the back end to force the date change This same option change manually allows a non 24 hour operation to balance their cashiers at 3 00PM if they wish or to allow sales made up to 1 00AM to be included in the previous day s sales and not included in the calendar day in which they are made Last day of week Use this value to set the week ending date This flag must not be changed in a live system or all weekly sales totals will be lost Compression The L BOSS sales data grows very rapidly into a large database Each transaction is stored in multiple files for file redundancy reporting and for search and review electronic journal The compression of data becomes an important task that can be automated within L BOSS Enter the number of days you want to keep all data live on your system for each transaction entry The data will not actually be lost only compressed for more effective storage The default entry is 31 days Leading 0 The L BOSS database can be configured to automatically pad or fill in the leading zeroes in the UPC or product code In some environments this is a desired behavior Other environments may not want leading zeroes in their product code If you enter 13 the numbers entered will all be at least 13 digits with zeroes filling in any positions before the PLU number you create if it is less than 13 digits long If your system requires alpha numeric PLU numbers
63. controlled with in out dates Printing Labels Items can be set to trigger the system to produce labels when there is a price change Filtering and Global Modifications Extracting Items Using Filters The Maintenance application includes a Filtering option used to select multiple records based on common criteria often used in combination with the Global Modification feature For example it may be necessary to find all items in a specific sub department with a price greater than 1 79 AND taxable 3 flag selected The following explains how to set up and use filters Setting a Filter Start be clicking the filter icon m from the icons area of the PLU maintenance screen You can also select the filter option from the Global Modification menu Once filter mode is active the additional filtering will appear on the screen Press E to select the fields you want to use to filter the item file to extract records Next 2001 2008 Logivision 104 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 right click on the field to be filtered If you right click an alpha field like item description a new window appears allowing you to select the Criteria used to filter the description The choices are available by using the pull down menu in the Alpha numeric window as shown below Filtering with an Alphanumeric Field Alphanumeric field Equal to k coe This example shows the Filter setting tool Equal to will
64. coupon is issued not implemented as of Nov 2007 CLF Client Level This coupon rule will limit the use of the coupon to customers assigned to the customer level determined in the Customer table programmed here This can only be used in situations where the Accounts Receivable module is registered for the installation not implemented as of Nov 2007 TTL Total sale Use this type of coupon to establish the total amount of the transaction required before the POS will issue the coupon Enter the total amount required in the Amount field not implemented as of Nov 2007 Cumulative Purchases The Cum field is used in conjunction with the Customer Accounts ONLY It is used to establish the tracking period for the coupon rule It can be set to issue the coupon every time the rules are met by transaction or over a set period of time In other words the POS will access the customer account to find the total purchase over the period determined by the 2001 2008 Logivision 100 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 6 1 11 Cum field not implemented as of Nov 2007 Method Qualifier The Method determines the amount of times the coupon can be issued during a transaction If no Method is set the default is Unlimited e Once Only The coupon will only be issued once during any transaction e Unlimited Repeat The coupon will be issued as many times during a transaction as the coupon s conditions are met
65. date For example selecting Monthly in the Period type will cause the calendar to move ahead or back by monthly periods N B The period type totals are stored as separate records in the database As sales are received from the POS terminals the data is posted into the daily report summaries Other 2001 2008 Logivision 184 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 4 4 period totals are not generated immediately as data is received e Weekly totals are available after the last day of the week has been processed In most cases this occurs between Saturday night and Sunday morning e Monthly and yearly totals are are available after the last day of the month or year have been processed e The report database contains daily movement data for a specified amount of time LBoss is designed to automatically purge the daily movement files The default system removes daily product movement history after 92 days This setting can be changed by a system administrator The system stores weekly monthly and yearly movement history indefinitely NOTE f you select a starting date that is greater than the ending date for a report the calendar utility will automatically change the ending date to a date that is past the start date according to the Period type This is also true if you select an ending date that is before the starting date Report Viewer Viewing Reports Once a report is selected to view on screen Preview L BOSS
66. date in the price fields Just enter the products going on sale for a period of time into a batch for that date range atk eX CDP Bo Batch number K1 Promotion i Date Time Description Kelly 1 From 29710 2007 0000 Promo identifier PROMOK1 P03 sau To 29711 2007 2359 XM Discountable Portable device cafe XxX PUMPERNICKLE LOAF 4 PLU Oty Price Mix Dsc Pck Oty Pek Price Method Oty Lq 00000000000004 1 1 89 00000000000023 1 0 49 6 1 99 A 00000000000036 1 17 000000000000K1 1 6 00 This example shows a promotion batch in the Batch editor Adding new Batches Batches are created by accessing the Batch Mode under the PLU menu option in the Maintenance application You can add a new batch or copy an existing batch to a new batch the same way you add a new PLU or copy an existing PLU 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 131 To add a new batch press the toolbar icon To copy an existing batch locate the batch you want to copy to a new one and then enter the new batch number Select the appropriate Copy action when prompted For each batch you create we suggest you use a different name to be able to locate the batch easily in the future You can also enter a batch Promo identifier that will be used for report purposes at a later date Enter any 10 character descriptor as Promo identifier The batch type must be selected from the pull down menu above the date selecti
67. discounts on selective items Sl 2 Selective Itemizer 2 To allow discounts on selective items Price Print Off The price will not print on the reciept when this flag is used Manual Tare SI 4 Forces the operator to enter a manual tare on this plu 2001 2008 Logivision L Register interface 305 SI 3 Sets selecteive itemizer 3 Vendor Coupon This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR Store Coupon This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR Divisor Scalable items only Double click in this option window when you want to use a different measure than the default pound or kilogram when this product is sold The POS will divide the weight by the divisor you select before calculating the price Supported by the TEC MA 1595 and the MA 1650 Tare Link This flag is used to define a weight normally the packaging to be deducted from the total weight when the product is sold To assign a tare value double click in the tare link field and select the correct tare value for the item The Tare table is programmed using the Maintenance application s PLU menu Tare Table option If the correct tare value does not exist you must open the tare table and add a new record or modify an existing record Tare Table programming on the TEC ECR Var Tare Variable tare This flag should be selected whenever the tare value is a percentage of the total weight of the item Enter the percentage of the total weight to use
68. e Set the GL account numbers on Totalizers and subdepartments e Set the Export to GL interface type and export location for your accounting software e Create an event if you need to run the program automatically Setting up the relation to GL accounts inside L BOSS You must enter a GL account number on each total that affects the general ledger system You will need a list of the chart of accounts from your accounting system You will also need to know which totals can be input from the POS system This would normally be something your accountant can help you with Open the L BOSS Maintenance application and access the Register menu Select Totalizers Assign the associated GL account number to each totalizer that affects the GL Select whether the amount should be posted as a debit or a credit Logivision can not tell you which totalizers need to have a GL account number assigned nor whether the account 2001 2008 Logivision GL Interface 313 is a debit or credit M Totalizer ate eX Dr Bv Tle Description Sales Tax 1 Alternate description TAXE DE VENTE 1 Files FIN CLK CLT D or C Debit Credit General Ledger E 2101 Report section Tlzr sequence 300 20 Report formula GROUP 37 F64 F65 For example a sales tax amount you collect needs to be posted to a Sales Tax payable account in the GL system Locate the account number in the GL system Enter this number in the fiel
69. each item and entering the cost of the product when it is purchased from that vendor 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 201 at h ltem number F2 1r Ay m meee Active Next 5223 SRS 522005 SSRN OREO COOKIES PROMO1 REG Quick Object POS Price Cost inventory Sales Picture ECL Cost target PAL m Regular cost M Cast break cy amp Ag 4 gt ry 4 A s of 4 gt Vendor 1 ee Vendar ff Quantity break 5 Ea Item code 89971 2 From Case Cost 12 18 00 F To Remark Discount Default vw Discount Unit cost 1 50 Unit cost THI 5 1 1 3 Create inventory record for products Create the inventory records for each product At this point you will need to define the inventory status fields for each item Access the Inventory tab as shown here 2001 2008 Logivision 202 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 5 1 1 4 a q gt AV tim F2 Item number Active Next 3229 229 0 5712720051 23591 joneo cookies PROMO REG Quick Object POS Price Cost Inventory Sales Picture ECL Store number 001 Logivision Child Parent we Follow Inv Min 36 B Nf Ord ROQ 1 Quantity Store number Select the store Inv Select this flag to use the L BOSS to track inventory for this product in this store Ord Set this flag to use the ordering system for this product You
70. fields not set on the quick page by default To satisfy the varying requirements LBoss includes a powerful quick page editor It is used to capture fields from the other Tabs in the PLU editing screen and place them on the quick page Although this operation is not very complicated we suggest that users not comfortable with the operation should contact their reseller to have the changes made You must open PLU maintenance to edit the Quick Tab settings When item maintenance is active select Set quick page from the File menu The system will display a warning message that explains the basic steps to adding a new field to the quick tab Moving existing fields within the quick page To move a field already on the quick page click in that field to select it Then drag it to where you would prefer it to be To move several fields at the same time click on the first field While pressing the Shift button on your keyboard click on the next field to be relocated on the quick page When several fields are selected at the same time the frame outline turns grey to show that more than one field has been selected Continue selecting the fields to be moved the same way When all fields are selected drag them to the area or the quick page that you want to use them in When fields are moved they use a built in grid and cannot always be moved to the exact position you want to leave them To move a field you can also select the field and press Shift Arrow to
71. filter 1 49 95 49 95 37 50 2500 Iv Total retail 159 80 Total cost 85 00 Kit price 119 95 Profit 34 95 29 1 Building the kits The PLU items that make up the kit need to be added to the grid showing on the Kit tab To add an item to the Kit list double click in the PLU number column and select the PLU you want to include To remove an item from the kit list right click on the PLU to remove and press delete The description of the PLU appears automatically A default quantity of 1 will be set You can modify the quantity to be used when the kit is sold by accessing the quantity column and entering the correct quantity The price and amount fields display the unit price and extended amount of the individual PLU s according to the quantity you selected and using the current price level and price target These fields cannot be edited here If you want to change the price of an individual PLU use the normal price change feature in PLU maintenance for that item The ratio column displays the revenue that will be attribued to each PLU based on the price of the kit This column cannot be edited The system assigns the revenue to each of the PLU s on a pro rata basis The last column called No represents No void This flag is used to determine whether the item can be removed from the kit by the operator on the POS terminal This may be required if you want to remove an item and sell another item in its place Note that the item is removed at the ratio pri
72. forget to log off the system and different users have security levels that need to be monitored Leaving the setting at 00 00 means that no auto log off will be executed Send urgent message to L POS Send urgent message to L POS Use this setting to send a copy of urgent messages received by the Main message center to the terminal defined as the second message center Selecting this menu option acts as a toggle to activate the second message server when the check bar is set or to turn it off when the check box does not appear Date Conversion Calendar and Date Conversion Utility It is important to note that if you open the Windows Date utility by double clicking the System date time icon usually at the bottom right of the windows desktop and change the month displayed Windows changes the system date even if you haven t pressed OK or Apply If L BOSS is running it immediately displays a warning message then closes This is because L BOSS is constantly checking the system date time to see if any Events or Tasks should be performed If the application did not close it would want to execute events for the new date time possibly adversely affecting the data The L BOSS File menu provides a calendar utility called Date Conversion useful for verifying past or future dates when working within L BOSS The utility also provides a date format converter used to verify dates in less common formats The date formats described b
73. has Item Price and Cost selected Changing prices in a store to send to the host system The Send to host option of the File menu options is only available when the Host active option is selected to return data to a headquarter system The send to host option will allow output of the changes made on the local L BOSS machine back to a host system This means that changes to prices accounts and other files can be made at a store and sent back up to the host system Select this option for the tables that may be edited locally ina store Please consider as well that changes sent back up to the headquarter system will be deployed to all terminals that are part of the same target group for that file type This means that if a price is changed at store 3 and all stores share the information on that product the change will make it to the other stores in the next communication cycle To force a change to make its way back up to the head office you must press the Satellite from the menu for that record Using the deploy all changes option will not return any information to the host system It is an item by item decision that can only be activated one item at a time with the satellite icon 3 8 6 Gift Certificates Programming Gift Certificates Gift certificates can be sold several ways with L POS You can create a list of gift certificates or sell gift certificates on the fly If you are using certificates that are pre printed with amounts and you wan
74. is the warehouse number for the product Set the default vendor flag if not already selected e Inthe Price tab set the price of item 1111111111 to sell as a carton For example 1 quantity for 32 Now create item 2222222222 to be able to sell a package of cigarettes of Brand A Price the item 2222222222 to sell for 4 25 for one pack Item 2222222222 would not be set to track inventory Item 2222222222 will have Parent child set to Active Below the active you will enter the item number of the parent product In this case that field will be set to item 1111111111 which is the code for the carton of Brand A The parent item would be set to 1111111111 UPC code of carton Brand A e The quantity in the parent child window will be set to 125 because when you sell a pack of brand A you want to reduce the stock level of the carton by one package or 1 8th of a carton Now you will able to sell both packages or cartons and reduce inventory for the same item NOTE You can also decide that you want to maintain the inventory in packages not in cartons of cigarettes In that case you would program the cost on the package of cigarettes item 2222222222 as follows Vendor xxx units per case would show 8 cost per case 2001 2008 Logivision 94 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 would show 24 as above and the vendor item code would be the same as before Then you would set the inventory to be tracked on this item The p
75. it definitely to the system use the F11 Save option The system will prompt you to enter a file name The enrty ransaction will then be saved so that you can finish working on it later 5 1 2 2 2 Receive from an open Purchase order Receiving Stock from a Purchase Order When the receiving module is accessed select the option to receive from an order If you are using a multi store system you need to select the store Once the store is selected a grid will appear with the open orders listed for that store Select the order you want to receive and you will see a grid with the items that were ordered You may correct any of the data or post it immediately if all was received as ordered To modify the contents of the received items list follow these steps Locate the item to modify on the list The cursor will move to the Cases field to allow you to modify the number of cases Press Tab to switch to the Units field if you want to receive by unit count Confirm the cost for the line entry and press Enter to move the cursor to the Add button Press Enter to accept this line At any time in the receiving you can modify a previous line entry by entering that 2001 2008 Logivision 226 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 product code e You can delete a line entry with the F3 Delete function e You can modify the current cost record by pressing F4 Cost This will change the cost on file on a permanent basis If
76. item The same is true for the POS targets Removing Items When you are sure that you will no longer sell an item or the item is never used you can remove it from the database When items that have sales are removed from the database they will still show up in the item sales reports but the deleted items will have no descriptor To remove items from the database Locate the item then use the C3 delete tool on the toolbar to remove it NOTE Your system may be programmed to prohibit deleting items that have a stock count different than zero This flag is set in the Advanced flag settings of LBOSS configuration Deploying Modified Items Sending Changes to Targets Modified records need to be transferred to the L POS terminals The toolbar s a icon changes from gray to green 2 to advise the operator that changes have been programmed on this record but they have not been transferred to the front end database s Using the instant deploy tool from the item programming window will send any modifications to the target terminals or stores in a multi store situation By default the L BOSS task scheduler is set up to automatically send all modifications including items to targets at a pre set time This means you can also force all changes to be sent by manually executing the Deploy All Changes event from the Events Tasks main menu option NOTE When you first create items some of the option check boxes will appear to be grayed
77. leave this field blank and the number you enter will be the PLU number Store L BOSS was conceived to operate as part of a multi store retail chain The number entered here will be a part of the data files generated for each transaction It is important that you enter a unique store number before you start using L BOSS in a multi store environment The store number is used to separate transaction data for each location Once 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS Main Menus 33 transactions have been made the data cannot be modified retroactively Terminal Each back office terminal must have a unique number A numbering protocol has been established whereby terminals 001 to 799 are cash registers Terminals 800 to 899 are back end tools such as portable devices label stations etc that may need to be targeted with program data Terminals 900 to 999 are all office terminals running the L BOSS application Start the L BOSS terminal numbering at 901 on the first back end terminal use 902 on the next back end terminal in the same store terminal 903 on the next one etc Controller When L BOSS is installed on multiple back end terminals one of the back end terminals will be used to manage the exchange of data with the L POS sales terminals This terminal number is set to 901 The 901 terminal will execute the Polling Exe application Messages Although terminal 901 is the controller you may wish to direct all the messages proc
78. lines Although similar to the Files menu s stop option no lines are skipped the viewer continues displaying all activity from the point at which it was frozen The stop option is explained in the Process Viewer Menus help page above READ KEY This option checks the hardware copy protection key and tests it s current communication status Only one machine in the system hosts the key and runs a program that broadcasts the key info Use this option to determine if the key is functioning properly The viewer does not show the content or value the key returns only that the communication was successful For example 11 08 27 300 Send Key MailSlot 11 08 27 520 Mailslot received Key info Process Viewer Menus Controlling the Viewer Internal process viewer menus The options and controls available in the viewer utility control the viewer only not the actual internal system processes In other words you cannot stop or freeze the actual internal processing system from the internal process viewer Files Menu Stop This option stops the viewer at it s current display line and behaves as a toggle In 2001 2008 Logivision 20 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 other words clicking the first time stops the viewer from displaying more lines and puts a check mark beside the menu option Clicking the second time restarts the viewer removes the check mark and continues to display lines All internal processes co
79. method What am C No communication ej i Stores call head office Regional office Head office calls stores Store L Remote login Name sab123 Password ery Port itp Preserve report data per terminal C Merge report data per store Encryption Cancel Stores call head office Store set up In the What am I section select Head office L Remote login Name and Password are used to secure sign on rights to the head office L Remote They must match at the L BOSS on each end store and HQ Encryption Enter an encryption phrase to ensure secure data communications This must match in all stores and at head office 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS Main Menus 41 2 1 8 5 3 Event to execute L Remote You will need to create a task to schedule the L Remote communications from the store to the head office On the command line enter the following command EXEC RUN LRemote exe CLIENT Select Allow manual to permit on demand execution of this task Select Allow scheduled to allow this to run as an automated execution Repeating cycle Set the frequency of data communications For example to communicate data every 30 minutes enter 5 in the Hours field Next event will occur on This field will display the next time this event is due to occur io x ath Kx dD v Description Transfer to HO Command T Directory EXEC RUN LRemote exe CLIENT E JV Allow manual Repeating cycle
80. must include a reference to the proprietary device driver Product Description This is often a list of ingredients used by the electronic scale to produce a label when weighed Shelf Life Is the number of days before this product must be removed from the shelf no longer fit for sale Product Life The number of days before the product should be consumed PLU Type This tells the system whether the item is random fixed weight or fluid ounces Class Serving Size FDA nutri facts label field Price Modifier Net Weight Blank Fields This allows you to send no information for the field type selected blanking out the data in the electronic scale When you edit the scale related tables the file menu includes the send to host option Send to host The Send to host option of the File menu options is only available when the Host active option is selected to return data to a headquarter system The send to host option will allow output of the changes made on the local L BOSS machine back to a host system This means that changes can be made at a store and sent back up to the host system Select this option for the tables that may be edited locally in a store Please consider as well that changes sent back up to the headquarter system will be deployed to all terminals that are part of the same target group for that file type This means that if a price is changed at store 3 and all stores share the information on that product
81. not appear in the Report Selection utility NOTE The reports that appear in the Report Selection tool vary depending on your installation the installed modules and specialized reports Also your Logivision dealer may have re named reports to suit your needs The list shown above is an example only you may not see the same reports in your setup Selecting a Report If a report appears as an icon click once to select it and press either the Preview or Print button on the bottom of the report selection utility or double click the icon If the report is in a category along with other reports of the same type click the beside the folder to open the list of associated reports then proceed as above Bottom bar Buttons Use the Preview button if you want to view the report on screen before printing Like any 2001 2008 Logivision 182 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 4 3 print preview option you will still be able to send the report to the printer after viewing on screen The Print button will send the report to the printer without viewing on screen first Use the Print button if you are sure that the report contains the information you wish to view The Next button is used to browse through open reports Cancel to close the report selection utility and return to the L BOSS desktop Opening Reports Using Reports Once a report has been selected using the Report Selection utility there ar
82. opens a calendar panel lol x Financial report Enter ending date gi May 2003 D a4 June 2003 D Sun Mon Tuefwed Thuf Fri Saf Sun Mon Tuefwed Thu Fri Sat 1 2 3 EEE 4 s5 6 7 8 93 10 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1112 13 14 15 16 BRM 15 16 SRM 18 19 2 21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Enter start date 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 29 30 Today 671772003 Today 671772003 Period Type Group Daily RAL Store total C Weekly C Monthly C Yearly Print Cancel This example shows the Report Start and End Date Selection tool By default the Report Selection utility selects today s date If you want to view today s report you need only choose to view on screen or send to the printer without viewing If the default report date does not correspond with the desired report date click on the correct date then Preview or Print If the desired report date is in a different month use the left or right arrow buttons above the date portion of the calendar to navigate to the correct month or year Report Periods Because the L BOSS reports can cover different types of periods you must determine a Start date and an End date for each report L BOSS uses these dates to retrieve the appropriate data and generate a report Selecting a report period from the calendar s Period type box changes the way the calendar behaves when changing the
83. opens it in the Report Viewer By default reports are set to open using the full screen NOTE To have reports not open full screen you can change the default setting using the L BOSS File menu Configuration option System tab De select the Preview Maximized option For help using the Configuration panel see the System tab help page under the L BOSS help section in this manual 2001 2008 Logivision Report System 185 _LBOSS Cashiers Close Print Next 7 zoom 100 fala gt gt Station 3 Cashier sales Imprim le Friday December 21 2001 11 07 52 AM From Wednesday December 19 to Wednesday December 19 Daily Description Net Sales Taxes Taxable 1 This example shows the Report Viewer with the Cashier report loaded Report Viewer Options Close Closes the Report Viewer and returns to the Report selection utility Print Sends the report to the default printer If the report s properties have the Printer Dialog option selected the printer driver s option panel will open allowing you to select printer settings Next Is used to move between open reports if you have more than one report open If there is only one report open the next button returns to the Report Selection utility Zoom To zoom the report view in or out Page Selection Tool Used to navigate multi page reports The single arrows move 1 page up or down The double arr
84. or scanning items To prohibit a cashier from using the void function entirely change the function authorization rights in function setup Max refund will control the highest refund amount that can be used without manager approval Note that the approval warning will flash and manager approval will be required 2001 2008 Logivision 120 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 6 5 3 6 5 1 before tendering can begin not to continue entering or scanning items To prohibit a cashier from using the refund function entirely change the function authorization rights in function setup Modified is used to advise the operator that changes have been programmed on this department but they have not been transferred to the front end database Using the instant deploy tool will send any modifications that were made to the department Other Item Related Tables Table Programming Overview Besides the Sub department and Department tables there are other tables that contain information that links to or is used by items Each of these tables is editable using the common tools from the table toolbar Once a table is selected for programming as with other tables in the Maintenance application the File and Edit menus may contain specialized options for that table Bottle Link Table Keeps track of all amounts collected from sales of items that are linked with a bottle Tare Table Scaled items are sometimes wrapped or p
85. or without actually recording it as a Purchase order This process will save the data entered into a temporary working file that can be continued later 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 219 Save As Save in Orders a c ea Save at type Entry files Cancel NOTE tems entered into an inventory transaction can be sorted several ways to improve reconciliation with supplier invoices or for any other reason Open the View menu and select the Order By option By default items are sorted in the order they are entered into the transaction To sort in any other order use the View menu option The sort order on the screen cannot be changed once a transaction has been posted to the database The printed copies of inventory transactions are always made in the order that was visible on the screen when the transaction was posted 5 1 2 1 5 Recall a saved order When you save an order to a temporary file the Order type selection window includes another choice Press Continue an order to recall an order that you saved with the F11 button 2001 2008 Logivision 220 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Select type of order Continue an order Auto generate Portable device Cancel Review an order already posted An order that has been posted to the database can be reviewed for reprint or can also be deleted up until the time it is received Once it is received the order is
86. out or selected but gray You do not have to select and unselect them The grayed 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 109 3 6 2 4 out check boxes indicate that the database has no value for these fields neither yes nor no Rental Items Controlling Rental Items L POS can control rental items by setting the items as rental and defining the rental parameters L POS rental items could include video films in a c store VCR machines strollers in a zoo etc There are 2 types of rental items in L POS and they must be defined in the item maintenance Method type must be set to G or to H for rental items Type G should be used for rental items that are rented for different periods of time Example of type G rental item is a VCR or Nintendo machine that may be rented for a day a weekend or a week at a time Type H is used for items that share the same rental period This would often be the case for most films in a C store because they are rented for a fixed 24 hour period and no other choice is available Choosing method type G for an item will modify the fields available in the price column No Sale column is available with type G Price levels are available Type H items use the price exactly the way normal items do Quick Object POS Price Cost Inventory Sales Suga Retail Sale price Method Type fG Period Description Price Default 3 00 Regular period 25 00 v 4 00 Extend
87. out at some points in transactions This is normal because they are not available at that point For example the Delete option is not available for an order you are working on It is available if you recall an order that was posted but not yet received Purchase Orders Purchase orders L BOSS includes a module to create purchase orders based on minimum and current stock levels Open the order module by clicking the Orders short cut 2001 2008 Logivision 210 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Select type of order Continue an order Auto generate Portable device Cancel You are prompted to choose between a Manual entry an Auto generated order or to use data that was recorded with a Portable device The next step in the purchase order process is to complete the header information 5 1 2 1 1 Manual order Manual order Select vendor information Vendor 4 18 2005 Inv PO Generate Inventory Store number Cost target 001 d Logivision PAL All stores Remark pooo OK B Load all tems Cancel You need to provide the information required to store the transaction for future reference Vendor number is a compulsory field The date field can be used to modify the date the transaction will be saved for Inv can be used to enter an invoice number if known PO is the number you are assigning to this purchase order The Generate button will assign the next available order n
88. pages ink jet and laser printers the selection process also includes a step that requires you to determine which label to start printing from 2001 2008 Logivision Report System 189 _ First Label Selection O x This example shows the Select First Label process for type B Labels If you have used several labels on one page but have some unprinted labels left on that page you can select the label position to start printing from The First Label Selection panel displays the label page layout for the type of labels you are printing This panel is based on the label template s page configuration set in the Form Manager under the File menu Label option To select the label position to start printing from count from the top left going down the first column as displayed by the numbering in the image above To select the label to start printing from e Left click the correct position with the mouse or e Use the left right up and down arrow keys to locate the starting position and press the Enter key The Report application will start printing labels from the position you have selected Other Label Printing Options It is also possible to print labels from an item batch or from a receiving order The options also depends on how your Logivision dealer has configured your installation You should contact your Logivision dealer if you have specialized label print options and require help Defi
89. periods 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 145 by selecting the appropriate start date on the calendar PAL The pull down field to the right will probably show PAL as the target group The target allows you to soecify in multi store environments which programming zones this data will be sent to In single store applications this will show PAL for all accounts If you only want customer X to be sent to store 5 you would create a program target for store 5 and put that target on client record 5 Company Enter the company this account is for Address City Prov State Code and Country entered here will be displayed on account statements or other customer based reports L BOSS also provides a statement report that prints the address so that it can be folded and sent in a standard windowed envelope Expiry is the date until which this account remains active Phone and fax are used to enter the telecommunications data for the customer Info 1 and Info 2 Use these fields to record addityional customer information This information is only provided as reference not used by the system automatically Tax 1 Exempt and Tax 2 Exempt should be entered if you want the L POS front end to exempt taxes that would have applied These are individual flags You do not need to exempt one tax for the other tax to be exempted Note L POS can use up to 4 tax rates You may enter a Tax 3 Exempt by clicking on the des
90. periods e The first field is the length of the rental period in hours e The next field is a description of the rental period e The final field is the price for that period of rental 2001 2008 Logivision 84 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Add as many rental periods as required for the item being added If you select Default the L POS will use that as the rental period even though multiple periods have been selected If you do not select a default period L POS will open a choice window for the operator to select the proper period whenever the item is rented If you select a default rental period the Price Modify button can be used to override the default status and pop up the list to permit POS operator selection e Type H items use the price exactly the way normal items do NOTE Other information on the rental system is available in the System set up screen under the Rent tab e Type J is used to limit the number of items a customer can purchase in a transaction Set the LQD quantity field to the maximum quantity of the product that can be purchased in a transaction If you set type J and use a mix and match number the LQD quantity will apply to all items in the same mix match group Note that the package price is not available with type J price e Type K is used to display an extra decimal of price on the customer receipt and in back end maintenance This is required for sites that enter a quantity sold for
91. preset price items with more than the standard windows decimal settings Type L will display an extra decimal of price on the customer receipt and in back end maintenance and will also use the Gas Descriptor set in PosSetup gt System gt PLU This is required for sites that enter a quantity of liters of fuel rather than entering the price into a GAS PLU e Type M sets an item with a zero price These items can be entered or scanned on the L POS as counters only e Type N is used by the ECR interface e Type O is used by the ECR interface Type P is used to program different package sizes of the same UPC code This is uselful for convenience stores with singles and six packs or liquor stores that sell items by the case half case and single Enter the quantity a package descriptor and the sale price If you select Default the L POS will use that package size even though multiple sizes were programmed If you do not select a default package size L POS will open a choice window for the operator to select the proper size whenever the item is entered If you select a default package size the Price Modify button can be used to override the default status and pop up the list to permit POS operator selection NOTE f you set an item to Type D this item cannot be deleted from the order Type D is used internally on a special feature called Pick 5 Once a pick 5 item has been triggered it cannot be deleted Only the trigger items can be dele
92. receivable module and the preferred shopper module use the samed customer information from the database Accounts receivable is required to post house charges Preferred shopper is required to use Points or to access the Discount table L BOSS allows you to create customer records for check cashing store charges and customer demographics The customer maintenance is accessed using the Maintenance application s Account menu Customer option or the Clients desktop icon Each account created must have a link to a customer risk level table and to customer level table 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 143 3 7 1 record It is good practice to define the related customer tables before adding customers Note that the terms customer and client are interchangeable Account view is a quick way of opening the 3 tables related to account set up The system will remember the last screen layout that was used Account Reports L BOSS provides account statements customer details account activity and account aging 30 60 90 day reports found in the Report Selection Clients section NOTE Client reports may include item racking by customer This option requires the preferred shopper module You must turn on the related flag in the cleanup tab of the L BOSS configuration menu Deleting and Modifying Account Numbers L BOSS will not allow you to modify an account number or delete that account if there i
93. sql editor window Add the commands you need to select the data you want to list If you are unsure how to do this it is recommended that you inquire with your ealer on how to add custom queries Note The first type of list displays a record count the number in brackets at the top of the list The second list type that allows enhanced search does not display the record count at the top of the window You must open the options menu and choose record count search several ways You can use the scroll bar to search manually or you can enter the first few letters or numbers if the field is numeric of the data you are searching for in the Locate box The search is eft justified which means that when you begin typing a description in the search table the cursor will move to the record in the table that meets the search criteria For example searching for the description bread in the PLU database descriptor field will move to the section of the file beginning by b Next it will attempt to move ahead to br If it finds br it will attempt to move to bre As soon as it cannot find the full description you searched for the cursor will stop moving and display the first record it finds with as much as possible of the descriptor you requested To begin a new search you must clear out the search data you entered the first time Once you find the data item you are searching for you may want to leave the search window and navigate up or down the list be
94. target you are currently viewing is selected in Blue Working in the cost tab The Cost tab is divided into two 2 sections Regular cost and Cost break The Regular cost section deals with the normal cost for this item when purchased in the usual quantities The Cost break section deals with purchasing options from the selected vendor Each vendor for an item can have multiple Cost break setups 2001 2008 Logivision 90 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Note To work with each section use the tool bars at the top of that section not the toolbar across the top of the PLU maintenance screen Regular Cost Section e To add acost and vendor for an item double click in the Vendor field to select from a list of vendors You will be prompted to accept the selection e To add additional vendors and costs for the same item use the button within the Regular cost section or hold down the Ctrl key and press A e f there is more than one vendor for an item use the black left and right arrow buttons at the top of the Regular Cost section to move to the next or previous vendor e To remove a vendor from an item select the vendor then press the scissor button at the top of the Regular Cost section and accept the prompt that appears asking if the vendor should be removed from this item Vendor This is the number that has been assigned to identify a vendor in the system Once the Vendor table has been configure
95. terminal type is used to determine which type of data it will receive For example you can set the terminal type to L BOSS for each of the L BOSS workstations being set up for the system The terminal types that exist at the time this guide was edited are LPOS LBOSS 1650 and NONE The terminal type you select allows L BOSS to distinguish which file types should be transmitted to that terminal when changes are made and then deployed An LPOS will filter the deploy files for L POS terminals L BOSS is used when a central system L BOSS needs to send changes to an L BOSS in a remote location the 1650 type is used to select the correct files for a TEC ECR model 1650 NONE means that no files will ever be sent to this terminal even though it may be in the exchange group for data communication This is the case for a portable terminal working on line a price checker etc You can add a new terminal type if the existing choices do not correspond to your needs Right click on an existing terminal type and follow the prompts Right clicking on the terminal type opens the following window 2001 2008 Logivision 170 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 TE ij x File types available File types to ignore Use the window to set the exclusion files that are not sent to this terminal type For example if the ECR model does not allow printer model definition then you could scroll down the list and move Printer Ini to the right hand window
96. that changes sent back up to the headquarter system will be deployed to all terminals that are part of the same target group for that file type This means that if a price is changed at store 3 and all stores share the information on that product the change will make it to the other stores in the next communication cycle To force a change to make its way back up to the head office you must press the Satellite from the menu for that record Using the deploy all changes option will not return any information to the host system It is an item by item decision that can only be activated one item at a time with the satellite icon 2001 2008 Logivision 128 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 6 5 7 Scale Table Scalable Item Table Programming NOTE The Maintenance application does not include native drivers for electronic scale devices Electronic scales interfaced with the Maintenance application must have their own communication drivers There must also be a proprietary conversion utility to determine the electronic scale data format To configure communications requires customization not included with the standard L BOSS program Please contact your Logivision dealer if you want to be able to communicate with an electronic scale There are several types of electronic scales commonly used in retail sales Some scales are directly attached to the front end terminal used to weigh produce at check out time Scales used by th
97. that some import routines created to accept data from wholesaler s system may be using the MPF flag internally If you are using an import routine to accept data that way it would be a good precaution to verify with your dealer before modifying the setting of your MPF flags on PLU s on your system The same logic applies to the YES NO combination between MPF and Sale conditions on PLU s You can set a rate when MPF is YES and Sale is NO and a different rate for items that have the MPF flag set and when the item is on sale Small note the MPF flag is often used in a pharmacy type system where the retail operator may not be allowed to discount the DIN registered products but does want to discount the non DIN products In that situation you could use the MPF as the DIN flag The final setting in each discount table record is to decide whether you will function at a 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 153 3 7 7 discount from the current active price or whether you will function at Cost plus the rate entered for each condition To use Cost plus place a check mark in the Cost column for the specific condition that should activate cost plus Adding records to the discount table The discount table operates a bit differently from other tables because the entries are required before L BOSS can create the record Enter a sub department number a client level and the discount rates offered for each of the condition
98. the Security help page NOTE Although the modules appear and are launched under this menu their help pages are not necessarily described under this heading but are listed in the root of this help manual Special Special Menu Options What is it for The Back Office System Software allows advanced users to create menu options for specialized utilities or as a quick launch for custom applications reports etc Please consult your L BOSS dealer for more information Help L BOSS Help Logivision provides user help in both electronic and printable format Both the printable manual and the electronic help describe all the options available in the Back Office System Software at the time of release NOTE Designed as a user manual the help does not detail how to program L BOSS commands or SQL Please consult your Logivision dealer if you have specialized needs that 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS Main Menus 53 require programming The L BOSS main Help menu Contents option is used to access the electronic help file an online version of the printable manual The on screen help file can also be launched at any time by pressing the F1 function key Designed in the standard Windows 98 Me NT help style the electronic help includes a navigational tree table of contents and a searchable index to help quickly locate information For help on how to use the help file please read the Windows help a
99. the film is really 123456 and the last digit identifies it as the first copy Then create the second copy as item 1234562 exactly the same way you set up the first copy Finally create 1234563 as the third copy Now you will be able to define as shown below the position of the copy identifier within the PLU record This is especially useful when you use the price inquiry function on L POS to query how many items you have in stock Other information on the rental system is defined in the Possetup module System set up screen under the Rent tab Rent tab Rental items can be controlled by L POS when the system is used with the L BOSS backend system The rental tab includes general programming that defines how the rental system will operate The rental items are set up in the LBOSS system under PLU programming General Directories Alias Taxes Food stamps PLU Account Totalizers Zones Headers Restrictors Coupons Misc Events Language Currency Rent Grace period C Hours Percentage Copy identifier Return time Based on the period er 06 00PM H Late fee V Open Account V Charge late fee MV Automatic quantity V Use same PLU PLU Code First x digits copy v of digits 0 24 hours Type H period 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 111 Return time L POS can control return time for rental items two ways The more popular application f
100. the item price based on cost Margin or Markup For more about Margin and Markup please read the Price tab help page below To read about how to set L BOSS to use the type of calculation you would like to use please see the L BOSS File menu Configuration utility s Misc tab help To have L BOSS set ALL item prices from their costs based on the type of calculation selected e With the Item tables open on the Maintenance application s desktop e Open the Edit menu and hold the mouse over the Calculate Price opening a sub menu e From the Calculate price sub menu select All items e You will be warned and before the calculate process runs To calculate prices on a specific group of items only you must select the items using a filter apply the filter then from the Maintenance application s Edit menu Calculate prices 2001 2008 Logivision 70 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 5 2 option you will be able to select the All filtered items It is important to note that if you use price levels you should be sure that there is a target value for all price levels This is because if you ask L BOSS to calculate prices based on the target value the prices FOR ALL PRICE LEVELS are calculated Ignore Un posted changes This is an Undo option that removes changes made BEFORE posting the changes Note that if you modify an item and move on to the next item the changes are POSTED not to be confused with
101. the selected field Several fields are only displaying results that have been calculated For example the unit cost is a calculation derived by dividing the base cost by the case pack size You cannot place a calculated field by right clicking it You must select this type of field from the drop down list located in the yellow banner area when the quick page editor is selected You may also set your preferred tabbing order for navigation on the quick page 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 67 ob SY 4d By tim oooooo0000001 OREO COOKIES Set Tab Order Quick Object POS Price Cost Inventory Sales Picture Promo Sub Dept 10 Regular price Sale Price GROCERY 239 1 Bae T d Follow sub dept na E Pekg H Tax1 _ Prohibit discount _ Tax2 Scalable mme Sale M Mit Margin From Vendor 202 Target To Kraft Foods Actual 148 21 SKU 202202 Pack qty Case cost 24 31 00 NF Inv Ord Minimum units FRe order qty Cost unit 1 24 00 48 sd Inventory tracking Send to host The Send to host option of the File menu options is only available when the Host active option is selected to return data to a headquarter system The send to host option will allow output of the changes made on the local L BOSS machine back to a host system This means that changes to prices accounts and other files can be made at a store and sent back up to t
102. time the process generates details for another cashier it forces the report to start a new printed page Page 1 forces the page number for that report section to be numbered starting at one 4 8 Report SQL Editor Modifying L BOSS Report SQL Code The L BOSS reports use a combination of proprietary commands and SQL code to generate the queries that extract information from the database tables for reporting The report properties include a sq file and combines it with a report template file that controls how the report will actually appear NOTE This help document explains the Report SQL Editor tool not how to program report queries or other L BOSS or SQL related commands WARNING The SQL editor should only be used by programmers Tampering with or editing the SQL code within report files may damage them causing system errors when launched Consult your Logivision dealer if you have special reporting needs Once a report file has been selected from the Report Selection tool right clicking it opens a menu The Property option opens a panel that contains the report s configuration The name of the command file for the report is entered in the Sql file properties field To the right of the sql file name the Ed button opens the Report Editor displaying the L BOSS proprietary 2001 2008 Logivision 194 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 commands along with the SQL code required to extract the data for the report
103. to the keyboard as it s only going to be used in the definition table 5 In that button go in the Advanced properties for function Gift Certificate 123 and in there type in IEQ01 1 VARO1 0 this will execute the function only if var01 is equal to 1 and set back the var01 to get out of selling mode 6 Still in the same button but on the 2nd function Gift Certificate 117 gt properties gt advanced type in INEO1 1 this will execute the function only if var01 is NOT equal to 1 7 Your def table needs to have an entry for that set your 8 Undef function to use the Gift Cert button that you created at step 4 you need a key on the barcode to be able to recognize that it is a gift certificate 8 To sell a new gift certificate you push Sell Gift Cert created at step 1 and scan your gift card To redeem it you just scan the card without pressing that button 3 9 Navigation Menu Memorizing the Item Table s Tabbing Order When programming items in the Item table you probably use the same fields most of the time To help simplify the item editing process the Maintenance application has a special utility The Navigation menu contains options that allow you to control the cursor s position in the table which field when editing items This means you can establish what needs to be done and program the cursor to go to those fields one after the other using only the Enter key In some cases all the informa
104. turned into the received invoice It is no longer available for review 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 221 W Entry module Programmer Receiving Orders Adjustments Count Transfer fs Receiving R Orders Count Ja E xit 5 1 2 2 Receiving Stock Once stock has been purchased it needs to be received The receiving module allows you to receive items from an open purchase order or manually without a purchase order Data can be entered manually or imported from a portable terminal Select the receiving option from the Entry program 2001 2008 Logivision 222 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Select type of receiving From an Order Portable device Cancel Access the receiving module and select Manual When you select manual you need to supply information for L BOSS to track the incoming stock F Receiving OF x Files Edit View Vendor name Store Inventory date Vendor 101 Best Supplier Ltd 001 906 01 12 10 Inv 120 PO A112 PAL Remark manual receive PLU V Endor cod Description Cases Units Amount weiht zl Case cost B o On hand Oty cs PLU 8 8 Vendor code Minimum sR On order 0 PLU i Description Vendor code Cases Units Amount Weight BNE Save F2 Add F3 Delete F4 Cost Fae Print F6 Info PA Past This example shows a Manual Receiving screen
105. view the modifications that are 2001 2008 Logivision 106 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 6 2 2 about to be applied by clicking the icon To apply the modifications to the list of filtered items press the Al icon To clear the modifications at any time press the c icon You can perform global modifications on logical fields by either selecting or clearing the flag set in that field A global modification in an alphanumeric field such as the description will replace all descriptions with the one you entered A global modification performed on a currency field such as the price allows you to replace and increase or decrease by amount or by percentage When you make a global modification on a currency field based on a percentage increase or decrease you also have the option to set the last digit the price will be rounded up to If you want all the prices to end with a 7 enter it in the ending with column All prices will be calculated and then rounded up to numbers ending with 7 such as 1 37 1 47 1 57 etc Add Copy Delete Items Creating and Removing Items Adding New Items There are several options to create new items depending on the circumstances Sometimes it is easier to create a new item and fill in all the required information manually To create a new blank PLU code in the system use the toolbar button Clicking the plus tool opens a New PLU window that prompts you for the new code Afte
106. way we will differentiate the data from lane 1 2 and 3 even though all data from each lane is being received at the sameport address All rows of data arriving from lane 1 will be prefixed by POS01 etc 11 2 Monitor toolbar 5 h 4 a BH The Folder is used to open a specific L POS terminal manually Use the a tool if you have highlighted text and want to copy to another application The red arrow down diminishes the number of characters narrowing the space used The red arrow up widens the column used in each monitor window Use the A button to change the font The tool will display a list of all active terminals The pil tool exits the application Monitoring stores the settings and will reopen all terminals that were being viewed the last time it ran 2001 2008 Logivision L Register interface 287 12 12 1 L Register interface WARNING It is assumed that the reader of this guide has a thorough knowledge of the L BOSS application This guide only pertains to the added functionality obtained from installing the L Register option with L BOSS L Register controls communications with the TEC MA1595 ECR Different configurations are available with the ECR Not all ECR configurations are supported by L Register Note for example that L Register version 2 0 0 2 only communicates properly with the MA1595 rom version 7 or 8 You may need to reprogram the ROM in the ECR to use L Register Prep
107. will be deployed to all terminals that are part of the same target group for that file type This means that if a price is changed at store 3 and all stores share the information on that product the change will make it to the other stores in the next communication cycle To force a change to make its way back up to the head office you must press the Satellite from the menu for that record Using the deploy all changes option will not return any information to the host system It is an item by item decision that can only be activated one item at a time with the satellite icon Price Level Table Price Level Table Programming Price levels allow you to store different prices for the same item You may create as many price levels as required Price levels are often associated with the notion of discount cards given to frequent shoppers Other reasons for price levels may be to allow selling different quantities for different prices 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 125 3 6 5 5 ate dr By Price level 3 Description PLATINUM PRICE This example shows a Price Level table record NOTE You must create price level one 1 when importing data into L BOSS from external sources When you edit the price level table table the file menu includes the send to host option Send to host The Send to host option of the File menu options is only available when the Host active option is selected to
108. you need to create each terminal in each store at the head office If you decide to report consolidated per store then you only need to create the back office terminal as we have already explained Most businesses will probably want to report consolidated sales only so they should not forget to set the Merge lane data flag in the Host configuration tab If you need to report on each lane individually at the head office then you must create a terminal for each register in every store at the head office These terminals must not have any inbox or outbox assigned They are only included in Report groups Sample terminal list Terminal Description Path Inbox Path Outbox 001 901 Backoffice store 1 Inbox C INBOX001 Outbox C OUTBOX001 002 901 Backoffice store 2 Inbox C INBOX002 Outbox C OUTBOX002 003 901 Backoffice store 3 Inbox C INBOX003 Outbox C OUTBOX003 NOTE You will need to create all the folders before using the system Terminal groups at Headquarters When L BOSS is used in a multi store environment LRemote polling care must be taken in the Target group set up For example within each store there are unique data files that cannot be sent to each store An example of this could be the Receipt header and trailer messages If there are different addresses to print in each store it is important to structure the groups properly Otherwise the headquarters system will not be able to change the receipt message for store 1 wit
109. 0 25 0 17111900 00000000000L05 Bottle sale PLU link 2 1 2005 72 0 0 0 4 68 68 0 21 2005 00000000000L30 Bottle sale PLU link 1 1900 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 0 17111900 00000000000RAE Alloc special 2 1 2005 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 2 12005 00000000001234 Camel Carton 441900 0 3 0 0 0 3 3 0 11141900 00000000004011 BANANAS 212005 0 43 0 0 1 259 41 741 39 2 741 412412005 00000000004012 BANANAS PLANTAIN 1171900 0 30 0 0 0 30 42 12 412412005 00000000004013 VALENCIA ORANGE ME 1 1 1900 0 15 0 0 0 15 13 2 4 24 2005 00000000004014 VALENCIA ORANGE S 1 1 1900 0 6 0 0 0 6 6 o 17111900 00000000004015 VALENCIA ORANGE Le 1 1 1900 f 12 0 0 0 12 12 0 17111900 00000000004016 APPLES RED DELICIO 1 1 1900 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 17111900 00000000004017 APPLES GRANNY SMN 1 1 1900 0 16 0 0 0 16 16 0 1711900 0000000000RL0 Bottle return item 4411900 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11141900 00000002323232 COKE 355ML CANNET 1 1 1900 0 120 0 0 41 79 79 o 11141900 00001234500006 OREO COOKIES 1234 2 12005 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2112005 00693289550000 OREO COOKIEST amp T 2 12005 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2112005 30 items Total 656 122 491 641 75 519 259 2001 2008 Logivision 246 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 On hand inventory This report lists the quantity or weight on hand for each product On hand inventory Printed Monday May 23 2005 4 48 38 PM Store 003 Cost group PAL All stores PLU Description 00000000000001 OREO COOKIES oooooonoo00004 Nachos 8 az bag 00000000000006 COKE CLASSIC 12 O
110. 00 Unit cost Store number 001 Logivision M Inv Min 20 Mod ROQ 1 2001 2008 Logivision 204 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 You decide that you need a minimum of 20 cartons on hand Once below 20 cartons you will reorder 1 carton until above minimum The carton has 10 packages of Camel Item 5678 is the PLU number to sell a single package of Camel This item will be given a retail price of 4 75 and a cost of 10 for 37 00 uate AXIA BV tm F2 Item number Active Next Yooon0 00005678 sooo a a Camel package Quick Object POS Price Cost Inventor Sales Picture ECL i Cost tar PAL Regular cost Cost break S pa ed p a i z Vendor 1 Vendor f Quantity break ltem code fi 1223344 From Case Cost 10 37 00 F7 To Remark Discount Default x Discount Unit cost 3 70 Unit cost This item is attached to the PLU 1234 for inventory control Each time one pack 5678 is sold the system will remove 1 10 of the carton item 1234 This is because the inventory tab was set to use the child parent relationship as follows 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 205 5 1 1 5 Store number Logivision Child Parent Wf Active Follow Inv ma o0000000001 234 Quantity 0 1 Once you select the active mark in the child parent window the Inv Flag is no longer available The inventory will be tracked on t
111. 00001 OREO COOKIES UNCLE BEN S RICE COKE CLASSIC 12 OZ CAN IGA SALAD DRESSING IDEAL CREAM CORN 00000006 000000010 KODAK FILM 35MM BW 24 EXP 000000011 SMALL COFFEE 000000012 MEDIUM COFFEE This example shows the Label selection box NOTE The item list is generated by the label s SQL code file the sort order and selection method vary depending on how the SQL file is programmed Please consult your Logivision dealer if you need to customize the sort process To use the selection box e Highlight an item on the left then use arrows beside the quantity field to determine the quantity of labels to print for the selected item or enter the quantity manually e Once the quantity is established press the single red arrow pointing right to move that item to the selected right side of the selection box e You can also select highlight an item that has already been selected from the right panel and modify the quantity e To move ALL the items from the left side to the right side press the double red arrow pointing right You can then select each item on the right and enter the quantity e To remove items from the right selected panel highlight the item to remove and press the single red arrow pointing left e To remove ALL items from the right selected panel press the double red arrow pointing left e When the correct selection has been made press Ok to print the labels First Label Selection To conserve label
112. 12 04 09 030 Mailslot received 001920030FF 12 04 49 620 Mailslot received 00192000BEG 12 04 49 620 Send MailSlot MailSlot WSERY 001906194CT SUPPORT3 12 04 49 620 Mailslot received 001906194CT SUPPORT3 12 04 49 730 Mailslot received 001904644CT SUPPORT2 12 04 49 840 Mailslot received 001920024CT GUY SUPER 12 22 07 050 Send Key MailSlot 12 22 07 270 Mailslot received Key info K Freeze Readkey Ooo ooo 0 ooto This example shows the Internal Process viewer 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS Main Menus 19 2 1 4 2 Status bar and control buttons The options and controls available in the viewer utility control the viewer only not the actual internal system processes In other words you cannot stop or freeze the actual internal processing system from the internal process viewer Status Bar The status bar is the area at the bottom right of the viewer window and displays current system information such as the average merge time the transaction number and more Hold the mouse cursor above the status information to find out what the information represents Buttons OK The OK button closes the viewer and is identical to the Files menu s close option FREEZE This option freezes the viewer at it s current display line It behaves as a toggle in other words clicking the first time freezes the display clicking the second time unfreezes the display which then continues to display
113. 177 Working With Items 106 Add Copy Delete Items 106 Deploying Modified Items 108 Filters and Global Modifications 103 Item Label Setup 112 Memorizing the Table s Tab Order 175 Overview 103 Rental Items 109 Working with tables 57 X X Y Position 322 2001 2008 Logivision 342 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 XAL target group 167 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Logivision manuals are produced and printed in Canada
114. 18 05 05 2004 001 003 118 05 05 2004 001 003 119 PROGRAMMEF 05 05 2004 001 003 119 Transaction details viewer 05 05 2004 001 003 119 06 06 2004 lom loos 120 PROGRAMMER 05 05 2004 001 003 121 PROGRAMMEF Item count 5 Customized search Reset F4 F5 FG F7 F8 Field Descriptor Operand Yalue Condition Customized search fields zl Previous Next F11 Delete line F12 Insert line F3 Search Several shortcuts have been added to simplify navigation F2 is used to access the details area of the screen F3 is used to perform a custom search F4 accesses the Field input area of the custom search F5 accesses the Descriptor input area of the custom search F6 accesses the operand input area of the custom search F7 accesses the Value input area of the custom search F8 accesses the condition input area of the custom search F9 positions the cursor on the results list F10 is a shortcut to the transaction number field F11 deletes a line from the custom search F12 inserts a row into the custom search ALT G executes the pre selection to limit the results list to transactions that meet the selected criteria L Tracker menu options The L Tracker menu includes 5 main headers explained here in detail File menu e Rebuild pointers This option is available to allow the user to rebuild file pointers 2001 2008 Logivision L Tracker overview 267 manually In order to speed up search commands
115. 2 58 PM 12 19 01 7 22 58 PM 12 19 01 7 22 56 PM 12 19 01 7 22 56 PM 12 19 01 7 22 58 PM 12 19 01 7 22 58 PM 12 19 01 7 22 56 PM 12 19 01 7 23 00 PM 12 19 01 7 23 00 PM 12 19 01 7 23 00 PM 12 19 01 7 23 00 PM 12 19 01 7 23 00 PM 12 19 01 7 23 00 PM 12 19 01 7 23 00 PM 12 19 01 7 23 00 PM 12 19 01 7 23 00 PM 4 Backup Re ndex Restore gt Pack Update View Exit ooo This example shows the L BOSS stand alone File and Data table Maintenance Utility About Data Table Backups The L BOSS utility can extract all data from the tables and store the information in text type SIL Standard Interchange Language files The backup files contain information about each table along with the data to re populate the tables It can completely re build the database from these files When set as an automated task the backup utility works as a cyclical backup it creates a series of folders named for each day of the week After the first week the process replaces each day s existing backup from the week before There is always at least one week of data going back day by day Creating An Automated Backup L BOSS provides a utility to handle database tables used to backup and restore information from the tables or re index and pack tables Some of the options controlled by the File maintenance utility can be run from within L BOSS as automated Events For example the backup operation If your installation do
116. 2 page label as a sample shelf sign It also does a conversion of the retail price from kilogram to pound in the case of scalable items The price descriptor is taken from the object table size description field 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 113 3 6 3 unless the fields is blank Then we use the word each as size description Your dealer can modify labels for you so consult him for further assistance Selection Eel 0001 OREO COOKIES 0000000000001 OREO COOKIES 0002 UNCLE BEN S RICE COKE CLASSIC 12 02 CAN 0004 IGA SALAD DRESSING 0005 IDEAL CREAM CORN 0010 KODAK FILM 35MM BW 24 EXP 0011 SMALL COFFEE 0000000000012 MEDIUM COFFEE This example shows the Item table s POS tab with the label selection tool The available label types appear in the list within the label selection utility Each type of label in the list has a selection box beside it To associate a label type with the current item place a check mark in one or more of the label types This associates a label type with the item Items can be associated with a label type without necessarily printing To enable the item to be selected at label printing time the item must also be set to Print Clicking the Print box in the label section of the POS table sets the item as selectable at label printing time LBoss automatically selects the Print box when a price is modified for the item To print labels access the Report
117. 2 you will need to define new PRICE TARGETS at the head office For example you may create targets PO1 and P02 for price differentiation between the 2 stores The price targets are defined in L BOSS gt Maintenance gt Register gt Terminals programming menu You need to add a check mark in the Program and Price fields of the selected Target 2001 2008 Logivision L Remote communications 281 Terminals Sag P01 STORE 001 Program 001001 LPOS 001001 001901 LBOSS 001901 001002 LPOS 001002 P02 STORE 002 Program TOE TPOS EEN PAL Store program p 002002LPO0S 002002 R01 STORE 001 Report 002901 LBOSS 002901 RO2 STORE 002 Report 101901 LBOSS 101901 RAL Store total 101902 LBOSS 101902 RHO HEAD OFFICE Report Store Terminal Descriptor XAL EXCHANGE LIST 001 foo LPOS 001001 Terminal type M Inactive I Path Connection Terminal s InBox Group _ Descriptor Terminals OutBox Pot STORE 001 Program ESE Report Items Terninal s program path Exchange WV Price J Program l Cost Selecting Price means that you will now be able to create a price for any item and assign that price to the P01 group Then you can create a second price for the item and assign the second price to the P02 group It is VERY IMPORTANT to realize that whenever you create individual prices for an item you must remove the price target PAL for that item Since PAL gets sent t
118. 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS Main Menus 49 2 1 12 Message re E lol x Send message X Enter message A Cancel 0 0 Previous Next Beppy L sena Delete 7 This example shows the L BOSS File menu s Messages utility Using the Messages Utility To send a message to another L BOSS station or L POS station select the Messages option from the File menu The Messages utility window opens with options buttons across the bottom of the display The main window area is for viewing messages only To send a message e Click the Send button to open the message edit line e After entering a message press the OK button to proceed e A new panel appears waiting for the destination for the message e In the destination panel enter the station number to send the message to L BOSS station numbers are a three digit numbers usually starting with 901 as the main back end station L POS lanes are usually numbered starting at 001 e You can also enter ALL to broadcast the message to all stations that are currently online The Reply button is normally grayed out except when the station receives a message from another station Use the reply button to return an answer to the sending station The Previous Next buttons are used to review messages that have been collected and stored in the system The Delete button is used to remove messages that you do not want to keep for future re
119. 5 LOGOUT e E E E E A T E E E E E 16 LANGUAGE a E E T 16 View Internal Proce csccisccescscssecscscscncecssssiesatevencsencscasansenatcsencocbenaabansssatesspdbencecasensenabeneoanandsancessseatasssdsenenasanses 17 Process Viewer Buttons iiinis aae aaea aaaea asa Giaaviiedstasasesdstdiasdvdst dstiscbeasdedasaasdhoiades 18 Process VIEWER MOMUS is5c i2 lt centecssnc cesbaccitasceanitenticcnasecaadceunacceasssasbicahaleiayauctahidstoaciiencssbitessiccemancaaateaiseaseseye 19 View Polling Status icccccsccesc ecese cece cctcechedebves secede sc ehde te cee cotesctied hace vcesdeceetce rescue cate seuedabacsvcueessetcupescesvoiesdvadebetscdesteadede 21 Execute Command File pa r aaaea raaa raaa aa aar EAE aa a Paaa aA Aa AAE aaa ARE a Ea AE aE EREE KESE EASAN 22 Deploy Individual File csscssscessscserensnenensnceesseceesenenenenancessseceesenenenenaneessaeeessasenensnaneesdaccessasenenenanenenaceenensenen 23 Configuration Pan l fe052 coy focccccaesecectederead cade penaes qcesdcedsAorctecetued cocsscnausannerictdecerstcceised coe sonar RAAKAA aE daara 25 Company ei aE A a 26 Emal ee a a a E e E aaa a E e aa a a a aaaea aaa 29 System darei aiea aiai aaea aa iadaaa Hea iain 30 EEES e o EET E E E E A T 34 IESG snid ana a aa a eaea aA aaa anaa a aa aaea EN 35 ea T EE EEE AEE T E AAE AE TE A E E EERTE 37 Stores call head office Store set Up s essssssessssrrsresisritsinstrnrtantnntrartastntttastiatinttantiatentatttatnatan
120. 6 7 20 0 33 3 50 0 46 0 85 2 17 0 20 5 34 0 51 5 47 0 88 7 18 0 22 0 35 0 53 8 47 4 90 0 19 0 23 5 35 5 55 0 48 0 92 3 20 0 25 0 36 0 56 3 48 7 95 0 21 0 26 6 37 0 58 7 49 0 96 1 50 0 100 0 NOTE To apply price calculations to all items or to filtered items please see the Maintenance application s Edit menu Item options help section 3 6 1 6 Cost Tab Item PLU Maintenance Cost Tab Each PLU can be assigned a cost for each vendor from whom it can be purchased There is no real limit as to how many vendors and costs an item can have but items must have a Default vendor To assign vendors and costs to items select the Cost tab from the PLU maintenance option The F7 function key can be used as a shortcut to access the Cost table immediately The information in the cost table such as Case Cost will define the way this item behaves in the Entry module when dealing with orders receiving and adjusting inventory Note The cost information is also used to keep track of the actual or real cost of the item when it sells at the POS This means that any changes made to item costs MUST be deployed to the front end to keep accurate cost information for items 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 89 Ca of X gt Bv fm ltem number F2 Active Next poooooo0000001 239 B A OREO COOKIES REG on hand Over 50 Parent Promo Sales Quick Object POS Price Cost Inventory Sales Picture EC
121. 7 2 Adding the L Register Option s secccssseeeeesseeeeeesseeneeenseeneeenseeeeeenseeeeeeaseeneeensenneesaseeneeenseeenees 291 3 Terminal set up sin AA es fucter savduaders sauceresvanaee cs Gaateedss 294 4 Events to communicate with the ECR sccsssccssseeeseesseeeesneeeeeeeeseaeseseaesaseeeeeeeeesnaeseseenensenenss 295 5 L Register Set Up event ccccsceececsseeeceeeseeeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeenseaneeseseeneeseseeneesaseeneeseseeneeenseeneeens 296 6 Recover data from existing ECR cccssccsescesseeeesneeeseeeesseseseeenseeeseaesesaesaseeeeeensesnaeseseaeeneeeeees 300 T Initial load t ECR riie ts So eee teen eee eee Se tee 301 8 POS tabs new fields ea aa aeaaeae aa ar aaa a a aaae aa r aAa ae a A e a aaa aa aaaea aE aia 302 2001 2008 Logivision Contents V 9 Sub department programming ss sssssssnssennnennnunnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnn unnn nnnn unnn nnnnnnnn nunnan nnna nn nannan nnmnnn nna 305 10 Operator programming ccsecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneneeeeeeeessaesesneeenseeeseaesesaesaseeeeneeeeseaeseseaesnseeeeneeaes 309 oeat oo d t aE E E A E A E E 310 12 Field numbers in system Error messages cccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeneeseseneeeseseenensnseeneesnseenenens 310 Section XIII GL Interface 312 AET lale Ee ae o sei a EAEE E E E E A T 312 2 Setting up the relation to GL accounts inside L BOSS cssseeeeesseeeeeeseseeeenseseenenseecenens 312 3 Settin
122. 8 Logivision Maintenance Application 115 This example shows a Sub department table record Sub Department is used to enter the record number this sub department will use Department is a compulsory link that associates the product to a larger group for reporting purposes POS target Use this filed to select the target for this sub department when you are working on a headquarters system For example when you need to send different tax programming to different target zones this will be how you do it Main Description is used to set a main item descriptor used on the report system POS Description field allows you to enter 2 descriptions that are used to give a description which will appear on register receipts if the sub department is used for manual sale entry Taxable 1 Select this flag if tax rate 1 should be applied when this item is used Taxable 2 Select this flag if tax rate 2 should be applied when this item is used Taxable 3 Select this flag if tax rate 3 should be applied when this item is used Taxable 4 Select this flag if tax rate 4 should be applied when this item is used Food stamp Select the food stamp flag if this item can be paid for with Food stamps and you are in a jurisdiction that accepts food stamps WIC Select the WIC flag if this item can be paid for by WIC check Prohibit discount Select this flag to stop the operator from applying a discount to this item The item will also be exclude
123. 99 NOTE When an item that is part of a product is sold in a quantity greater than the package quantity it reverts back to the base price until the quantity is reached again In the example above the 7th 8th 9th 10th and 11th products would sell for 79 cents each and the 12th would ring up for 04 cents LQD or limited quantity discount is used to limit the number of items that can be obtained for a certain price A real world example could be that you want to limit the access to sale items Setting the LQD to 79 cents for quantity 3 means that only the first 3 items purchased qualify for the special LQD price The register will ring any extra items at the base price unless of course there is also a package price Mix match table is used to create associations between similarly priced items For example setting a Jello product to use Base price of 3 1 00 will allow that item to sell at 34 for the first and 33 cents for the second and third If you want to offer your customer any 3 different Jello products for 3 1 00 you must attach them to the same mix and match group That way instead of ringing each of 3 different Jello flavors at 34 cents the register will ring the second and third items at 33 because they are in the same mix match table Items can be set to a mix and match table and use all of the price types shown In the Sale Price column From is the date and time that a retail price change is to take effect Placing the curs
124. A panel will open asking if you wish to print all the topics If not already selected choose this topic only Print the page To print the entire paper manual Make sure you have the Adobe Acrobat Reader installed Use Windows explorer to locate the L BOSS folder Select the L BOSS pdf file it will open the Acrobat Reader You can view the manual on screen or use the Reader s print utility 2001 2008 Logivision About the L BOSS application 9 1 3 Understanding Communications Polling Process Polling is the act of collecting information from POS stations In most cases one back end station collects the sales and other information from the front end stations storing the information in the database In some systems polling takes place once at the end of each sales period often day end In these types of systems there is normally a request from the back end forcing the POS stations to communicate the sales information How Polling Works The L BOSS back and front end POS machines are in constant communication so the polling process is constantly running The back end machine that has been designated to retrieve sales information is constantly checking each POS station s outbox at a set interval collecting any information that the POS stations are producing The front end stations produce sales information files eg EJ after every transaction After finalizing a sale the information is imm
125. AND automatically executed You can unselect both Allow options to disable the command Next event will occur on This shows the next time this command should run and is used 2001 2008 Logivision Events Tasks 255 along with the repeating cycle setup to determine the dates and times of execution Execute one past event Select this option if you want L BOSS to execute a command that did not execute when it should have usually because the system was down or L BOSS was not running when the command should have last run For example if the system is set to perform the daily maintenance at 11 59 pm but the system is not functioning because L BOSS was inadvertently closed When L BOSS is launched the next morning it will realize that it should have executed the commands set to execute one past event at the previous date time and will execute them If this option is not set L BOSS will wait until the next scheduled time for the execution Execute at loading time Is used to tell L BOSS that this command should be run when L BOSS is launched Tasks that are flagged to execute at load time will run when L BOSS starts Note that it may take up to 30 seconds before L BOSS can read the Task list and execute tasks set to run at startup Also the scheduled flag does not have to be set to on for the command to run at startup View on all terminals Set to on by default this flag determines which terminals can se
126. BOSS and L POS can also be configured to display a photo of the customer ideal for visual confirmation The photo can be for office use only or also sent to the front end The POS screen must be programmed to display the photo when the account number and contact number is entered at the POS To associate a picture with the customer s record in the client table e With the client table open on the Maintenance desktop e Click the View menu from the Maintenance top bar menus e Select the Picture option e The client table window expands to display a picture box with Browse and Delete 2001 2008 Logivision 148 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 7 2 3 7 3 buttons e In the Contact portion of the customer window select the contact to associate with a picture e Use the Browse option to locate the contact s photo file e Deploy the changes to all L POS terminals if they are programmed to display customer photos Use the Delete button to remove the associated photo from the contact s record NOTE When the customer table is being edited the Menu bar is modified to include a View option This is where you can toggle on or off the displaying of the customer photo on the maintenance screen Maintenance Programmer File Edit View PLU Account Register Transfer Windows Help Note When you edit the customer account table the file menu includes the send to host option Send to host The Send to
127. DEPLOYING You cannot undo modifications after posting using this option Delete All Filtered Records This option allows you to select items from the database using a filter and deleting them as a group Move Filtered items to Batch This option allows you to select items from the database using a filter and have the selected items sent to an existing batch Add this Item to Batch Send the selected item to an existing batch Other Edit Options Other Dynamic Edit Menu Options For most other tables the edit menu contains the same options and utilities as the toolbar Post Record is the same as the tool Previous Record is the same as the tool Next Record is the same as the tool Add New Record is the same as the ka tool Delete Record is the same as the tool ignore Unposted Changes This is an Undo option that removes changes made BEFORE posting the changes Note that if you modify a record and move on to the next the changes are POSTED not to be confused with DEPLOYING You cannot undo modifications after posting using this option 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 71 3 6 3 6 1 PLU Menu PLU Menu Options The PLU menu provides access to all item related data types Selecting an option from the PLU menu opens the corresponding data table For quick access to the Item table use the PLU icon found on the Maintenance application s desktop Most other item related
128. EN 1024 x768 touch round EN 1024 x768 touch round taskbar EN 1024 x768 touch square taskbar EN 1024x 766 Keyboard EN 1024 766 keyboard taskbar v Load selected files From disk Cancel OK This example shows the Configuration panel s Load Files tab The screen is split in two The choices on the bottom refer to the default screen layout and function files that the L POS terminals can be loaded with and some sample product files Select the profile that you want to load and then press the Load selected files button to execute the load Once the required load files have been loaded they will show up on the top part of the window in the Load file tab The top area of the window only displays a list of the files that have been loaded into the system If you need to reload a set of files you need to select it again by clicking on that file in the bottomof the window No action can be executed on a file on the top list it is only there as an audit trail of what has been loaded The program will begin importing the load files you chose and building the database once you press the OK button When it is time to create the front end function lists you will be prompted for the target register group Unless you are installing both touch screen and keyboard in the same store you should accept the default PAL target If you need to install the 2 different register set up files enter a target group for the keyboard version P01
129. Editing The Transfer menu is only visible if there are tables open to edit After editing information in a table you can send the modifications either by using the satellite dish button on the edit table toolbar or from the Transfer drop down menu The Transfer menu allows you to send the currently selected record or the entire file In most cases sending the entire file is not suggested or required but doesn t really cause any problem NOTE When editing the Item table the Send complete File option is greyed out This is because the item file is usually quite large and could take a considerable amount of time to send If you need to send the entire file you should use the Deploy Individual file option from the L BOSS File menu 3 11 Windows Menu Controlling the Maintenance Desktop Like many Windows based programs the Maintenance application allows you to have more than one window table open at the same time The Window menu contains options that allow you to control how the windows or tables appear on the desktop Cascade This aligns the open windows in layers with the corners and title bars of all open windows visible enabling you to find the window you a looking for Tile This option tries to place all the open windows into the Maintenance application s desktop by re sizing them Close All Closes all open windows at once Selecting open windows from a list If you have multiple windows open on the desktop yo
130. Events 253 programming items 71 Programming Sub departments 114 Prohibit Quantity 76 Promo ID 76 96 Promotion prices 130 Protecting Your Data 11 Purchase Order 209 creating 209 manual 209 Purging Old Inventory Records 248 Q Quantity Required 76 quick access to the Item table 71 Quit polling 21 R RAL target group 167 READ KEY 18 Receiving Stock 221 from a Purchase Order 221 using a Portable Device 221 without a Purchase Order 221 Rectangle Tool 322 Register Menu Options 155 Regular Cost 88 Re indexing Tables 327 Re Init Printer 35 Remark 88 remote data communications 167 Removing Items 106 Rental Items 81 109 Replace 23 Reply 48 Report 190 Category 190 Change Icon 190 controlling 179 date selection 182 Debug 190 Dialog 190 2001 2008 Logivision 340 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Report 190 F3 Search Utility 184 Hidden 190 New page 190 periodtypes 182 Preview 190 Preview Maximized 184 Printer dialogue 190 Properties panel 190 range 182 right click menu 179 Section 190 Selection Utility 180 Template File 190 Title Fields 190 Total fields 190 Trigger Fields 190 Types 179 Use Group 190 Viewer 184 Report Code 75 Report formula 164 Report Section 164 Report SQL Editor 193 Report System Overview 178 Report Template Editor 319 Report Viewer Options 184 Re Read 193 Reset transaction counter 19 Resizing an object 320 Restoring from L BOSS Archives 11 Restri
131. H period is used to define the fixed period used by price type H PLU items These are rental items that do not have variable rental periods like the price type G items This would be most common for items like films in a c store that are always rented for the same time period Item Label Setup Linking Items with Labels L BOSS can also generate item or shelf labels if the Label printing utility is registered for use To modify or create label templates you must also register the Form Manager Please consult your Logivision dealer if you require more information concerning labels The label format s for the item are programmed within the item using the Maintenance application s desktop PLU icon to access the item tables Once an item has been associated with a printable label the Report application s Selection utility provides label printing choices This means that there are two steps to complete to be able to print labels Items must be programmed with an associated label type To link items to use a specific label template access the item table programming in the Maintenance application At the bottom right of the POS tab there is a section titled Label which includes a label type selection tool Double click in the Type box to open the label selection tool Logivision delivers 3 default label types Type A uses labels sized 4 by 1 5 Avery 5159 Types B amp C use labels sized 2 625 by 1 Avery 5160 Label type D prints a
132. IP address configuration The following is an example that can be used with 1 PC and three MA 1595 PC IP address set in network settings 2001 2008 Logivision L Register interface 12 2 TCP IP 192 168 0 100 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 Master MA 1595 1 IP Address 192 168 0 1 Master IP 192 168 0 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 Backup Master MA 1595 2 IP Address 192 168 0 2 Master IP 192 168 0 1 Net Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 Satellite MA 1595 3 IP Address 192 168 0 3 Master IP 192 168 0 1 Net Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 Adding the L Register option From the L BOSS screen open the File menu and select the Configuration option 291 2001 2008 Logivision 292 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 E L BOSS 003 901 Programmer Modules Special Help Login LogOut Language view internal process view Polling status Execute command file Deploy Individual file Configuration PRE RELEASE System ready 901 Send urgent messages toL POS Ctrl 5 Date conversion Messages Show Tips Exit I View log R Tracker s Exit 824 outstanding From the L BOSS Configuration menu open the Load files tab 2001 2008 Logivision L Register interface 293 Configuration Company Email System Misc Comm Cleanup File load history list Basic Must load 12 7 2005
133. If PO1 was created at head office to send prices to store 001 you will also need to create the P01 target at store 001 This target will include the POS terminals in store 001 It will be selected as a PRICE and PROGRAM group If you do not create the P01 target group at the store the items that are in the P0O1 price zone will not be sent to the POS terminals Create the Target groups at head office This section explains the target groups for different stores All situations are different so you will need to understand this concept to set up the system properly At the head office you will probably want to see reports for the individual stores the same way you can see reports for an individual terminal at each store This means that the terminals from each individual store will need to belong to a separate REPORT target And if you want to be able to send program data to an individual store you will need individual PROGRAM targets In a head office system you will have many more target groups than in a normal store 2001 2008 Logivision L Remote communications 279 Terminals P01 STORE 001 Program 001001 LPOS 001001 P02 STORE 002 Program aR PAL Store program 4 002001 LPOS 002001 R01 STORE 001 Report gt 002002 LPOS 002002 R02 STORE 002 Report 002901 LBOSS 002901 RAL Store total 101901 LBOSS 101901 RHO HEAD OFFICE Report 101902 LBOSS 101902 XAL EXCHANGE LIST Se Sen ae ee ee
134. L Cost target 277 ER Regular cost Cost break 1 gt amp Best Buy Foods Inc Vendor 1 Quantity break ltem code 202202 From Case Cost 1 1 29 F To Remark Discount Default l g Discount Unit cost 1 29 Unit cost This example shows the Item table s Cost tab Cost Target The target allows you to create different cost records for the same item based on different regions The target applies to both the Regular cost and Cost break sections In most situations the default PAL target does not need to be modified since the item has only one cost per vendor However in multi store situations costs may vary from store to store even from the same vendor often because of regional differences The Cost target determines which store or cost group the cost applies to Click on the cost target you want to change The window contains up to 10 of the available cost targets when more than 10 cost targets exist a horizontal scroll bar allows you to view the additional targets L BOSS automatically tries to select the target called PAL which is the default target The window displays other targets in bold or in italic characters If PAL target is not set the system will select the first target it finds The Cost target window has different fonts for different targets The target name will be in bold font if a cost was entered for that target The target name will be in italic font if no cost was entered for that target The
135. L Store program 4 002001 LPOS 002001 R01 STORE 001 Report gt 002002 LPOS 002002 R02 STORE 002 Report 002901 LBOSS 002901 RAL Store total 101901 LBOSS 101901 RHO HEAD OFFICE Report 101902 LBOSS 101902 XAL EXCHANGE LIST cree Tee See See See Spee Store Terminal Descriptor oor fso flpossooisor Terminal type LBOSS AE Inactive Path Connection L Remote communication Connection LAN Group Descriptor i oae PO STORE 001 Program zouten Password Report M items For Dense 74 201 10 1 Exchange Price J Program Cost M Active Connection Select the connection to be used by L Remote User name If a User name is required to establish the connection such as over a VPN 2001 2008 Logivision 278 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 enter it here Password If a Password is required to establish the connection such as over a VPN enter it here IP or Domain Enter the IP or Domain name of the L Remote server at the store Active Set this flag to activate communications with this store This flag can be removed to temporarily suspend communications with the store Terminal and target list in each store There is nothing special about the terminal list at each store unless you are working with different price or other program groups If you have a different price target for example P01 at head office it is because you are sending different prices to different stores
136. L Tracker main screen contains a menu and several screen areas that remain constant during operation The transaction detail information for the currently selected transaction is displayed on the left hand portion of the L Tracker window The transaction header information is displayed above the transaction details viewer The right hand side of the screen includes an area where pre selection criteria are entered to limit the transaction results list that shows as a grid once the Go function has been executed The customized search fields are used to locate specific data from the transactions displayed as a result of the pre selection 2001 2008 Logivision 266 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 4 _ Tracker Transaction header Pre selection criteria File Edit View Print Help information Transaction Cashier Customer 120 Programmer May 2004 May 2004 Date Time Cust Store Terminal 4 gt E K 2004 05 05 20 20 44 o 003 SunMorTuelwedThul Ei Sa SunMonlTuelwedThul Ei Sat F2 2153 62Kb 213 4 M6 78 2 3 4 MMG 78 godio he rodio OREO COOKIES 23 24 25 28 27 28 2g 231 241251 281 27 2a 29 UNCLE BEN S RICE 301 31 Today 05 16 2004 30131 Today 05 16 2004 PREMIUM PLUS SODA BISCUITS F10 IGA SALAD DRESSING 0 a All stores Transaction IDEAL CREAM CORN ORE0 COOKIES OREO COOKIES i 0 All terminals Customer 29 Records Cashier F9 Date Store Tem Transt Cust Cashier 05 05 2004 001 003 1
137. POS target Sub department PAL Store program bi Cost target Category PAL Store program 7 Vendor Price target PAL Store program PLU i All PLU s or modified PLU s only Modified PLUS only X 2 Cancel This example shows the Report selection process for type B Labels Depending on how the label generating report is programmed you will be prompted to choose a selection process to determine the labels to print As with other L BOSS reports this panel varies depending on the way the report is programmed In the example above you can choose a single item sub department vendor or category of items If you do not specify values for these the Report application will select all labels marked with the label type being produced The lower left of the panel also allows you to select either all the items or only those that are modified After choosing how the items are selected press the Preview to see the label page on screen or Print button to send the labels to the printer Selection prompt window In some cases you may not want to print all items that need a label or you may need to print several labels for certain items Certain label queries use a selection box allowing the user to determine which items and the quantity to print 2001 2008 Logivision 188 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Selection UPC Number OREO COOKIES 00000000
138. U items per customer This is the number of days to keep the PLU movement per customer To use this option you must purchase the preferred shopper option and select the check box beside Active Past this date the data is stored in weekly monthly and yearly totals Number of days to keep financial daily sales information This is the same as above except this is related to the FINANCIAL daily data only This process is done Monthly Keep log of all exports in the processed directory This option is used to keep a copy of each file exported from the LBoss system to the targets such as price changes account data and all other data sent from the LBoss Load Files Load Files Tab Settings During the first time set up of L BOSS a basic screen keyboard profile was selected to use the software The database tables with screen layout function lists etc were all created in the system If you need to load a second profile or reload the original set up select the Load files tab 2001 2008 Logivision 44 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Configuration Basic Must load 4 20 2006 3 29 13 PM EN 1024 x768 touch square taskbar 4 20 2006 3 29 13 PM Sample 4 20 2006 3 29 13 PM EN 1024 768 keyboard taskbar 4 20 2006 3 33 51 PM EN 1024 x768 touch round 4 20 2006 3 41 48 PM EN 1024 768 keyboard taskbar 4 20 2006 3 42 36 PM EN 1024x 768 Keyboard 4 20 2006 3 43 38 PM Available loads 2 Basic Must load
139. You can also access the price tab using the Ctrl 4 keyboard shortcut ah eM 4D By tm Item number F2 0000000000001 OREO COOKIES Quick Object POS Active Next PROMO88 REG Over 50 Promo Price Cost Inventory Sales Picture EGE Like code 0000000000001 Sugg Retail F3 Method Type E Base s249 1 Package ao f so 3 Mix match table Hi Points es Dsc HE SHE Size 454 Factor 100 PROMO88 Method Type PAL Hame Price target Base 3 49 1 Package aD E Mix match table Points Dsc sl 4 From1 16 2004 0000 To 1 23 2004 2359 Level M x Margin Projected Actual 48 12 Last digit Calculate This example shows the Item table s Price tab Like code This field is used to group products with identical pricing formats For example jello The different flavors are all sold for the same price in most situations Assign the price for the first item of the many that are the same Access the next item that has the same price Double click in the Like code window and select the UPC code of the first jello that has been given the correct price When you select a like code that does not match the current upc code you are programming the like code field will display green This is a warning to make you aware that a like code is being used meaning the price will be changed for this item if the like code price is changed If you modify the price of this item the p
140. Z CAN 00000000000007 DIET COKE 12 OZ CAN G amp P Work Centre Page 210 Laurier 111 Beloeil Qc J3G 467 450 464 2131 450 464 5673 Qty Weight Total 17 0 000 25 50 361 0 000 180 50 602 0 000 270 90 411 0 000 222 62 PLU inventory tracking This report shows the transactions that affect the movement of a product over the selected period PLU Inventory Tracking Printed Monday May 23 2005 4 52 18 PM From Tuesday March 01 2005 to Monday May 23 2005 Item group PAL All stores Cost group PAL All stares Description G amp P Work Centre Page 210 Laurier 1H Beloeil Qc J3G 467 450 464 2131 450 464 5673 From 1 to 1 Store 003 Child qty weigth qtyweight Parent Weight Oty Amount 00000000000001 Case 12 oreo cookies 003 3 29 2005 Inventory adjustments 00000000000002 003 3 29 2005 Receiving 003 4 1 2005 To Order 003 4 1 2005 To Order 0000000000000 2 003 4 4 2005 Receiving 003 4 7 2005 Receiving 003 4 7 2005 Receiving 003 4 7 2005 Receiving 003 4 8 2005 003 4 8 2005 Physical count Physical count 003 4411 2005 Physical count 003 4 12 2005 Receiving 003 47 2005 Physical count 003 4 19 2005 Order 003 4 20 2005 Physical count 003 4 20 2005 Order 003 4 21 2005 Stocktransfer 003 4 23 2005 Physical count 003 4 24 2005 Physical count 003 4 25 2005 Receiving 003 4 25 2005 Receiving 003 4 25 2005 Order 003 4 25 2005 Inventory adjustments 003 5 11 2005 In
141. a Pick X type deal Type E is used for buy one get one free BOGO promo deals L POS charges the first item does not charge the second item then prints a Buy one get one free message Type F is used to limit free items to Buy one get only one free Type G sets the rental price feature Type G should be used for rental items that are rented for different periods of time An example of type G rental item is a VCR or Nintendo machine that may be rented for a day a weekend or a week at a time NOTE Selecting type G rental changes the pricing columns from the normal price methods You must also program L POS lanes using the POS setup for rental items For more on rental item programming and how to use the POS Setup please see the Working with PLUs section Rental Items help page below Quick Object POS Price Cost Inventory Sales Sugg Retail Sale price Method Type la Period Description Price Default 3 00 Regular period 25 00 v 4 00 Extended 20 00 nl 6 00 Halt Day 45 00 i zi Add Del This example shows the Item table s Price tab with G type rental is selected Choosing method type G for an item will modify the fields available in the price column No sale column is available with type G Price levels are available When you select a type G the pricing column changes to an editable table You must add records lines to this table to program the prices for the available time
142. a report Example the cashier report shows that an operator did 17 Error Corrects This report would list the items that were corrected and the amounts with a total at the end e Search lines only Use this option to print out the contents of the result list only 2001 2008 Logivision 268 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 9 3 9 4 Help menu Use this option to obtain version details or to open the help file Running L Tracker L Tracker is a licensed program from Logivision If your user license does not permit you to use L Tracker you will need to contact your authorized reseller to have the option enabled If you do not have a Tracker icon on the L BOSS desktop your system was not licensed to run the Tracker option Click on the L Tracker icon from the L Boss main menu You may also start L Tracker from the operating system directly Access the LBOSS folder and double click LTracker Exe to start the program The following window appears 4 L Tracker feoltx File Edit view Print Help Transaction Cashier Customer g May 2004 D g May 2004 D Date Time Cust Store Terminal F2 5 6 71 8 5 6 71 8 1O 11112 131 14 15 10 111 42 131141715 17 18 WEN 20 21 22 18 BEE 20 21 22 24 25 26 2 28 29 25 26 27 28 29 31__ Today 05 19 2004 Today 05 19 2004 0 All stores ieee 0 All terminals Customer Records Cashier F9 Date Store Term Trans Cust Cashier 2 3 16 23 30 Customized se
143. a will not be sent unless the ecr communication was executed before this event executes For more nformation on events see the events section of the help file 10 6 Deploying files Deploying changes to the stores Changes made at the head office need to be sent to the stores This will occur automatically whenever Deploy all changes is executed Changes are also sent to all locations when the satellite is used within a specific record on a table This action only gets data to the L BOSS back office in the remote stores You will need to execute a command at the store to get the files from the store s back office to the store s POS terminals Deploy files with different zones price item cost etc L BOSS includes a menu option to send individual files to target groups You need to be careful when using that option to Replace data at the targets In most situations the same data goes to all stores When you are using Price zones different price data goes to different stores So price records for zone 1 may be part of the P01 group prices for zone 2 will be in the P02 group and prices common to both stores will be in the PAL group If you select deploy and replace the system will send the PAL price data to both stores and replace the current data in the table with the PAL records in the price_tab This means that the store now only has the prices for items common to both stores So you need to handle the Deploy and replace command manually if i
144. able the record is really just emptied of any values The physical space the record occupied in the table remains During normal use the data tables are added to and have records removed on a regular basis taking more space than actually required The Pack operation seeks and removes these spaces from the Paradox table structure diminishing the table to include only the records that contain data This process occurs on a regular basis run internally by L BOSS You should not normally have to run the Pack command 2001 2008 Logivision 332 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 16 Glossary Glossary of Terms Back End The office terminals or stations that run L BOSS used for the management aspects of the store controlling the data for the front end Category A user defined key that items can link to for combining items either for reporting or global modifications CID Cash in Drawer but often used to describe any tender type that accumulates in a POS drawer Command File Executable file that contains proprietary L BOSS commands along with SQL code used to interact with the database Command files in L BOSS often use a sql file extension Compute Calculate or re calculate data to give a total often required after entering inventory quantities in order to re establish the correct number after sales Count In terms of inventory the physical counting of items Inventory tracking must start with a cou
145. ackaged The Tare table keeps a record for each tare amount that must be removed from the total weight of a scalable item Category Table An alternate reporting group the Category table contains a record for every Category in the system Price Level Table Items may have multiple prices based on price levels Edit this table to create remove or modify price levels Mix amp Match Table to associate items for pricing deals The Mix amp Match table stores the records for the pricing deals but is not actually sent to or used by the L POS front end terminals It helps the item programmer select the correct record for special deals Vendor Table To keep track of all vendors in the system Scale Table Special table that contains information for items that are scaled then pre packed with a label that contains the price of the bulk in a code that is scanned at the POS The Maintenance application does not communicate with these electronic scales by default See the scale table help page for more about communicating with this type of scale Bottle Link Table Bottle Link Programming Certain regions require that products sold in glass plastic or other types of containers be 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 121 levied with a deposit or an environmental fee amount to encourage the return recycling of empty containers U Bottle Link a de q gt v Link Link to Bottle deposit
146. ad office that allows requesting a report for store 001 If you need a report for individual terminals for each store you need another report target that includes the single terminal RAL is the report target used to get a total for all activity from all stores RHO is a report target for activity at the head office such as inventory receiving or transfers XAL is the exchange list These are the terminals that appear in the polling window Data is transferred to and from terminals on this list only In this case the back office terminals LBOSS 001901 and LBOSS 002901 are the only terminals that the head office will exchange data with The LBOSS in each store will communicate with the POS in each store to gather sales data This sales data will be sent by the remote L BOSS to the head office L BOSS Vice versa the program data is sent from head office L BOSS to remote L BOSS only The remote L BOSS moves that data to the individual lanes Inbox and Outbox folders Your head office L Remote server needs two subdirectories for each remote connection So if you have 10 stores to communicate with you must create 10 inbox and 10 outbox folders C MAIL INBOX_001 and C MAIL OUTBOX_001 C MAIL INBOX_002 and C MAIL OUTBOX_002 Etc Different targets like price zones Different price targets price zones L BOSS allows you to maintain different data for different stores For example if you want to create different prices for store 1 and store
147. ag if the POS multiplication function cannot be used with this item Operators often use a quantity function for similarly priced items although the products have different PLU codes This can falsify the sales and stocking quantities of the related items Quantity Required Select this flag if a quantity entry is required before the item can be sold This is often the case for items sold for example at 3 1 00 and when the cashiers are unsure whether scanning one item will ring 3 items for 1 00 or 1 item at 34 cents Price Required This item status creates an open pricea item It means that the item will behave like a sub department forcing the cashier to manually enter a price for the item Visual Verify Select this flag when price confirmation is required before an item is accepted The programmed price is displayed prompting the cashier to accept or change the price This can be helpful in businesses that often negotiate the price of an item at the time of sale Not for Sale Use this flag to restrict the sale of this item temporarily as in the case of seasonal items not available year round This allows you to leave the PLU in the Item table but not allow POS operators to inadvertently sell the item Hash Item This flag is used to exclude the sales of this product from the store s Net and Total sales This is sometimes the case for items or departments used for bottle sales lottery returns etc The setting Not in gross is used
148. ag to use the same item as the late fee When you select this flag it is important to set the PLU function 710 as the first function executed in the late fee button Late fee button By default there is no button programmed as late fee on the default L POS set up So the button shows None To charge a late fee you need to assign a button in the rental set up screen If you decide to set the flag Automatic quantity and Use same PLU assign the PLU button If you want to charge a different fee you can program a PLU as late fee charge and assign a Pre Set PLU as the Late fee button Grace period To permit an automatic grace period beyond the return time enter the grace time in hours probably as a fractional amount or in percentage of the rental period Selecting a percentage of the rental period such as 10 would obviously extend a 30 day rental by 3 days such as a pair of crutches in a pharmacy Copy identifier When several copies of the same item are available it may be necessary to easily learn if a copy of the item is still in the store By creating a pattern or mask for the item numbers of the same film L POS will be able to respond on film availability 2001 2008 Logivision 112 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 6 2 5 You can determine which digits represent the copy number within the PLU number entered to rent the item The copy identifier digits can be placed at the start or at the end of the PLU nu
149. ains the INBOX as C e The terminal inbox for POS 02 will be set to POS02 C INBOX so you must identify L POS lane 2 as POSO2 in the network identification settings You must also share that POS terminal s hard drive that contains the INBOX as C e The terminal outbox for POS 02 will be set to POS02 C OUTBOX so you must identify L POS lane 2 as POS02 in the network identification settings You must also share that POS terminal s hard drive that contains the INBOX as C e etc The system will automatically add each of the terminals into target groups as follows e Each POS terminal will be added to the PAL RAL and XAL groups e Each POS terminal will be added to an individual REPORT group named 001 002 003 etc The group descriptions will be set to POS 01 POS 02 etc Note In order to add more terminals to an existing terminal list the existing terminals must be numbered sequentially beginning with terminal 001 Otherwise you will need to add the terminals manually Adding terminals manually To add a terminal select the Terminal option from the menu and use the Add option You can also click on the blue bar at the top of the terminal list to activate that window Then the toolbar in the main window can be used to add a terminal the i tool L BOSS will prompt for the Store number and the Terminal number The next step is to assign a Description for the terminal Below the descriptor window you select the terminal type The
150. al 2 2 3 0 12 6 General Communication Report Definition EJ Definition EJ Section T RADY 0203 Description Item correct Amount sign Inverted Qty Sign Amount Divisor 100 Oty Divisor 1000 Save Cancel EJ Definition This menu can be used to modify the EJ record interface It is recommended to consult with your TEC dealer before modifying the values on this page Recover data from existing ECR This Screen is the LTEC 1595 Utility AUTOBACK UP ROUTINE for the register DO NOT CLOSE once this event is executed 2001 2008 Logivision L Register interface L Tec1595 Utility By Logivision Beta version Select all Clear All I 01SFKc 02 Store Commercial Message J 03 Cashier Name V 04 Department J 05 PLU Table 06 Date Time 07 Hourly Report Range 08 Listing Capacity LC 09 Financial Report Item Name 10 Print Line Item Name 11 System Option 12 Canadian Exempt Tax 13 Group Name 14 Major Group Name 15 Check Track 16 Display Name 1 Combination Report 18 Salesperson 19 Credit Card Company 20 Endorsement Message 21 Key Status 7 22 Link PLU 7 23 Tare Table and General Unit Weight 24 PLU Preset Code Key 25 Report Item Print Non Print 26 PLU Group Name 27 Comment Message 28 Display Message 29 Error Message 7 30 Media Pick up Warming 31 Function Key 32 N
151. al enter the GL account for revenue on Totalizer 3 Net sales and leave the sub departments blank General ledger Enter the associated general ledger account number This must be a number that exists in your accounting system If you enter a 7 digit GL number in the totalizer table but your Chart of accounts does not have a 7 digit account number the data transfer will not balance properly or will be rejected by your accounting software D or C Debit Credit Is this a debit or a credit entry to the GL system Payments such as CASH in DRAWER are normally entered as D for debit Setting an event to run automatically Open the L BOSS events menu Add a new event Call the event Export to G L Create an event using the L BOSS gt Task gt Edit button 2001 2008 Logivision GL Interface 315 Command line EXEC RUN LBOSS GLExport exe B D1 0 D2 0 STORE 001 Command line switches B means run in unattended batch mode D1 is beginning date 0 is today 1 is one day offset to yesterday etc D2 is ending date 0 is today 1 is one day offset to yesterday etc STORE is the store number to select the data for Select Allow manual to allow manual execution of the program Note that it will export data for the store and dates in the batch file For normal manual execution of the GL export use the L BOSS gt MOdules menu option Select Allow scheduled to allow automatic execution at the pre programmed tim
152. all head office C Regional office Store Remote office server L Remote login Name Password Li a eee a Local upstream folder Port CA0 utboxHost ee ftp Preserve report data per terminal Merge report data per store Encryption Cancel Select the communication method as Head office calls stores In the Who am I form define the location as store In the Remote office server no settings are required Local upstream folder is the folder on the store L BOSS server where the transactions are saved for transfer to the headquarters By default use C OutboxHosi e Preserve report data per terminal Select this option to enable reporting per POS terminal at head office Otherwise select Merge report data per store If you select Preserve report data per terminal you need to create each store s POS and Back office terminals at Head office If you select Merge report data per store you will only create the back office terminal 901 for each store when defining the terminal list at head office L Remote login Name and Password need to match at both ends Set the Port to ftp Encryption is used to set an encryption password to protect data Must be the same at both ends 10 2 Terminal set up with L Remote Terminal list at head office The head office must have information on the location of each remote store If you want to 2001 2008 Logivision 276 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 report
153. am 3 6 7 You may want to execute the batch program automatically to delete images associated with expired batches Create an event to run AddBatch automatically Statistics Using the Statistics Data Test The statistics menu entry is available tp clean up errors and unused records from database tables There are several tabs to select from each will allow you to get some feedback on number of records invalid and obsolete records in different areas of the database General Tab The PLU or Item file is actually composed of several database tables The Statistics option allows you to verify the validity of the item tables and the links that join them called cross references It is possible that the record cross referencing becomes corrupt or that items exist that do not have the normal cross references This can happen if you have created items in the main Object table but have not linked the item to either a sub department required or given the item a price The unlinked items are not necessarily harmful to the system but should be dealt with to prevent possible item management problems such as 2001 2008 Logivision 138 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 report inconsistencies The Statistics option allows you to test the cross references and delete the invalid records from the database In some cases you may want to complete further tests by accessing the Maintenance application s File menu with the app
154. ame appended with _Except Rec This means that you will be able to process the remaining items after correcting the item set up for each skipped item 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 229 5 1 2 2 4 Receiving back orders You may receive less that the quantity ordered when you receive against an open purchase order When this occurs the system will prompt you to keep the back ordered items open on the purchase order Answer yes to retain the order for the remaining items or no to destroy the order If you never save back order items the prompt can be answered automatically Access L BOSS gt Configuration gt Advanced flags and set the Prompt for backorders in Entry as required in your business 5 1 2 2 5 Complete the receiving ra Receiving Files Edit view Vendor name Store Inventory date Vendor 1 Joe s Fresh Produce 003 01 4 21 2005 Inv 12345 PO FB Review PAL Remark v1 12345 Case cost TT Unit cost PT Qty cs la PLUH Minimum ROAA Onoda 0 PLU Description Vendor code Cases Units Amount Weight F2 Add F3 Delete F4 Cost Worksheet FE Info When you request a manual receiving the form will appear blank as shown above Now you are ready to begin entering the items that you want to receive For each item you want to add to the transaction e Select the item e Confirm a quantity The cursor may jump to the weight column if this is a scalable or weight tracking item
155. ame in square brackets Report name PrinterName Epson 556677 where Epson 556677 is an example used to show what needs to be entered to define a specific printer This is the name of the printer under the windows printer settings Example Rpt_LabelTypeA HP Laserjet 1000 Position 497 203 280 309 Note The name of the printer can be complete Ex HP LaserJet 1200 Series PCL or only the beginning of the name as long as there are enough characters to differenciate it from the other printers ex HP LaserJet The case does not matter Report Properties Report Properties Panel When you select the Property option from the report s right click menu the properties panel opens WARNING Some of the options available in the report properties allow the user to change the content or look of the report and should only be used by programmers 2001 2008 Logivision Report System 191 Tampering with the default report properties or editing the SQL code within may damage them causing system errors when launched Consult your Logivision dealer if you have special reporting needs NOTE Report files are stored in the LBOSS OFFICE RPT folder There are three 3 basic file types FRP LRP and SQL NOTE THAT these files should ONLY BE EDITED AND SAVED using the FORM MANAGER report editor DO NOT EDIT COPY RENAME SAVE or otherwise manipulate the report files manually from other installations File nam
156. an invoice number if known PO is the purchase order number you are assigned to this transaction Inventory store number is used to determine which store you are receiving for Cost target allows you to choose the cost you are receiving at Remark is a compulsory information field stored with the transaction The Load all items can be selected if you want L BOSS to select all items that belong to the vendor saving time entering all the item numbers manually You will be able to modify the quantity for each item before posting the transaction 2001 2008 Logivision 224 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 When the header data is complete press Ok to start entering products into the receiving transaction Now the system will display the screen used to add item information to transaction It is divided into sections as shown in the following screen capture When you select a manual receive the item grid will be blank i Receiving Files Edit View Vendor name Store Inventory date Vendor 1 Vendor 1 003 01 4 20 2005 Inv isis PO F8 Review PAL Remark Rev 101 1911 pus vendor coveloesoreton eases ums Jarane frage store _ 00000000000001 899712 OREO COOKIES 00000000000004 Nachos 8 o2 bag 00000000000006 6 COKE CLASSIC 12 02 CAN 00000000000007 7 DIET COKE 12 OZ CAN Camel Carton Case cost 8700 Unit cost 3700 Qty cs d PLU 100000000001234 Minimum 20 ROAN i Onorder 8B PLU D
157. an item double click the Target field of the POS table and select the new target from the drop down list Targets are only available if they have been programmed as an Item target in the Maintenance application s Register menu Terminals option Follow Sub dept This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR Taxable 1 Select this flag if tax rate 1 should be applied when this item is used Taxable 2 Select this flag if tax rate 2 should be applied when this item is used Taxable 3 Select this flag if tax rate 3 should be applied when this item is used Taxable 4 Select this flag if tax rate 4 should be applied when this item is used NOTE The tax rate must be programmed at the TEC ECR to apply tax Food Stamp Select the food stamp flag if this item can be paid for with Food stamps and you are in a jurisdiction that accepts food stamps WIC1 2 3 These flags are not supported by the TEC ECR 2001 2008 Logivision 304 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Prohibit discount This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR Prohibit Quantity This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR Quantity Required Select this flag if a quantity entry is required before the item can be sold This is often the case for items sold for example at 3 1 00 and when the cashiers are unsure whether scanning one item will ring 3 items for 1 00 or 1 item at 34 cents Price Required This item status creates an open priced item It me
158. and when you are prompted enter a different target group for the touch screen set up files P02 You will need to create the registers and the target group once the system is installed This is explained in the installation help After you have designated the correct target for the screen and function load the remaining files will be imported and the program will be ready to operate 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS Main Menus 45 2 1 8 8 NOTE You should not use the Load files option unless you want to reload the initial set up files and destroy all the data entry sample files and screen modifications Keyboard 800X600 Touch 800X600 If you think you need to use these files in a live installation please back up your data first because it will be overwritten Security Security Tab Settings Security System Overview The Back Office System Software offers a security level system to restrict access to most functions database tables and configuration type information In some situations such as a single owner manager L POS L BOSS setup or if the PC that runs the back office is ina locked room you may not need to use the security system In most cases however the PC station that runs L BOSS or networked L BOSS stations is accessible to any passer by This means that your data and system configuration is open to possible damage The security system is based on access levels that are assigned to users There ar
159. and Drop the command on top of the directory e Once the command directory is highlighted release the mouse button e A prompt appears asking if the command should be moved to a directory e Accept the move by clicking the Yes button Clicking the No button will place the command beside the directory where it was dropped To move a command from a directory back to the main task list e From within the directory select the command to move e Hold down the left mouse button and Drag and Drop the command to the top of the directory The top line of the directory displays two dots under the description column and lt DIR gt under the schedule column e Once the directory is highlighted release the mouse button NOTE Directories can be moved up and down the list the same way as individual Tasks that is by selecting the directory holding down the Alt key and using the up and down arrow keys to move the directory 2001 2008 Logivision View Log 257 7 1 View Log View Log Utility L BOSS includes a utility to review the status of and messages to and from all terminals and stations set up in the system The View Log utility allows you to see the functional in and out boxes unprocessed commands or data and urgent messages Pilel Es 4 Status information wSQa xv Ws Me bo gt Inbox 0 gt Outbox 0 gt Unprocessed 0 lt gt 001 001 Cash 1 0
160. and French are valid language selections Address Fields The other fields in the operator record are for address information Special attention should be taken to the phone number if the current cashier s phone number matches the account phone number or the account contact phone or cell number the transaction will not be allowed This is to prohibit cashiers from using their own account to sell to themselves or to others with their own account discount Note When you edit the operator table the file menu includes the send to host option Send to host The Send to host option of the File menu options is only available when the Host active option is selected to return data to a headquarter system The send to host option will allow output of the changes made on the local L BOSS machine back to a host system This means that changes can be made at a store and sent back up to the host system Select this option for the tables that may be edited locally in a store Please consider as well that changes sent back up to the headquarter system will be deployed to all terminals that are part of the same target group for that file type This means that if a price is changed at store 3 and all stores share the information on that product the change will make it to the other stores in the next communication cycle To force a change to make its way back up to the head office you must press the Satellite from the menu for that record Using the deploy all ch
161. anges option will not return any information to the host system It is an item by item decision that can only be activated one item at a time with the satellite icon Note 2 You cannot delete the last operator with a programmer level from the system Security tab Address Security Back end _ User must change their password Password never expires User account is disabled 90 Days before password expires Front end E User must change their password E User account is disabled 2001 2008 Logivision 158 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 8 2 The security tab allows you to define password rules for each operator for back end operations and for front end operations Back end User must change their password Set this flag to require a password change at next logon to the back end system Password never expires Logivision recommends you do not set this flag Setting this flag will compromise the PCI DSS compliance level of your system If you set this flag you will be prompted to accept responsibility in the event of data security breaches User account is disabled This flag will be set whenever the operator tries to log on unsuccessfully more than 3 times in succession To re enable this operator immediately remove this check and deploy the record with the satellite Days before password expires Logivision recommends you do not modify the 90 day default setting Changing this to a va
162. ans that the item will behave like a sub department forcing the cashier to manually enter a price for the item Visual Verify This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR Not for Sale Use this flag to restrict the sale of this item temporarily as in the case of seasonal items not available year round This allows you to leave the PLU in the Item table but not allow POS operators to inadvertently sell the item Hash Item This flag is used to exclude the sales of this product from the store s Net and Total sales This is sometimes the case for items or departments used for bottle sales lottery returns etc This feature is not supported by the TEC MA 1595 or MA 1650 Gas PLU This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR Scalable This flag defines that the product is sold by weight read from the POS scale This flag should not be selected for pre packaged and pre priced items such as items weighed and labeled for scanning at the POS Manual Weight This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR Override Allowed This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR No Repeat This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR No Refund This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR No Return This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR Bottle Return This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR Validation Req d This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR MPF This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR Sl 1 Selective Itemizer 1 To allow
163. any tab make sure the Allow multi store flag is set 2 In the System tab make sure that every store is set up with a unique store number 3 Comm tab settings Comm tab settings will vary depending on the communication method you select This is where you will define L Remote set up method Several communication types are supported We find it most convenient to use a high speed connection or VPN and assign the stores to initiate communication with the head office Making this choice means that you only need a static or fixed IP at the head office L Remote needs to be configured at both ends meaning store and head office Configuring the regional office is the same as configuring a head office The following section explains the 4 settings used most frequently You are either at the store or head office And you choose to initiate communication from store or from head office Comm set up for Head office called by the store This is a preferred method because it means you only need a fixed IP at this location since the stores establish connection to the Head office 2001 2008 Logivision 272 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Configuration Company Email System Misc Comm Cleanup Load files Security Communication method What am I C No communication Head office C Regional office C Head office calls stores C Store L Remote login Name test Password HT Port Preserve repor
164. appear Select vendor information Vendor fio Best Supplier Ltd 03 01 2008 Inv PO 1062 Generate Inventory Store number Select the file created 003 H Store 3 with the Handheld Remark Portable device file Find the file you created with the portable device By default the file will be saved to the L BOSS server in the Office Portable folder All orders use the default extension ORD and will include the session file number you used when creating the order with the portable device In the following example the file is called RF00010 Ord Portable Device Set up Portable device import file Ic LBOSS Office Portable RFOO10 0rd ed Type of file HT Order 7 OK Now you will press OK in the Select vendor information window to import the file saved with the portable terminal Confirm 2 lines processed 100 percent done 7 Do you want to delete the file RF0010_101 0rd 2001 2008 Logivision 214 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 The system will process the file display the number of rows it processed and prompt you if you are ready to delete the file It is possible that you have scanned some items with the hand held that cannot be processed by Entry The following window will appear if this situation occurs It is up to you to take the required action to correct the problem Information i There are 2 skipped items in the import File The reason could be o
165. applied when this item is used Taxable 3 Select this flag if tax rate 3 should be applied when this item is used Taxable 4 Select this flag if tax rate 4 should be applied when this item is used Food stamp Select the food stamp flag if this item can be paid for with Food stamps and you are in a jurisdiction that accepts food stamps WIC Select the WIC flag if this item can be paid for by WIC check 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 119 Prohibit discount Select this flag to stop the operator from applying a discount to this item The item will also be excluded from the running discountable total or from the account discount subtotal Override allowed Select this flag to allow price overrides on this department No refund Select this flag to prohibit refund into this department Scalable This flag defines that the department is sold by weight read from the POS scale Manual weight Select this flag to allow a manual weight entry for this department Not in gross This flag is used to exclude the sales of this department from the Net sales and Total sales of the store This is sometimes the case for departments used for bottle sales lottery returns etc No pts redemption Select this flag to prohibit payment of this item with customer points For example you may not want to allow customers to pay for tobacco products with their accumulated loyalty points Points Assign the percentage of poi
166. arch Reset F4 F5 F F7 FS Field Descriptor Operand Value Condition Previous Next F11 Delete line F12 Insert line F3 Search Locating data Finding transaction data with L Tracker is executed by filtering through the transaction files Once the proper filters have been set you should only be viewing the transactions that respond to your search requirements 2001 2008 Logivision L Tracker overview 269 When the program is opened the system positions the calendars on today s date The calendars are useful when you want to locate transactions that may span multiple dates For example locating all the transactions with STORE COUPONS in the last 7 days So the first step in locating specific data is to select a date range The calendars allow you to set a Start End date range Next you need to decide if the transactions including STORE COUPONS you want to locate were entered on a specific terminal in a specific store Use the Store and Terminal fields to limit the data search to transactions from a specific terminal Leaving the Store number blank will search all stores Leaving the Terminal number blank will search all terminals Now that we have the dates stores and terminals you need to decide if the transactions are for a specific customer or for a specific cashier You can enter a customer number or double click in the customer number field This will show a list of all customers who were found in
167. are available for selection at the bottom of the Navigation menu The navigation pattern currently in use has a check mark beside it To return to the Maintenance applications default navigation pattern all fields use the Reset navigation option in the Navigation menu Deleting a saved navigation If you have saved navigations that you no longer use or wish to remove existing navigation orders e Select the saved navigation that you want to delete e Once selected use the Delete navigation option N B To define a new navigation sequence immediately you either exit the Maintenance application and follow the procedure above or you follow these steps Select reset navigation from the navigation menu Press Ctrl Enter twice in the first field you want to navigate to Press Ctrl Enter in each other field you want to use with this navigation sequence Once you ve established all the fields following the steps above you save the cursor s editing order e Open the Navigation menu e Select the Save current navigation option A Save new navigation panel opens where you enter the tabbing sequnce name Note Although it is referred to as a tabbing order the Enter button is used to change fields within the defined navigation sequence You can access other fields with the mouse or by using the Tab button 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 177 3 10 Transfer Menu Sending Information After
168. arent child relationship would be set to active on the carton item 1111111111 with a quantity of 8 This means that when a carton of cigarettes is sold it will remove a quantity of 8 packages from stock on hand So you are still purchasing cartons of 8 packs of cigarettes and both the carton UPC and the package UPC will be reducing the same inventory NOTE 2 You can determine the behavior of the inventory tracking for items tracked by guantity and for items tracked by weight This change is made in the LBOSS configuration Advanced settings When this option is set the on hand quantity of scalable and price type weight tracking products will be based on weight The system will also default to the weight field for those products during inventory transactions in the Entry program 3 6 1 8 Sales Tab Item PLU Maintenance Sales Tab The Sales tab is available to view sales of this item for previous periods You can view sales data for any 31 day period or the last 7 weeks Right click in the grid and a pop up window will appear You can select the period end date and view a weekly graph or daily graphs for the 14 days preceding the ending date or the 31 days preceding the end date you choose G PLU cp 44 gt Ay ffm ltem number F2 Active Next foonnoooooonnos Sndo M a REG IGA SALAD DRESSING Over 50 Parent Promo Sales Quick Object POS Price Cost Inventory Sales Picture ECL A Daily sales statistics
169. aring the ECR MA 1595 Requirements Supported Configurations e Master Satellite RAM Allocation System Setting 2 PLU Inquiry Local Cashier System Setting 1 amp 2 PLU Inquiry Floating Cashier Requires Expanded RAM e Standalone RAM Allocation System Setting 2 PLU Inquiry Local Cashier MA 1595 Setup RAM Allocation Note New install of L Register with an existing MA 1595 Go to PC Configuration print out RAM Allocation for LRegister Setup RAM Allocation information will be needed when LRegister is setup Print out sample of Submode 79 Thank you Call again Your receipt 10 07 04 THU 0 PX 179 1 0 S A 1 M S 1 2 EX RAM 0 3 SYSTEM 2 4 CLERK 15 5 PLU 5000 2001 2008 Logivision 288 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 6 C T 500 7 TRAN 0 8 NEG CARD 0 001 07 00 ITM Mode Lock Set Position Enter 179 Press AT TL A receipt will print out like the sample above this example is for a Master Satellite System NOTE CVS is not supported at this time Refer to the RAM Allocation section of the MA 1595 programming manual for Standalone and Master Backup Master Satellite System The following Submodes have to be set correctly in order for the TEC MA 1595 to communicate with the PC 1 Terminal ID Setting Standalone Master Backup Master and all Satellites Mode Lock Set Position 77 for 1 ST A Enter Terminal ID Number and depress 1 Master Standa
170. at is to be accepted from any customer assigned this Risk level Check change limit is the maximum change amount after a check tender that should be returned to any customer assigned to this Risk level Check week limit is the maximum number of checks and the maximum amount that can be accepted per week for any customer assigned to this risk level Accept check is used to define the check acceptance level for any customer assigned to this risk level The options are 1 allow check payment 2 request manager authorization and 3 refuse check payment Interest Rate L BOSS can be programmed to apply interest charges on overdue amounts The interest fees are based on unpaid store charges that are over 30 days For example if a customer purchases goods on account in the month of May and the amount charged during May is left unpaid no interest fees are calculated during June When the Generate Interest event runs on the 1st of July the system uses the interest rate from the Risk Level table to calculate the interest on unpaid charges from before June Enter the YEARLY interest rate without the percent sign For example a 2 monthly rate is entered as 24 NOTE The interest calculation is a scheduled task called Generate Interest found in the L BOSS Events Tasks menu but can also be triggered manually 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 151 Note When you edit the client risk table th
171. ategory the Family field is not compulsory but allows you to link similar products for comparison reporting For example if all soft drinks are in one sub department you may want a report comparing sales of different colas or perhaps the most popular size The Family field is user defined enter the numeric Family code up to 6 digits Commodity This field is used to track the product commodity number This is required for some loyalty programs or with Fleet card systems Report Code This field is numeric up to 6 digits The Report code is another non compulsory user defined field that allows you to build specific report groups for certain PLUs Item Detail box contains item specific information about e Brand This is the item manufacturer s brand name User defined not compulsory up to 15 characters e Unit of Measure If this item is scalable enter the measure used to calculate sale by weight User defined not compulsory up to 4 characters e Size Description For scalable items the actual weight in terms of the Unit of Measure For other items the packaging size User defined not compulsory up to 9 characters The Comment field allows you to further describe the item particulars This is not compulsory and user defined Enter up to 40 characters The object tab also provides access to the Alias table links The alias links are used as alternate search codes for the PLU on the L POS system Add or delete an alias link by
172. ately NOTE LBoss controls the Polling cycle internally In a normal situation data is retrived immediately after each sales transaction is complete LBoss also cycles through the terminal list every 2 minutes to ensure the on line status of each terminal When LBoss detects that a terminal is not on line it records an error internally From that point L BOSS will only attempt to poll that terminal every 15 minutes If no communication is available on the next polling attempt an error will be reported to advise store personnel that the terminal is off line Execute Command File Forcing Commands Command files contain instructions for L BOSS and SQL Standard Query Language 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS Main Menus 23 commands that when executed bring information into the system database tables Most internal commands required for normal operation are executed automatically based on the L BOSS scheduler There are some situations that may require you to execute these commands manually For example internal commands that either failed or could not be executed automatically at the scheduled time such as in the case of a network down These commands should be launched from the Events Tasks the scheduler utility For help on forcing scheduled tasks manually please see the Events Tasks help pages Other Tasks There are other internal commands that are not programmed to execute automatically and a
173. ative symbol for a negative adjustment Enter the points adjustment the same way Client Level Table Customer Level Table Programming Customer levels are used to assign accounts to a level for pricing or discounting An unlimited number of customer levels can be created 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 149 3 7 4 lolx ape adr Bye Level number fi Description Regular customer Price level i Discount This example shows a Customer Level table record Level Number Enter the level number to be programmed Description Enter a brief description of this customer shopper level Regular gold card super saver etc Price level Enter the price level that members of this customer group will receive Discount Enter the discount that members of this customer level will receive on discountable products Note When you edit the client level table the file menu includes the send to host option Send to host The Send to host option of the File menu options is only available when the Host active option is selected to return data to a headquarter system The send to host option will allow output of the changes made on the local L BOSS machine back to a host system This means that changes can be made at a store and sent back up to the host system Select this option for the tables that may be edited locally in a store Please consider as well that changes sent back up to th
174. back up to the host system Select this option for the tables that may be edited locally in a store Please consider as well that changes sent back up to the headquarter system will be deployed to all terminals that are part of the same target group for that file type This means that if a price is changed at store 3 and all stores share the information on that product the change will make it to the other stores in the next communication cycle To force a change to make its way back up to the head office you must press the Satellite from the menu for that record Using the deploy all changes option will not return any information to the host system It is an item by item decision that can only be activated one item at a time with the satellite icon Related settings Several settings must be made to use automatic bottle deposits e LBoss gt Maintenance gt Register gt Function 510 must be linked to Totalizer 2 e PosSetup gt System gt Totalizers gt Bottle sale task must be assigned to Totalizer 39 bottle sales e PosSetup gt System gt Advanced flags Function to use for automatic bottle deposits must be set to function 510 Tare Table Tare Table Programming Some products sold by weight scalable are sold in empty containers or other wrapping that may add to the weight of the product when scaled This does not include pre packed products that have a label with the weight and price in the code The Tare table allows you to create a record for each w
175. can be on long term sale for 3 months from Jan 1 to Mar 31 and also on weekly special from Feb 1 to Feb 8th If the item price for the weekly special is lower than the 3 month long term promo price L BOSS will automatically send the lower price to the sale price column and to the registers at the correct date and time When the lowest price is activated the next price will be automatically updated by the next sale or promo batch So in the case of a weekly special that is run during a 3 month long term low price L BOSS will implement the Long term price at the correct date then implement the weekly ad then revert back to the long term special after the weekly deal Finally when the long 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 133 term price ends the regular price will be re activated Note that the Best price calculation only works for the base price of the item The system cannot resolve a situation where the price of an item is 1 00 each with package deal 3 2 75 in batch 1 and 1 00 each but 3 2 50 in batch 2 with competing dates The best price method will resolve the difference between a split price if it is entered into the base price field For example Item 1 is 3 2 50 8333 each in batch 1 and 1 50 each in batch 2 Batch 1 will win the best price calculation in the period with competing dates Maintaining Batches You can keep batches for future use even after the price or promotion ac
176. cate the vendor during this split This split will create several session files for you when you finish the entries L BOSS normally creates a file named RF0014 Ord when you save session file 14 on the wireless hand held connected to the HTML Wireless Monitor application If multiple vendors are found in the session file 14 L BOSS will name the files by appending _ VENDOR to the file So in the case of session 14 the files created for vendor 101 and vendor 103 would be RF0014_101 Ord and RF0014_103 Ord 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 215 5 1 2 1 4 Complete the order When the header data is complete you must press Ok to start entering products into the Purchase order Now the system will display the screen used to add item information to the purchase order It is divided into sections as shown in the following screen capture i Orders Files Edit view Vendor name Store Inventory date Vendor 1 Vendor 1 003 901 4 20 2005 Inv PO 1019 FB Review PAL Remark PB 1019 420 1 pus vendor coaeloescreton eases ums farane frege foer _ 00000000000001 899712 OREO COOKIES 24 36 00 0 003 00000000000004 Nachos 8 o2 bag 3 1 50 0 003 00000000000006 6 COKE CLASSIC 12 02 CAN 192 86 40 0 003 00000000000007 7 DIET COKE 12 OZ CAN 48 21 60 0 003 Camel Carton 3 3 111 00 0 oo e Case cost 3700 Unit cost 33700 Qty cs 4 PLU 100000000001234 Minimum 20 CROQ i Onorder amp 5 Description
177. ccessed in the Windows Start menu If you wish to have a printed copy of the L BOSS User Manual please see the Printing help as a Manual section above in this manual Version numbers The About option opens a panel displaying the installed L BOSS version number useful for obtaining technical support information Since L BOSS contains a number of separate utilities with version numbers the about also provides a quick list of all application version numbers With the About panel open on screen click the L BOSS icon This opens a list of all the version numbers for the L BOSS programs This also creates a text file that can be printed and faxed or emailed as an attachment to help the technical support process You can customize the help about page by adding the Logo txt file to the LBoss folder that contains text to be displayed in the help about window Create an ascii file with Notepad containing the text you want to display If the file Lboss Logo jpg or LBoss Logo Png exist the Help about window will display the image as well 2001 2008 Logivision 54 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Maintenance Application L BOSS Maintenance Application Overview The Maintenance application is used to control all data that is used on front end L POS terminals The Maintenance menus provide access to all data tables required for store operations The data tables are divided into categories such as item information PLU
178. ce The new item will be entered at it s regualr price The bottom of the kit tab displays the total price and cost of all components The kit profit and profit percentage are displayed for your convenience 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 103 3 6 2 3 6 2 1 Note The kit tracking feature is not available with all POS systems It is functional with L POS front end terminals Please inquire with your dealer to verify that kits are available with your front end terminals Working With Items Working with Items Overview In this help section you will find information about Filtering and Global Modifications L BOSS utility that allows you to work with groups of items by setting a filter to extract the items from the database This means that changes can be applied to items with similar pricing or other common programming attributes Add Copy Delete Items The correct procedure to follow to create new items either by manually entering all the information or copying information from an existing item except the item code and how to remove items from the database Deploying Modified Items Once you ve made changes to items or other information that affects the system the modifications or additions must be deployed or activated in all existing stations Rental Items L POS and L BOSS can deal with items that are for rent including multiples of the original code Rental items can be
179. cel This example shows the Form Manager s page setup Records Some reports contain repeating lines of the same information based on a changing field for example item or PLU sales Each line is a report record that includes the same information for each line The Records menu allows you to define a repeating report line s contents Create the item record Select this option to create a repeating line box area to define the individual item fields that will appear in each line Once selected you must point and click somewhere within the template After the record box is created you can move it or re size it to suit the report needs Create a new tender record Tender records are used to define the template area that will display tender amounts by type Similar to the item record the tender record will repeat for every tender type with an amount in the report Use SQL Mask This option controls which fields appear in the Field selection drop down list tool Selecting this option opens a file browser allowing you to select the sql command file to use The Select field list will contain only the SIL fields found within that command file Configuration Set default font Opens the font option panel allowing you to establish the default font for the form or template Label objects and field results will be displayed with the default font unless you specifically change the object s font using the right click menu font optio
180. ch mode editor can retrieve the items programmed with the hand held device The portable device interface comes with it s own help file pt600En pdf which includes how to retrieve and complete the batch creation process NOTE L BOSS is compatible with the rs232 style Unitech PDT600 and Unitech PDT630 L BOSS is compatible with wireless devices running PocketPC 2002 or greater Windows CE that have the ability to connect using Internet Explorer to the L BOSS terminal running the L HTML server application Most devices with 802 11x communication that run Internet Explorer will be compatible Note When you edit the batch table the file menu includes the send to host option 2001 2008 Logivision 134 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 6 6 1 Send to host The Send to host option of the File menu options is only available when the Host active option is selected to return data to a headquarter system The send to host option will allow output of the changes made on the local L BOSS machine back to a host system This means that changes can be made at a store and sent back up to the host system Select this option for the tables that may be edited locally in a store Please consider as well that changes sent back up to the headquarter system will be deployed to all terminals that are part of the same target group for that file type This means that if a price is changed at store 3 and all stores share the information
181. changes option will not return any information to the host system It is an item by item decision that can only be activated one item at a time with the satellite icon Note 2 Gift cards The gift certificates can be used a Gift cards by making a few changes to the settings Gift cards work similar to an account with a credit balance Here are the steps required to set up the system to use gift cards rather than gift certificates 1 In PosSetup gt System gt General gt Advanced you need to set the Gift card server IP addess 2 Create a button that uses function 117 named Gift card tender Set Gift number to True Set Credit note to True 3 Create a button that uses function 123 named Gift card redeem Set Pre programmed true Set request amount true if you want to be able to override the amount the card was programmed for originally Note 3 Scanning gift cards 1 Create a button and call it Sell Gift Cert add function load form in there and map it on the keyboard 2 Inthe properties of that function click on Advanced and type in VARO1 1 This button will need to be pressed before scanning to sell the gift cert 3 Inthe properties of the CLEAR button click on Advanced and type in VAR01 0 this is going to remove the variable from memory when clear is pressed 4 Create another button this one called Gift Cert and add 2 functions in there Gift Certificate 123 and Gift Certificate 117 no need to map that one
182. chase order The Generate button will assign the next available order number Inventory store number is used to determine which store you are ordering for Cost target allows you to choose the cost you are ordering at Remark is a compulsory field to store with the transaction The BaseOnSale can be selected if you want to place the order as a factor of sales fora previous period Based On Sales Use this flag when you want to base the order on sales for a previous period The system will calculate the sales for the period you select then multiply by the factor you input After taking into account the stock on hand and on order the system will populate the order grid with the correct order amounts for each item sold in the period you selected 2001 2008 Logivision 212 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Order based on sale Record Type Daily i Factor 1 5 Sale Period From To Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 1 2 3 4 85 1 7 8 9 10 11 12 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 14 15 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 12 13 14 4P 21 22 23 24 25 26 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 a 29 30 31 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Z Today 03 01 2008 Z Today 03 01 2008 Using Average based on Monthly Weekly C Total Sales Average Sales C Daily OK Cancel If you select the BaseOnSales flag a form will appear where you decide how to use the sales data accumulated on the system Record type Daily or Weekly Keep in min
183. chased for 10 00 a case If you buy 10 cases the extended cost would show 100 00 You can change that cost in the Amount field by entering 80 00 When you modify the cost in the Amount field it will be saved with the order It will not be saved permanently The weight column is used to order items that are sold or tracked by weight Products like tomatoes fish and ground beef can all be ordered by weight with L BOSS There is a flag setting that can be used to simplify the inventory transactions with weight items This flag is found in the configuration menu of L BOSS under the company tab Advanced settings Set the flag as required If used each time you enter a weight type item the cursor will jump to the Weight field rather than the case field in the Entry transaction modules You can still use the weight even though you did not select the advanced flag When you have entered the item quantity and cost and press Enter the cursor will move to the F2 Add button Press Enter again and the row of date you just input will move to the grid above to display the results Now you repeat the process for each item Speeding up the order process In most situations once you select the item and you enter the quantity you are ready to select the next item because the cost is correct on file and there is no deal available fro this order In that case you can save time by pressing the F2 Add button immediately And you do not need to actually clic
184. ciscaccsccscscacciscasdecstabascesasacancsscastacaeasdiceccasaiessasasacaacactieddiaccescaeteaiacteasnteaabins 117 Other Item Related Tables iiiiscseiccsscscscscncesasteccssncscscscncesssseecsnsceenccetersestercsutcestunencvsestetsentendnctcesssascetesnsctsscoctsesiees 120 Bottle Link Table iyi ciscui cere niceties Una ciation eure arin REER E N aE 120 Tare Table Category Table Price Level Table Mix amp Match Tabl occian anana A aaee aration 125 Vendor Tables s c2252 226cenceeceecedcschacarennsdcelacaescesenctscacacdsaeavanscqensscssannecacsequsasahacacanesdcesscasseesenduacalaechinasenctcebadess 126 Scale Table senrida aieeaa iirin ieoa aiea han aa ike Eiaa Ea aaia eiiean ideea niei Pirai initia 128 Batches scvccsessciscscdssecccsencasdcuceabasssandsccecsasiscabasdsdscvenatscbtsnasdsdodsabesaanacersabasapasabendusessseabdssbancsdsensasiuatanisdsdvdsatsessere 130 AddBatehutility sic cs ccs ced decease Sages anciisds canes E E san cens sa EES Mteaaegsiar gene meee seat eee 134 Selecting an iMAGE eeeecsescceseeeeececseeseseecseeseaeecaeseseeeeaeeeaeessaeesaaeceaeeesaessaeeeseeseaeesaeseaeeseaeseaeessaeeeneeesaes 135 late olino a Batch tO Ihe GdSi si E r a E 136 Running the Addbatch program sssssssssssssersssssnnrensnraannsnenrancenennsneadennansnaadnartidonanninnannaannarnaaaaanesrnanaaanna 137 Statistics 7 Account Related Maintenance cccccccssssseeeeeececeeesesneneeeeaeeeeesasnseeeaeoeeeesaeeeeseeneeananeneeense
185. ck to a host system This means that changes can be made at a store and sent back up to the host system Select this option for the tables that may be edited locally in a store Please consider as well that changes sent back up to the headquarter system will be deployed to all terminals that are part of the same target group for that file type This means that if a price is changed at store 3 and all stores share the information on that product the change will make it to the other stores in the next communication cycle To force a change to make its way back up to the head office you must press the Satellite from the menu for that record Using the deploy all changes option will not return any information to the host system It is an item by item decision that can only be activated one item at a time with the satellite icon Product reward program PRP The Product reward program PRP feature is used to track cumulative purchases by a customer When a defined accumulation point is reached the L POS will automatically sell a discounted or free item If the conditions listed in notes 1 6 are met a short report will be 2001 2008 Logivision 154 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 issued by the POS to show the dates and transaction number of original purchase This may be required in cases where the free items are reimbursed by a supplier M Product Reward Program apx Cdr Bv Promo ID v7 Description Science diet 20KG
186. cludes the base price field and the package price field from the price table If you access the Price tab you see that many of the price table fields are not visible on the Quick tab It is possible that your Quick tab may not resemble the image shown below In an effort to improve your productivity your dealer may have selected other fields on your Quick tab PLU i ol x ath gt Av im ltem number F2 Active Next 233 E U JOREO COOKIES REG Over 50 Promo Quick Obiect POS Price Cost Inventory Sales Picture ECL Sub Dept 10 Sugg Retail Sale price GROCERY 3239 1 _ OREO COOKIES E Packs i Hn She i Saem Follow sub dept GST _ Prohibit discount From PST _ Scalable To TS Vendor 202 Kraft Foods 202202 SKU Inventory tracking Case Cost X Inv XF Ord 24 31 00 Minimum QDC On hand 1 29 Unit cost 36 1 54 This example shows the Item table s Quick tab The Quick page fields are explained in the help section for the individual tab they originate on 2001 2008 Logivision 74 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 6 1 2 Editing the Quick Tab Editing the Quick Tab The quick tab fields can be edited to optimize operations in a given store Business that only use one tax rate may want to remove the second tax rate that appears on the quick page in PLU programming Other businesses may require additional tax rates or other
187. controlled by weight rather than by unit Such as walnuts sold in bulk When receiving is done you would probably prefer receiving walnuts and other weight controlled items by weight rather than by quantity Open the L BOSS configuration and access the Advanced flags on the Company tab Set the option Use weight field instead of the quantity field for weight items to true Inventory item maintenance This section explains what you need to to with a product before being able to use the Entry program to order receive make adjustments and so on 2001 2008 Logivision 200 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 5 1 1 1 5 1 1 2 Assign vendor and cost to each product Create vendor file Creating the vendor file Vendors wath r Bv Vendor Account 101 My account H Vendor name Best Supplier Ltd Contact name Peter Bohonis Address 1 21 0 Laurier Address 2 Suite 201 City Beloeil State Zip code fac 3G 4G7 Phone 450 464 21 31 Fax 450 464 5673 Assign a vendor and the cost for each item The first step to complete is to create the vendors from whom you order and receive stock Each product you buy will be associated with one or many vendors Open the L BOSS gt Maintenance gt PLU gt Vendor menu to add modify or delete a vendor Here is the vendor creation form Now you are ready to modify the product file You will need to begin by assigning a vendor to
188. criptor for Tax 1 Exempt A window will open where you can record the tax 3 exempt number You may enter a Tax 4 Exempt by clicking on the descriptor for Tax 2 Exempt A window will open where you can record the tax 4 exempt number Group is used by the report system to filter the customer file and only produce a report for the category selected It is not a compulsory field Balance is the current online charge balance for this customer It can be adjusted manually by double clicking the field or by pressing the F4 key and entering the appropriate adjustment to the account balance You can increase or decrease the customer balance Points is the customer points amount that have accumulated It can be adjusted manually by double clicking the field or by pressing the F4 key and entering the appropriate adjustment to the points balance You can increase or decrease the customer points balance Risk Level Select the proper risk level assigned to this account The risk level controls both store charge and check cashing privileges The risk levels are created in the Client risk table programming Client level Select the proper customer level used by this account The customer level may offer a discount or a price level other than the default price This is set up in the Client level programming under the Account menu NOTE The Risk and Customer level tables should be programmed before creating accounts in the system making it easy to select b
189. ct a single date or range of dates You need to make sure that the date ranges you choose have not been cleaned up from the detailed report database If you try to export data for a previously exported date the system will warn you but will not stop you from proceeding It is up to you to remove records from the accounting system if you have posted data more than once Open the GL Export program from the L BOSS gt Modules menu 1 Select the store or target group you want to export for 2 Select the start and end date 3 Press the Preview button A grid will appear that shows the amounts computed for each totalizer assigned to a GL account The grid can be edited if changes are required before posting the numbers to your accounting system Click in the field that you need to modify If you need to add data to the file press the Add Row button and enter the totalizer and amount to post If you have already exported data for the date selected you will be prompted to overwrite the existing data When you select a date that was previously exported the GL Export program reloads the original data that was computed by L BOSS It will not save any and edits additions or suppressions you made in the previous GL export session Those changes were saved only in the file that was created with the export button 2001 2008 Logivision 318 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 GL Export Avantage 2 0 3 1 BAR File Comments 1 Sele
190. ct appears on the first page only Zero Suppress If this object should not appear in the report if it has a value of zero 0 00 Formula Field and Prompt objects only Opens the formula entry box to use a calculation for the field s value NOTE f a field is not wide enough for the text that appears in it the text will be cut off at the field limit However if the field s height will accept a second line depends on font size the Form Manager will extend the text to the second line known as text wrapping Tools Top Bar Tools and Options NOTE Because the Form Manager edits both L POS Form templates and L BOSS report templates some options or tools may only apply to forms and some only to reports In this help if an option or tool does not specify which type of template the option or tool is used for itis available for both template types The Form Manager s top bar show s the template s title assigned when it was created To change an existing title use the File menu s Save As option This will open a panel asking for a new description for the template file After entering the new description select the same file name overwriting the previous version Ln Forms only LINE For L POS form templates if you have defined columns select this option to have column lines appear on the printed output Detail Count Forms only Determines how many details appear on the L POS printed output Add Label This button creates
191. ct store or Lboss export 03 05 2008 03 05 2008 Store target elo gt Description Credit Drwr Cash Target Drwr Check C z Tas1 Tax2 Garage 3000 Inc CIGARETTE and end date SOFT DRINKS Bottle sales 05 03 2008 To 05 03 2008 3 Press preview 4 Press Export to save the file T of OO a aaa Preview Export Add Row Print Help Close 4 When you are ready to create the export data press the Export button You cannot Export a file that does not balance total debit against total credit So if the totals are red you need to find the amount that does not allow you to balance and make the correction This is normally due to errors in configuration of the GL account inside L BOSS totalizers 5 You can print the data in the export table to your Defaul system printer as defined in Windows by pressing the Print button Please consult your user guide or accountant to learn about importing the data into your accounting system 2001 2008 Logivision Form Manager 319 14 Form Manager Form Manager Module Overview NOTE Although the Form Manager is included in your L BOSS installation and is fully functional it must be registered before you can save L BOSS report L POS form or item and shelf label templates The Form Manager is an L BOSS module used to design the visual and content aspects of L BOSS reports including item and shelf labels and L POS form layout
192. ction If a user does not have that security level the report does not appear in the report list and therefore is not selectable SQL File is the file that contains the L BOSS proprietary commands and the SQL used to extract the information from the database for this report The Ed button to the right of the name opens the report SQL editor described below The button allows you to select the report sql file from a browser Template File frp is the Form Manager file for the report The template file contains the visual layout and presentation aspects of the report The template file can only be edited using the Form Manager If you wish to edit template files to create your own report layouts contact your Logivision dealer to register the Form Manger module for your installation Category is used to place the report in a folder with other associated reports Click the button to use the Report selection tool to select the correct Category for the report The Report prompts pull down option can be used to set the titles and values in the prompt windows associated with this report Setting the Preview to on check marked forces the print preview mode If this is not selected the report selection process skips the print preview mode The Hidden option here is the same as the Hide option when a report is selected and right clicked This prevents the report from appearing in the list but does not remove it Use Group forces th
193. ction or hold down the Ctrl key and press A If there is more than one vendor for an item and they all have cost break information use the black left and right black arrow buttons at the top of the Regular Cost section to move to the next or previous vendor The Cost break information changes to reflect that vendor s cost breaks Then use the black left and right black arrow buttons at the top of the Cost break section to move to the next or previous cost break for the selected vendor e To remove a cost break from an item select the appropriate vendor from the Regular cost section then select the cost break information to remove and press the scissor button at the top of the Cost break section Accept the prompt that appears asking if the cost break information should be removed from this vendor for this item Quantity Break The quantity break field is used to enter the case quantities or units if purchased that way that must be purchased from this vendor to obtain the cost break Remember that you can have different levels of Cost breaks from each vendor For example if you purchase between 10 and 20 cases the vendor offers a certain cost but between 20 and 30 cases there is a better cost Each cost break level is programmed to reflect the purchasing information From To Both the from and to fields must contain valid dates for the cost break offer Double click the date fields to open a calendar utility making date selection easy
194. ctor 76 Return time 109 Risk Level 143 Risk level Table Programming 149 ROQ Reorder quantity 91 Rulers 322 Ge S R P 8i Sale Price 81 sample files 43 Scalable 76 Scalable Item Table Programming 128 Scheduled events 50 Scheduler 252 Searching Through Data Lists 58 Secure Information 9 security level 15 156 Security Tab Settings 45 Selecting a different navigation 175 Selecting Reports 180 Sending Changes to Targets 108 Sending Information After Editing 177 Sending Information From One Database Table 23 server 30 main directory 30 office directory 30 Serving Size 128 set ALL item prices from their costs 68 Set default font 323 Setting the Language 16 Setting up terminals and target groups 167 Shelf Life 128 Short Over 249 Show position ruler 323 Show tips 49 Signin 15 Size Description 75 Special Menu 52 specialized utilities 52 SQL Command 61 Start All 21 Statistics 137 Stock control 196 stop 18 19 Stop All 21 Store Coupon 76 Store number 91 sub department link 73 Sub department overview 113 Sub Department Settings 114 Sub Dept 73 System date 30 System Tab 30 System Tab Settings 30 T Tabbing order item table editing 175 Tare Link 76 Tare Table Programming 122 Target groups 167 Task Editor 253 Task Manager 252 2001 2008 Logivision Index 341 Taxable 76 Template Editor 320 Template Objects 320 Terminals 167 Terminal groups at Headquarters 167 Terminal list 167
195. cts Any valid choice you can make will appear in the pull down menu For example if you have installed dial up networking and defined a connection the dial up networking definition will appear as a choice for the L BOSS host connection type If you plan on using modem to modem communications you will need to install and configure the calling side for dial up networking and the other side for dial up server Please refer to your operating system instructions for further help on these set up issues Name If you are using a connection that requires a user name enter it Password If you are using a connection that requires a password enter it IP or Domain name is the identification path to the remote L BOSS file system This would be entered as the head office IP address if you are connecting to a fixed TCPIP address Local upstream folder Files for the head office will be written to this folder before communication occurs L Remote login 2001 2008 Logivision 40 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Name and Password are used to secure sign on rights to the head office L Remote They must match at the L BOSS on each end store and HQ Encryption Enter an encryption phrase to ensure secure data communications This must match in all stores and at head office 2 1 8 5 2 Stores call head office Head office set up Configuration Company Email System Misc Comm Cleanup Load files Security Communication
196. d PRICE Items in the Object table have links to the Price table to keep track of their price It is possible to have prices in the Price table that do not have a link to any item in the Object table The Price table is programmed in the Maintenance application s PLU menu Item option Price tab help page reference Price Tab under Item Tables topic The number here indicates how many items exist in target Price table that do not have linked records in the Object table You can press the Delete button to the right to remove these items from the Price table NOTE f you double click the number field a list of the non referenced Price records appears Non referenced Cost Items in the Object table have links to the Cost table to keep track of their cost It is possible to have costs in the cost table that do not have a link to any item in the Object table The Cost table is programmed in the Maintenance application s PLU menu Item option Cost tab help page reference Cost Tab under Item Tables topic The number here indicates how many items exist in target Cost table that do not have linked records in the Object table You can press the Delete button to the right to remove these items from the Price table NOTE f you double click the number field a list of the non referenced Price records appears Non referenced SCT Items in the Object table have links to the SCT table to keep track of their inventory status It is possible t
197. d called General Ledger for that Tax totalizer in L BOSS Since this is a Credit account enter a C in the Debit credit field You will need to find each of the totalizers in L BOSS that can affect your accounting system and enter the correct general ledger account number and balancing sign debit or credit Totalizers that have a GL account number but no Debit or credit sign are processed as debits If you want to distribute revenues to different accounts you need to assign those revenue account numbers in L BOSS It is done through the sub department programming screen Open the subdepartment file programming menu 2001 2008 Logivision 314 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 13 3 M Sub Department cup q gt 2v Sub Department GROCERY st ines 10 POS Description Department GROCERY et EPICERIE WM Tarl E Ta POS target PAL Tax 3 HST TVH Food stamp j Wic Enter GL account Prohibit discount and assign D or Override allowed C Most ae sub departments Scalable Manual weight i should be set up Not in gross as credit No pts redemption accounts MPF4 E MPF6 Point Max Refund General Ledger D or C Debit Credit Max Void You need to enter a GL account and the debit or credit value for the sub department Most sub departments will be entered as C for credit You may enter the same GL account on as many subdepartments as you want If you want to post one single sales tot
198. d from the running discountable total or from the account discount subtotal No refund Select this flag to prohibit refund of this product code The point of sale will prevent the cashier from entering the item s code and pressing the refund function No return Select this flag to prohibit return or exchange of this product code The point of sale will prevent the cashier from entering the item s code and pressing the return function Scalable This flag defines that the product is sold by weight read from the POS scale This flag should not to be selected for prepackaged and pre priced items or those weighed and labeled for scanning at the POS Manual weight Select this flag to allow a manual weight entry for this product Not in gross This flag is used to exclude the sales of this sub department from the Net sales and Total sales of the store This is sometimes the case for sub departments used for bottle sales lottery returns etc No pts redemption Select this flag to prohibit payment of this item with customer points For example you may not want to allow customers to pay for tobacco products with their accumulated loyalty points MPF4 Multi purpose flag 4 2001 2008 Logivision 116 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 MPF6 Multi purpose flag 6 Points Assign the percentage of points to issue based on the item price related to items in this sub department For items that have individual points assigned
199. d other files can be made at a store and sent back up to the host system Select this option for the tables that may be edited locally in a store Please consider as well that changes sent back up to the headquarter system will be deployed to all terminals that are part of the same target group for that file type This means that if a price is changed at store 3 and all stores share the information on that product the change will make it to the other stores in the next communication cycle To force a change to make its way back up to the head office you must press the Satellite from the menu for that record Using the deploy all changes option will not return any information to the host system It is an item by item decision that can only be activated one item at a time with the satellite icon The tool is used to approve all changes and close the tables you are working with The Mm tool only appears on the PLU item screen It allows you to set a filter on the PLU file in order to view and modify only the filtered items Pressing the Pm icon toggles it to M view mode and displays the tools used for setting filters and performing global modifications on the PLU file These icons appear to the right of the o Fcov a DE and are explained in the Filters section of this help file Displaying Data Lists Viewing Data Table Contents L BOSS uses tables to store data In some cases the information stored in a table has been indexed so that a ra
200. d select the Image option A file browser opens the default L BOSS image folder If required navigate to the image s source folder and select the image object Once the image object is contained in the rectangle frame it takes on the frame s dimensions You can re size the frame to display the image properly Cursor X Y Position The X and Y boxes show the current cursor position if you have the Configuration menu s Show position ruler option set to on Object Dimensions W is the selected object s width H is the selected object s height The object s measurements are in inches unless the Configuration menu s metric option is set to on changing the rulers then it is measured in centimeters NOTE f you change the ruler with an object selected the measurement values will not change until you unselect and re select the object Grid Size The Form editor uses an invisible grid to place objects in the template When placing objects in the template they will snap to the invisible grid lines Grid lines help you align objects in the template The grid spacing can be adjusted using the grid size setting Language You can temporarily change the language setting for the report to allow for differences in label or field text that must be resolved to ensure that the report prints correctly in either language The language setting is not saved with the template The default language for a report is defined in its properties Rulers Th
201. d that daily item sales history is deleted from the system to save database space The default cleanup routine is every 90 days So if you want to use data from more than 3 months ago you may need to select the weekly sales totals to compute order quantity Factor Enter the multiplication factor to use For example if the system looks at the sales data and sees item 1 was sold 24 times during the selection period it will order 24 by default facto 1 If you foresee a big sale on item 1 you could set the factor to 2 5 and order 24 2 5 60 of that product Sale period Enter the date range to use for the order Keep in mind that daily records may have been purged if you go back too far Consider using the weekly totals they are not purged automatically from the system Let s say you are June 15th 2008 You want to order stock for the upcoming July 4th weekend You could return to the weekly records for the period containing the July 4th weekend in 2007 and base your order on sales for that peiod If business is way up this year use the factor and multiply by 1 5 or 2 to increase your order quantities 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 213 5 1 2 1 3 Portable device It s also possible to build an order using a hand held portable device When you complete a session file it can be imported using the Portable device button on the Purchase order menu of the Entry program Press Portable device the following screen will
202. d with the list of vendors you can double click to select from the list of vendors that exist in the system For more on how to program vendors in the system see the Vendor Table programming section below in this manual Item Code Most vendors use their own codes for items different from the UPC or PLU code If you have assigned a vendor s item code for the item it can be used to retrieve items from the PLU maintenance by pressing the F5 button and entering the vendor s item code You can also search the vendor code list by pressing Shift and F5 A vendor code selection list opens displaying a list of all vendor item codes in the system Case Cost This is the case quantity for the item followed by the case base cost If the item is purchased by unit from the vendor enter 1 as the quantity per case along with the unit cost After entering the cost for the default vendor be sure to enter the cost for any other vendor that supplies this item The Case Cost information will be available in the Entry module when ordering or receiving from the assigned vendor Remark Is used to enter a short meaningful note for the item up to 30 characters Often this is to remind users of some important fact about purchasing the item from the linked vendor or other special note about the item Default As mentioned above items with a cost MUST HAVE a default vendor There can only be 1 default vendor for each item If you set the Default flag f
203. day s total 2001 2008 Logivision Report System 4 1 Report Types Default L BOSS Reports List of Default Reports Report selection Batches Cashiers Clients Department ECL programming Entry module Financial Inventory Labels amp List WGE PLU sales Sub Department System End of day m 179 L BOSS ships with a default selection of reports Generally the default reports meet the needs of the average retail operation If you have special reporting needs that are not covered by the default reports consult your Logivision dealer to find out about customized reports NOTE Some of the report types relate to specific modules and will not produce reports unless the module is registered for your installation e Batches Reports associated with price and promo batch set up information as well as sales movement for specific batches e Cashiers For balancing cashiers and viewing cashier statistics e Clients If you use the accounts receivables or preferred customer module these reports include account statements account aging and other statistical reports Some of the 2001 2008 Logivision 180 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 4 2 reports require the preferred shopper option others require the accounts receivable option e Department sales reports summarized by department totals e ECL Programming Displa
204. de more detail than a certain level of management may require you can create a more general level to which item movement and Sub department keyboard entries are reported Because sales can be recorded into departments directly department key on the POS they have flags for taxability amount entry limits etc When you edit the department table the file menu includes the send to host option Send to host The Send to host option of the File menu options is only available when the Host active option is selected to return data to a headquarter system The send to host option will allow output of the changes made on the local L BOSS machine back to a host system This means that changes can be made at a store and sent back up to the host system Select this option for the tables that may be edited locally in a store Please consider as well that changes sent back up to the headquarter system will be deployed to all terminals that are part of the same target group for that file type This means that if a price is changed at store 3 and all stores share the information on that product the change will make it to the other stores in the next communication cycle To force a change to make its way back up to the head office you must press the Satellite from the menu for that record Using the deploy all changes option will not return any information to the host system It is an item by item decision that can only be activated one item at a time with the sa
205. display specific information about a table and its associated SIL file With one table selected click the right mouse button A properties panel opens displaying the table information in the top portion of the panel If you did not select an associated backup from the View menu there is no associated backup file If you select a backup day from the view menu then right click a table the bottom portion of the properties panel displays information about the backup file You can also click the View button below the backup file properties to open the SIL file in an editor to view the actual contents 5208 x Database IC LBOSS Office D ata Name CPN_TAB Records 100 Size Test C ALBOSS Office Backup mardis Name CPN_TAB sql Dated 01 12 18 13 20 22 Size 5k View This example shows the Data table and backup file properties 2001 2008 Logivision File Maintenance Utility 331 Re indexing Tables If you are using the default Paradox database type there are situations that may arise where the data table indexes become corrupt This doesn t mean that the data itself is corrupt just the internal pointers used by the database to quickly locate records This can happen during a system crash For example at the moment that L BOSS is writing data to a table there is a power failure or the computer freezes because of low resources When the syst
206. e Biggest Only or Smallest Only are used to limit the coupon to one item when more than one of the item are sold during the same transaction For example a discount is offered on turkey sold by weight but the store only wants to discount the largest turkey purchased if there are more than one entered in the transaction Kit tab Creating kits Some stores need to create kits to sell package deals Examples of kits aquarium filter pebbles etc in a pet shop In a sport store it could be the golf clubs bag and lessons that make up a specially priced deal or kit A kit is used to sell the kit contents automatically by entering the kit PLU number To create a kit you need to start by defining the number that will be entered to sell the kit When you have chosen the PLU number add it to the database as you would for a normal PLU item setting its price subdepartment and other information that you normally define To define the item as a kit select the kit flag on the Object tab Please note that kit items only use the base price field You cannot set kit items with package price limited quantity discount or any other fields in the price tab Older versions of L BOSS allowed you to enter package price discounts and other extended price features available fopr normal items Even if that information is present in the file it will be ignored by the POS The kit items have many flags that are not used by the POS The status for tax is not read
207. e L BOSS PT600 interface Directories have the term lt DIR gt under the Scheduled column To access the commands in a directory e Select the command directory to open and double click with the left mouse button e Select the command to run in the directory and press the Execute button e To return to the main task list press the BackSpace key or e Double click the directory at the top of the list e By convention the symbol always represents the parent directory NOTE Most of the events required for normal system operation have been predefined on the list If you are unsure of how to make modifications to the event list you should consult your qualified Logivision agent Programming Events Modifying Adding Automating Tasks The Task Editor The Task Editor utility opens when you press the Task Manager s Edit button As with other tables the table edit tools appear as toolbar icons at the top of the editor If you are unfamiliar with the table editing tools refer to the Common Data Edit Toolbar help page in this manual To modify an existing event selecting the event from the Task Manager s list and press the Edit button 2001 2008 Logivision 254 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Peles apx ar v Description Deploy all changes Command I Directory EXEC SGL Deploy_POS_chg Bl JV Allow manual Repeating cycle JV Allow scheduled F Ja Hours Next
208. e The Object table is the main item table used to store the item s core information accessed in the Maintenance application s PLU menu Item option Object tab help page reference Object Tab under Item Tables topic Price records This indicates the number of total price records in the system This number may be quite a bit larger than the number of OBJ records because of price levels and multiple price targets Cost records This indicates the number of total cost records in the system This number may be quite a bit larger than the number of OBJ records because of multiple vendors per item and multiple cost targets Non referenced POS The front end terminals keep their own data tables for items so that if the network fails the store can continue to sell When you deploy data is sent from the L BOSS POS table accessed in the Maintenance application s PLU menu Item option POS tab help page reference POS tab under Item Tables topic It is possible to have items in the POS data tables that do not exist in the L BOSS Object table The number here 2001 2008 Logivision 140 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 indicates how many items exist in POS table that do not have matching records in the Object table You can press the Delete button to the right to remove these items from the POS table NOTE f you double click the number field a list of the non referenced POS records appears Non reference
209. e and execute this task When not selected L BOSS needs to know which terminal the task is for You can only enter one 1 special terminal Executed on controller Set to on by default this flag specifies that the selected task runs on the L BOSS host terminal usually 901 If the flag is removed L BOSS needs to know which terminal the selected task should run This can be convenient for certain tasks that can be run on other terminals and helps to remove some of the workload from the controller You can only enter one 1 special terminal If filename exists Set this option when the task you are scheduling should be executed only when the file named exists Repeating Cycle The repeating cycle determines the interval that the selected command should run used along with the Next event entry above Hours Enter the number of hours that determine the cycle You can also enter a decimal number to have a command execute every set number of minutes 5 hours 30 minutes Days Enter the number of days often 1 to execute this command You can also use days to execute once a week or once a year Months Enter the number of months to execute this command Calendar months are used not 30 days NOTE You can only enter one 1 type of cycle Adding Removing Tasks Use the Add button to create a new task L BOSS will automatically select an available task number Unless you have modified the default task numbers you should lea
210. e make the coupon s value the same as the product s value when the cashier scans the 6th item the POS diminishes the amount of the transaction by the value of the coupon NOTE When ITM is the selected type the Code field contains the item code PID Promo ID The Promo ID is used in connection with the Promo ID field on the POS tab The list of Promo IDs is user defined selectable from a drop down list after they have been created Once a promo ID record exists different products can be tagged with the ID For example a coupon can be created and be issued when a customer purchases any three items marked with that promo ID number like a bag of chips a soda and candy bar NOTE When PID is the selected type the Code field contains the user defined Promo ID number SUB Subdepartment This coupon rule checks for items in a specified subdepartment The coupon can be set to issue when a pre determined quantity or amount is purchased NOTE When SUB is the selected type the Code field contains the subdepartment number DPT Department Like the subdepartment coupon type this coupon rule checks for items in a specified department The coupon can be set to issue when a pre determined quantity or amount is purchased NOTE When DPT is the selected type the Code field contains the department number PTS Points If the POS is set to issue points for items purchased this coupon rule determines the amount of points required before the
211. e 10 data security 16 Data Table Backups 327 Data Table Toolbars 57 Database type 30 Date Conversion 47 Declare 249 Default L BOSS Reports 179 Definition table 63 Definitions 332 Delete All Filtered Records 68 Delete batche 130 Delete expired batches 130 Delete PRICE Target 68 Deleting a saved navigation 175 Department Table Overview 117 Department Table Settings 117 Deploy individual file 23 Deploying Modified Items 108 Desktop Icons 51 Disc 81 display table contents 58 Divisor 76 drop down menu options 7 S ECL Tab 96 ECL_TAB 76 Edit Menu Item Options 68 Editing tools 57 EJ Viewer Menu Options 261 Electronic coupon links 96 Electronic Coupons 96 Electronic Journal Professional version 261 Electronic Journal Utility 261 Entry Module Overview 196 Establishing access levels 45 Events Tasks Utility 252 exchange groups 167 exchanging information 17 Execute 22 command 22 command file 22 Execute at loading time 253 Execute one past event 253 Executed on controller 253 Exit 50 Extracting Items Using Filters 103 Fa Factor 81 File Maintenance Utility 327 2001 2008 Logivision Index 337 Filtering 103 and Global Modifications 103 Combining Filters and Global Modifications 103 Setting a Filter 103 with a Currency Field 103 with a Logical Field 103 with an Alphanumeric Field 103 First Label Selection 186 Follow Sub dept 76 Food Stamp 76 Forcing Commands 22 Form and Report Temp
212. e 40 off the price of items linked to sub department 1 and they purchase at your cost plus 5 on items linked to sub department 2 Are you confused yet We understand that the ideas here may seem complicated at first However when required the programming you do in this table will really improve your price control on the L POS terminals We have explained the major functionality of the discount table by giving a few examples There is more for each of the examples given above what would happen in you were in the middle of a big sale where much of your merchadise had already been marked down Would you still give the same discount rates to the customers Look closely at the example above There are 4 rows where 4 different discount rates can be entered The different discount rates will be triggered by L POS depending on which of the 4 conditions NO NO NO YES YES NO YES YES are met Look to the left of the dfirst discount row in the table above The MPF field shows NO and the Sale column shows NO This means that the customer will receive 10 off the price when the MPF flag is not selected and when the item is NOT on sale or not included in a currently active sale batch But he will only receive 5 discount off of the same items when they are already on sale The MPF flag is located on the POS tab in the PLU maintenance It is a rarely used flag that allows you to decide a different discount rate for items in the same sub department Note
213. e Confirm the cost 2001 2008 Logivision 230 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 e Post the record into the transaction You can select an item by entering its item number If you leave the PLU blank and press Enter the cursor will jump to the Vendor code field so you can select an item by Vendor code To display a list of items by PLU number or vendor code double click in either field and the list will appear When you double click in the PLU number field and the list opens you will have a column for PLU number and a column for the description You can click the title bar where it says Select item to re sort the list in alphabetical order by description Once you select an item from the list or type in a product number associated with this vendor the cursor will move to the Cases field Now you must enter the number of cases you have received If you leave the field blank and press Enter the cursor will jump to the Units field You may also enter the quantity in the units field to receive Whether you enter the quantity in cases or in units L BOSS will display both in the grid above When you work with scale items the system will display cases and weight Speeding up the entry process In most situations once you select the item and you enter the quantity you are ready to select the next item because the cost is correct on file and there is no deal available for this transaction In that case you can save time by pr
214. e Form Manager displays horizontal and vertical rulers along side and above the template to assist in aligning objects Click and drag the red arrow top left corner of the rulers along the top ruler to use a line to help align objects vertically 14 3 Menus Form Manager Main Menus File Menu The File menu contains typical file operations and configuration tools for several options New Open a new Report or Form template 2001 2008 Logivision 324 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Open Open an existing Report or Form This opens a typical Windows file browser displaying the files in the default LBOSS Office Rpt folder Use the Files of type option to choose between Form or Report templates NOTE The Form Manager can open text type files for example L BOSS sqi command files When a text type file is selected for editing the Form Manager locks or greys out certain options and tools that are for graphic use only Save To save the open template keeping the same name Save As Used to save a template under a new name Print Test Page Opens the Windows printer options panel allowing you to send a test layout page The template appears in a print pre view before being sent to the printer The test page doesn t contain data but is handy to view what the page will look like and verify the fields used Labels This option controls the label page setup in terms of columns and rows spacing between t
215. e date If you have selected the Allow scheduled flag you need to set a repeating cycle The event will repeat at this frequency Task Editor uae eExX ad Vv Description Export to GAL Command l Directory EXE C RUN LBOSS GLExport exe LANG eat Allow manual Repeating cycle Allow scheduled Next event will occur on Hours mom H i Months jv Execute one past event 7 Execute at loading time IV View on all terminals V Executed on controller If filename exists me o NOTE When run in batch automatic event scheduling mode the GL export will not export data for a date that has already been exported 13 4 Configuing the accounting interface Open the GLExport program 2001 2008 Logivision 316 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 From the file menu select the Configuration option Configuration A 5z Acounting software Standard CS Export path C TempSTANDARD CS Server machine Name PBG M Run on workstation Append store or target number to export file name V Zero skip Save Cancel Accounting software Select the type of software from the pull down list Standard CSV will export the 4 fields that are displayed on the GL interface export screen Export Path Enter the path where L BOSS will save the exported data for the accounting software L BOSS knows the required file name for some applications This information on path and file name must be
216. e eight 8 levels starting with level 0 called no user up to level seven 7 called programmer Assigning the no user level to an option or utility means that anybody can access it Once a security level is assigned to a function option or data table the system verifies the logged in user to make sure that they have access rights If the user does not have access rights the system opens a login panel Below is an example of how the security levels might be set Level 0 No User locked the default security level when L BOSS is launched Level 1 New User able to access certain tables only for example items departments etc Level 2 Cashier access to items departments and other functions that a cashier would require Level 3 Clerk receive modify view certain reports Level 4 Assistant Manager access and modify items departments Access to reports Level 5 Manager Access Modify Add Delete no access to network and programming features Level 6 Owner Access Modify Add Delete all except programming features Level 7 Programmer complete access Essentially there are two steps to follow to implement the security system e First Establish the minimum security level required to access each of the system functions options data tables and configuration files listed in the Security Tab of the Configuration Panel e Second Associate each operator in the operator table with a security level Remember that
217. e file menu includes the send to host option Send to host The Send to host option of the File menu options is only available when the Host active option is selected to return data to a headquarter system The send to host option will allow output of the changes made on the local L BOSS machine back to a host system This means that changes can be made at a store and sent back up to the host system Select this option for the tables that may be edited locally in a store Please consider as well that changes sent back up to the headquarter system will be deployed to all terminals that are part of the same target group for that file type This means that if a price is changed at store 3 and all stores share the information on that product the change will make it to the other stores in the next communication cycle To force a change to make its way back up to the head office you must press the Satellite from the menu for that record Using the deploy all changes option will not return any information to the host system It is an item by item decision that can only be activated one item at a time with the satellite icon 3 7 5 Account view The account view option is an easy method to open the account tables simultaneously It is designed to simplify the operation but is really no different than opening the customer the risk and the client level tables individually 3 7 6 Discount The discount table is used to control discount rates offered to
218. e first 16 alphanumeric characters to the ECR POS Description Field allows you to enter 2 descriptions that are used to give a description which will appear on register receipts if the sub department is used for manual sale entry Taxable 1 Select this flag if tax rate 1 should be applied when this item is used Taxable 2 Select this flag if tax rate 2 should be applied when this item is used Taxable 3 Select this flag if tax rate 3 should be applied when this item is used Taxable 4 Select this flag if tax rate 4 should be applied when this item is used NOTE The tax rate must be programmed at the TEC ECR to apply tax Food stamp Select the food stamp flag if this item can be paid for with Food stamps and you are in a jurisdiction that accepts food stamps WIC1 2 3 This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR Prohibit discount This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR Override allowed This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR No refund This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR Scalable This flag defines that the product is sold by weight read from the POS scale This flag should not to be selected for prepackaged and pre priced items or those weighed and labeled for scanning at the POS NOTE Scalable and Gas Cannot be set at the same time at the ECR however L BOSS can set and send both settings and the ECR will accept it Manual weight This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR Not in gross Hash Status Thi
219. e for all price levels This is because if you ask L BOSS to calculate prices based on the target value the prices FOR ALL PRICE LEVELS is calculated If you have selected to use MARGIN The margin is based on the target profit margin entered in the Projected field The Actual field shows the true margin after calculation If the Projected margin calculates evenly the Projected and Actual fields will show the same amount It is also possible to set the Last digit field to force L BOSS to calculate the margin then substitute the last digit for example all prices end in 9 L BOSS just replaces the last price digit For example you enter 9 in the Last digit and the item s price calculated by margin is 1 81 L BOSS will 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 87 use 1 89 If the last digit is 1 and the price was 1 89 L BOSS will use 1 81 Often this makes the Projected and Actual margins different The MARGIN calculation decides how much to markup the cost to achieve the target profit margin establishing the selling price An example of a margin calculation An item costs 1 00 and you want to make 30 profit L BOSS calculates that to make 30 profit the item s sales price must 1 43 note that this is a MARKUP of 42 9 If you have selected to use MARKUP The markup is based on the target markup entered in the Projected field The Actual field shows the true markup after calculat
220. e front end terminal rely on the standard Maintenance application item table programming and do not use the scale table programming Some scales are used to produce scannable item labels for pre packed bulk goods In this situation the items must be programmed in the Scale table Combined with programming from the Item table for L POS terminals price cost etc the scale table programming can be sent to the electronic scale at deploy time Scale of x at ey ad By ltem code Target 7 PaL Product description Mango Shelf life Product life PLU Type Class 1 Serving size Price modifyer Wer Welatt ai Blank fields Shelf life Product life Pack date Weight Unit price Total price ia N E ic This example shows a Scale table record Scale Table Fields NOTE Remember that the scale table only contains the specialized fields for scalable items The scale table data for items is combined with standard item programming form other item 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 129 tables such as the price cost sub department etc Item code The scalable item s code is normally the same code as in the item table Target To establish communication with an electronic scanner the device must be a target and be part of a target group Because the Maintenance application does not include communication drivers for electronic scales the target record programming
221. e headquarter system will be deployed to all terminals that are part of the same target group for that file type This means that if a price is changed at store 3 and all stores share the information on that product the change will make it to the other stores in the next communication cycle To force a change to make its way back up to the head office you must press the Satellite from the menu for that record Using the deploy all changes option will not return any information to the host system It is an item by item decision that can only be activated one item at a time with the satellite icon Risk Level Table Risk level Table Programming Risk levels are required to establish credit parameters and check cashing privileges An unlimited number of Risk levels can be created An unlimited number of customer records can be assigned to each risk level 2001 2008 Logivision 150 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Risk level SEE atx Cr Bo Regular customers Max Credit 0 Check limit 20d Ck change limit Ck week limit Accept check Interest rate This example shows a Customer Risk Level table record Risk level Enter the number to be used for this risk level Description Enter the description to use for this risk level Max credit Enter the maximum credit that customers associated with this level will be allowed to reach before further charges are refused Check limit is the maximum check amount th
222. e made at a store and sent back up to the host system Select this option for the tables that may be edited locally in a store Please consider as well that changes sent back up to the headquarter system will be deployed to all terminals that are part of the same target group for that file type This means that if a price is changed at store 3 and all stores share the information on that product the change will make it to the other stores in the next communication cycle To force a change to make its way back up to the head office you must press the Satellite from the menu for that record Using the deploy all changes option will not return any information to the host system It is an item by item decision that can only be activated one item at a time with the satellite icon Store information The store information table is used with the multi store system This is where you enter the store information for each location E Store Info me eK dD Vv Store number Internal number 001 100001 Store name Logivision Address 210 Laurier City Beloeil Prov State Qc Code J3G 4G7 Phone 450 464 2131 Fax 450 464 5672 Email sales logivision com Manager Joseph Blow Most information here is very straight forward The Internal number can be used to identify the store if the 3 digit L BOSS store number is insufficient Select the store manager by pressing the Set button and choosing the operator Terminal Table T
223. e order Qtyper PLU Vendor SKU Description Minimum Onhand n order Required Case case 1 Joe s Fresh Produce 00000000000001 999712 OREO COOKIES 200 149 12 3g 1 12 Case 00000000000013 LARGE COFFEE 200 130 0 70 1 12 Case 00000000000224 Beer 355ml cans case 200 0 0 200 24 Case Items on order This report shows all items on order from a specific vendor 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 245 Logivision LY Page Items on order 14 Printed Wednesday April 27 2005 8 49 46 PM 450 464 2131 From Friday April 01 2005 450 464 5673 To Wednesday April 27 2005 Store 003 Vendor 1 PLU gt Description Weight Qty Cases Reg cost Total 1 Joe s Fresh Produce 00000000000001 OREO COOKIES 0 000 12 1 1 50 18 00 00000000000004 Nachos 8 oz bag 0 000 2 2 1 00 1 00 00000000000100 Beer 355ml cans 0 000 1008 42 31 50 756 00 00000000000200 Beer 355ml cans 0 000 1008 42 31 50 756 00 00000000001234 Carmel Carton 0 000 17 17 629 00 629 00 00000000004011 BANANAS 61 000 0 0 27 45 27 45 00000000004012 BANANAS PLANTAIN 58 000 0 0 26 10 26 10 00000000004014 VALENCIA ORANGE SMALL 20 000 0 0 1 80 36 00 00000000004016 APPLES RED DELICIOUS 20 000 0 0 3 50 35 00 00000000004017 APPLES GRANNY SMITH 12 PC 48 000 0 QO 1 77 85 00 00693289550000 OREO COOKIES T amp T 0 000 12 1 1 56 18 77 Total 1 Joe s Fresh Produce 207 000 2059 105 2 388 32 Inventory movement This report shows inventory movement between dates Inventory movement G amp P Wo
224. e order to send to or call a supplier to order stock Logivision LV Page Inventory order a 111 je hatet i 25 2005 8 48 37 PM 450 464 2134 450 464 5673 Vendor 1 Joe s Fresh Produce Address Cost group PAL Citwille QC J3G 4G7 Remark BO PB 1019 420 1 Phone PO Iny Fax Cashier Programmer Account Vendor PLU code Description Weight Qty Cases Reg cost Total oooo00000000001 899712 OREO COOKIES 0 000 la 1 18 00 18 00 00000000000004 Nachos 8 oz bag 0 000 2 2 0 50 1 00 Receiving report This report displays a receiving entry once the transaction has been posted It can be used to confirm that stock was received and to match with items on a supplier invoice When a match occurs invoice payment will proceed 2001 2008 Logivision 242 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Inventory receiving Printed Monday April 25 2005 8 44 12 PM Date 4 20 2005 Wendor 101 Best Supplier Ltd Address 210 Laurier Suite 201 Beloeil C JIG 467 Phone 450 464 2131 Fax 450 464 5673 Account My account Vendor PLUA code Description 00000000000003 12123123 PREMIUM PLUS SODABIS 00000000000005 IDEAL CREAM CORN Logivision LV Page 111 450 464 2131 450 464 5673 Price target PAL Cost group PAL Remark PO 1017 PBS POF Iny Cashier Programmer Regular Weight Qty Cases cost Total Margin 96 000 0 6 16 00 144 00 50 00 1 000 0 4 0 49 0 49 16 95 Adjustment report This report shows the items that were ent
225. e report to use group totalizers Check mark the Debug box if you want L BOSS to step through the report generation process stopping after each SQL and L BOSS command to display the command s code This is very helpful if the report generation is causing errors allowing you to determine at what step the code is producing errors It also shows the resulting report s template fields allowing for template debugging In the Printer area select the Dialogue option to open the printer options panel before actually sending the report to printer allowing the user to set printer options for the print job Otherwise choosing Print from the report menu sends the data directly to the printer Black and white sends the data to the printer in monochrome thus reducing memory requirements quite significantly Main should be selected for all reports that will print to the system printer defined in the L BOSS configuration under the miscellaneous tab This is either the default system printer or the main report printer defined under L BOSS configuration If you do not select the main printer option you need to define a printer that will be used Press the Select printer button to define a different printer for this report Change Icon is used to open the L BOSS icon library allowing you to select from the available report icons 2001 2008 Logivision Report System 193 Report Sections The left bottom portion of the Propertie
226. e still several steps before opening the report to view on screen or send to the printer After selecting a report press the Preview button Reports Without Dates Some reports do not require dates such as item lists department or cashier lists When you select a list type report the Report Selection utility opens a list panel to determine what should be included in the list report In some cases you will need to determine the source target for the list or perhaps a range for the list for example from operator 10 to operator 20 In the case of a range the selection tool offers to use all starting with the lt First gt element to the lt Last gt element Elements are the records from the table you have selected to view After selecting the range for the list report press Preview to show the list on screen Print to send the list to the default printer Report selection iof x Items by suppliers Cost target Print Cancel This example shows the Report Target Selection utility NOTE L BOSS is designed to be customized according to your needs This means the prompts displayed for a report vary depending on the way the report was programmed The panel above is an example only Reports That Require Dates 2001 2008 Logivision Report System 183 Some reports will require that you select the date s for the report When you select a report that requires a date the selection tool
227. e terminal in as many different groups as required by your installation In a normal store operation you will need to create or modify the following groups PAL or Program All Lanes This target group should include each register in the store It will be used as the default target for price changes cashier changes etc This target will be selected as a Program group only By default it is also the Item Price and Cost group NOTE If you add another item price or cost group you need to decide whether or not the PAL group will be used for pricing or other item related maintenance If it is to be used make sure that the ITEM PRICE and COST check boxes are selected within the PAL target group RAL or Report All Lanes This target group should include each register in the store as well as each back office unit When reports are requested and you select the group RAL the system will display or print the data for all the terminals This target will be selected as a Report group only XAL or Exchange All Lanes is used to send data simultaneously to all terminals This target will be selected as a Exchange group only This group will include all terminals 001 including register 1 only This target needs to be created so that reports can be taken individually for one machine or so that data can be programmed and transferred to one machine only or in case you need to define separate set up options for different terminals such as printers scanne
228. e to be deployed to the target POS lanes and is shown in the pink area along with the date and time that they are to become active Suggested Retail and Sale price Programming Method type is a flag used to determine price behaviour e Type A this type is not required by L POS e Type B this type is used to enter different prices for the same item such as selling different vintages of the exact same wine that have the same PLU code When type B is selected a grid will appear Enter the different prices available for this product and a description for each of those different prices The column headed Index is filled in automaticaly every time you add a new entry If you select Default the L POS will use 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 83 that row s price as the default price when the item is sold on the POS If you do not select a default price L POS will open a choice window for the operator to select the proper price whenever the item is sold If you select a default price the Price Modify button can be used to override the default record and pop up the list to permit POS operator selection e Type C is ignored by L POS If you set an item to Type D this item cannot be deleted from the order Type D is used internally on a special feature called Pick 5 Once a pick 5 item has been triggered it cannot be deleted Only the trigger items can be deleted Type D should not be used unless it is needed in
229. e used to position this function in the function list alphabetically It will also be printed on register receipts when a button that contains this function is used So if you are using a touch screen and you have created a button for Error correct and this button prints Void last item it is because the function attached to the 2001 2008 Logivision 160 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Error correct button is called Void last item Furthermore it could be printing Correction on the sales report because the function was linked to a totalizer called Correction Alternate Desc This is the second language descriptor for the function It will be used on customer receipts Access This area is used to restrict access to certain functions by operator type For example to allow access to a function for operators who use the Cashier security level the Cashier check box must be marked To restrict access to a function for operators who use the Cashier security level the Cashier check box must not be marked When you create a new function the access is given by default to all operators from cashier to programmer If the access needs to be restricted for additional operator levels remove the mark from the check box of that operator level The operator No User is used to define if a function can be used without logging on to the system This might be the case for a price verify function used without an operator present Alpha Pa
230. ed 20 00 i 6 00 Halt Day 45 00 j Ej Add Del This example shows the Item table s Price tab with G type rental is selected The first field available in Method type G items is the length of the rental period in hours The next field is a description of the rental period The final field is the price for that period of rental Add as many rental periods as required for the item being added If you select 2001 2008 Logivision 110 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Default L POS will use it as the default rental period even though multiple periods have been selected If you do not select a default period L POS will open a choice window for the operator to select the proper period whenever the item is rented If you select a default rental period the Price Modify button can be used to override the default status an pop up the list to permit operator selection If you have multiple copies of the same item you will need to create different PLU codes for each item This way L POS can track all copies of each item and the due time or reservation date of the product In cases where you need to monitor return times for different copies of the same product it is important to follow some basic rules to be able to track the information for the multiple copies Here is a practical example You have 3 copies of the film Titanic Create the first PLU number using 1234561 The PLU number for
231. edence over option 1 and 2 The Status field indicates the current status of the gift certificate record you are editing A means that the gift certificate is available for sale on the system I means the the gift certificate has been issued R means the the gift certificate has been redeemed U means that the gift certificate is programmed but unavailable for sale Note When you edit the gift certificate table the file menu includes the send to host option Send to host The Send to host option of the File menu options is only available when the Host active option is selected to return data to a headquarter system The send to host option will allow output of the changes made on the local L BOSS machine back to a host system This means that changes can be made at a store and sent back up to the host system Select this option for the tables that may be edited locally in a store Please consider as well that changes sent back up to the headquarter system will be deployed to all terminals that are part of the same target group for that file type This means that if a price is changed at store 3 and all stores share the information on that product the change will make it to the other stores in the next communication cycle To force a change to make its 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 175 way back up to the head office you must press the Satellite from the menu for that record Using the deploy all
232. ediately placed in a file in the POS s outbox The POS station then sends a message to the L BOSS station telling it that there is mail to come and get Even if the back end does not receive messages from a POS it checks that stations outbox for information regardless Secure Information This method of collecting sales information adds to the system s data integrity If the back end L BOSS station crashes or the network communication is halted at any time individual POS stations can continue to finalize sales The sales information collects in each station s outbox so when normal network communication resumes the back end L BOSS station collects the information as usual catching up If a front end L POS terminal goes down information continues to be deployed to its inbox so when the terminal re starts all new information is absorbed During a communication failure each POS relies on its own data base for item prices and other item information so the store can continue normal sales operations Several factors are involved if the front end uses floating cashiers or customer accounts While the network is down and L BOSS cannot communicate with the front end e No new item prices can be obtained but the L POS front end stations work from their local item database Local price override can be used to modify prices if required e Floating cashier balance reports cannot be generated until the system returns to normal operat
233. eenntnntenne 38 Stores call head office Head office S t UP ee ceeeceneeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeteeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeesneeseaeeseeseaeeseeeseaeeeeeeees 40 Event to execute L Remole errierta anana Canai EESAN AAAA EA ASANA 41 CVS ANNU o EEE EEE T EE T ETE TE E AE E EE E E EENT 42 Lad FileSend aeaa aa a aa a nna cs nal che esas a eee peewee da ha aaa 43 SOQ CUNO eaa a lt eectntacstaueces gat aa a e cuneresvatsnageesnceastaraetnestere 45 Send urgent message to L POS scsscisisccices scecccseccccccsiecctcsctededaasscecdeteetdegccececeestdetdsdctsciedeiictdapeceesseeetdetisdetecencteiiitc 47 Date CONVErSIOM ivscccecscscicssnsececsetcosncsencscsccoassoucesscbencvencosevssnceetscenceancesecsttcesscncnesatcesvessicesnvocndsdeceavsnctersncbenesstasdvssted 47 MESSAGES aissecsescscesascsticsencccuerscssanasancsavecadersvacsndsabesenesbusrsnadapesaiessveceassuvarapdsubaseneseuecsiacdvasasdssvasausanvacardsabesanescisensaie 48 SNOW TIPS A A E E dete ec E A E E E A E E 49 Exit ettecescevaccencebnezetduucsesstezenssacenccsnectivectdensuesdistecenersbesetd stuency dduecdeaddtes shedubecscectpaccbddsnccsudsbiesciesthcoesdeyneceace 50 2 MOdUIleS MON ccisscscccies ccccccsecscccces cenceasecseccend sandeasacsccccce tandeaseaseneses condeaaaas accnee seeceaaaasencsedseedeanaeasecsees 51 3 Special yeee aoe aer occ eL ce Tea eaaa aeaa aa eaea a eaS EAEE ese AAEE Eaa AEREE 52 4 elp senenn SR nee oe one eS ob oe eo ene eee ene 52 Section III Maintenance Applicatio
234. egative Amount Entry Limit 33 Drawer Warming Time 34Read Reset Report Name 7 35 PLU Price Dollar Discount Markup J 36 Age Limit 37 Foreign Currency Rounding Process 38 Foreign Currency Rounding Process I 39 Credit Card No Negative Check File 7 40 Barcode Individual Flag Type Designatio r J 42 EFT Key Status 43 EFT Information 1 T 44 Terminal Connection 45 In line LAN Socket r T I 48 Printer Logo 49 Tax Table 301 Communication settings Reg Table Vv oO T 02 ro T 04 r 05 M 06 M OF m 08 IP Address mits 5 3 munun sands 192 168 0 254 Port number raat ps5 Receive Report 1 Financial z Report type Daily x C GTX C DailyZ C GTZ Report Collection C Cons By Reg 0 of O record s Error openning Port Error 0 Send Receive This utility allows you to retrieve your data and it will be saved to the LBOSS LRegister Utility PGMFILE folder Select the files which you would like to read from the ECR To get the data into L BOSS you must take the files that are saved to this folder and move them to the LBOSS Office Inbox folder Once moved select the files and remove the Archive bit setting L BOSS will import the files to your existing database The data imported will replace your existing data 12 7 Initial load to ECR Initial Load to ECR Now that the database alias L BOSS terminal and communication setups are complete the
235. eight amount that must be deducted form the total weight when the product is sold 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 123 3 6 5 3 4 Tare Table 5 x wate dr Bv i Tare number i Description Tare 15 gr Weight 0 015 This example shows a Tare table record Enter the tare number description and weight for each record When you edit the tare table the file menu includes the send to host option Send to host The Send to host option of the File menu options is only available when the Host active option is selected to return data to a headquarter system The send to host option will allow output of the changes made on the local L BOSS machine back to a host system This means that changes can be made at a store and sent back up to the host system Select this option for the tables that may be edited locally in a store Please consider as well that changes sent back up to the headquarter system will be deployed to all terminals that are part of the same target group for that file type This means that if a price is changed at store 3 and all stores share the information on that product the change will make it to the other stores in the next communication cycle To force a change to make its way back up to the head office you must press the Satellite from the menu for that record Using the deploy all changes option will not return any information to the host system It is an item by it
236. eiving transaction with the data file Access the receiving type window after filling in the transaction header data 2001 2008 Logivision 232 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Select type of receiving Continue receiving From an Order Portable device Cancel Once the data has been processed onto the entry screen you continue with the transaction as if it had been made any other way Any errors that occur during the import will be saved to an error text file and can be displayed items that do not belong to this supplier items not in system items that are not tracked by the inventory module etc You will be prompted to delete the portable terminal data file once it is imported into the transaction Inventory adjustments Stock adjustments may be required from time to time Damaged goods returns credits free items are all examples of stock level change You may add or remove items using the adjustment feature Access the Adjustment menu in a multi store environment the system will prompt for store number Select the store and the entry grid appears for the transaction 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 233 amp Adjustment Files Edit View Store Inventory date 003 01 4 21 2005 Portable device F8 Review PAL Remark gt PLus vendor coveloescreton cases _ Juras Jarane _ wege stores Case cost PT Unit cost M Qty cs PLUH i Minimum RODE Onoda 0
237. elow are commonly used by programs internally because they simplify mathematical date calculations making it possible to subtract one date from another 2001 2008 Logivision 48 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Date conversion utility of x Julian date 2002024 Unix date 37280 4 January 2002 D Sun Mon Tue wed Thu Fri Sat 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 e8 1w0 1 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Today 2 20 2002 Close This example shows the L BOSS File menu s Date Conversion utility Julian Date Some systems use alternate date formats The Julian date shows the year followed by the number of days since the beginning of the year This format is used in SIL data files so L BOSS needs to recognize this format You probably won t need to use this format Unix Date This is the date format used internally by PC s It is the number of days since December 31st 1899 2 1 11 Messages The Messages Utility Logivision s Back Office System Software and POS softwares are designed for network use In some cases such as larger installations there may be several L BOSS stations such as a reception area price control station and manager s station The message utility provides a quick online messaging method between L BOSS stations and L POS stations convenient for communicating from the front to back end of a store
238. em Misc Host Cleanup Load files Security Name Overwrite Store 003 O Email robert hotmail com Vv Error Email lurgent dealership com Reply address jinto mystore com SMTP server smtp email com Port number pa Cancel Use this form to enter the email set up information required to send emails from L BOSS Email function works as follows You can create an event in L BOSS to send a message via email Here is the syntax EMAIL TO email server com TEXT Hello there There my be several TO and several TEXT arguments The TO may have different syntaxes To send to an email you know TO sales logivision com To send a message to a customer s email account TO ACC accountNumber TO ACC AccountNumber ContactNumber To send a message to an operator s email account TO OPER OperatorNumber To send a message to another store s email account TO STORE 103 You may include attachements You may remove the TEXT command ATTACH MyFile1 2001 2008 Logivision 30 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 2 1 8 3 ATTACH myfile2 You may use a file instead of typing the message with TEXT You may remove the TEXT command FILE MyFile If you wish to send in HTML format instead of PLAIN format use the command HTML You may enter a subject SUBJECT My Subject If no subject is entered the default is Info from LBOSS You may overwrite the FROM address with FROMNAME My Company
239. em comes back online and L BOSS is re started it will open a message box indicating that it was not properly shut down and that this may have caused damage to the data table indexes In this case it is suggested that the tables be re indexed as a precaution NOTE f your installation is using MSSQL rather than a Paradox style database you will probably never need to run the re index command because the MSSQL program handles this type of situation internally Re Indexing Operation NOTE Close all L BOSS programs and modules before running the re index command If you re index while there are tables open the process will stop indicating that a table is busy You must close all L BOSS programs and re start the re index process Follow the selection process for the tables to re index or in most cases use the select all option from the utility s Edit menu Once the tables are selected press the Re index button at the bottom of the utility window The re indexing process does not affect the table data or harm the database in any way Why and How to use the Pack Command NOTE The Pack command is only required if your installation is using the Paradox type of database MSSQL databases do not require Packing This process occurs on a regular basis run internally by L BOSS You should not normally have to run the Pack command It is described here to explain why it exists as a utility When records are deleted from a Paradox data t
240. em decision that can only be activated one item at a time with the satellite icon Category Table Category Table Programming Categories are used to create associations for sales tracking reporting purposes If you want to measure the performance of specific items against other similar items you could create a category Normally the category is a more detailed grouping than are sub departments or departments For example you may want to monitor performance of one style of cookies against all other cookies Create a category called cookies and associate all the cookie PLU s with that category 2001 2008 Logivision 124 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 6 5 4 apt bY ad Bv Category number fi 11002 Description soDA BISCUITS This example shows a Category table record NOTE Category is not a required value in the PLU setup When you edit the category table the file menu includes the send to host option Send to host The Send to host option of the File menu options is only available when the Host active option is selected to return data to a headquarter system The send to host option will allow output of the changes made on the local L BOSS machine back to a host system This means that changes can be made at a store and sent back up to the host system Select this option for the tables that may be edited locally in a store Please consider as well that changes sent back up to the headquarter system
241. ent and set items linked to that sub department to follow the programming attributes of the sub department Selecting this option will gray out the descriptor of options set in the sub department All flags with grayed descriptors will follow the sub department s status Item s do not have to follow sub department programming an item in the same sub department as the example above may be non taxable In this case you would not select the follow sub dept flag The item s flag settings will override the default taxable status of its associated sub department 2001 2008 Logivision 78 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Taxable 1 Select this flag if tax rate 1 should be applied when this item is used Taxable 2 Select this flag if tax rate 2 should be applied when this item is used Taxable 3 Select this flag if tax rate 3 should be applied when this item is used Taxable 4 Select this flag if tax rate 4 should be applied when this item is used Food Stamp Select the food stamp flag if this item can be paid for with Food stamps and you are in a jurisdiction that accepts food stamps WIC USA only Women Infant Children Select the WIC flag if this item can be paid for by WIC check Prohibit discount Select this flag to stop the POS operator from applying a discount to this item The item will also be excluded from the running discountable total or from the account discount subtotal Prohibit Quantity Select this fl
242. ent if you are searching for the code in the item table but only have the short E format of the code Vendor Code F5 Use this option to search for one item in the database using the vendor code for the item rather than the UPC Search Vendor code Shift F5 If you are unsure of the vendor code for an item this option opens a list of all the items in order by their vendor code Custom queries LBoss allows you to list data records in certain fields such as the item description The search is initiated when you double click in the field to be used as the 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 69 search key It is possible that the search criteria you want to use is not available in the standard search lists You can modify the sql request made to the database engine and display the results in the search window Certain database knowledge is required and changing the standard requests may inhibit the normal searches you perform Here is an example of how to add a custom search to the system Access the Custom query menu option and select Add At the prompt enter a short description that will be used to identify this query MM 1is our example which will produce a list of the items atached to mix match group 1 In the query window enter the sql command to be executed Example SELECT F01 F29 F32 FROM OBJ_TAB O LEFT OUTER JOIN PRICE_TAB P ON 0 F01 P F01 WHERE F32 1 You can also set the number of visib
243. ent level 2 250 credt XF Contact required PO required ees rao PO Digits Min Max Check limit 500 00 Number Main vpi Pk Ce First name Last name Language Ck change limit Gu Taschereau fr X Ck week limit 2 750 00 Extension Birth Accept check f Maison Cellular Interest rate 7 Email gtaschereau loaivision com Remark Good guy This example shows a Customer table record with the associated Client level record and Risk level record Client table Client number This field is used to enter the number that will be used to retrieve the customer record in both the L POS lanes and L BOSS stations Modified The L POS stations can be configured to allow the creation of customers on the fly The POS will prompt for the minimum information required to create the account then send the new account to the back end When a customer is created from the front end and sent to the back end the dot beside Modified will be red to identify accounts that were created in the front end and probably need to be edited to complete the information Detail This option is available if your system is licensed to use the L Tracker option When you press the Detail button a new window will open and L BOSS will begin processing the electronic sales journal files for the last 5 weeks This will in turn create a list of all the transactions involving the account over that period You can view details for previous
244. ent to the current report But it is possible that a terminal is working in off line mode For example a network cable has been unplugged or a terminal is being used for an outdoor flower sale It is good practice to use the View logs menu option to verify the status of the store s POS terminals When all terminals are on line and their mailboxes are empty you know that all data has been retreived and processed by L BOSS Grand total information Financial and end of day reports may display a grand total value The grand total Totalizer 4003 is the total of all positive sales This is the Total Sales Tlzr 2 of every SIL file taxes included that has a positive total The grand total range is 0 00 to 9 999 999 999 99 Negative GT before L POS version 2 1 5 9 Totalizer 4002 is the total of all positive sales plus the absolute value of all negative sales This is the Total Sales Tlzr 2 of every SIL file taxes included Its range is 0 00 to 19 999 999 999 98 Negative GT with L POS version 2 1 5 9 and up and with L BOSS only Totalizer 4002 is the total of all negative sales This is the Total sales Tlzr 2 of every SIL file taxes included where the transaction total is negative Its range is 9 999 999 999 99 to 0 00 The grand totals do not represent the sales information They are provided as a simple verification method to insure that no report has been misplaced To verify data continuity subtract the previous day totals from to
245. epartment record number manually This makes it possible to enter a non existent department as a link The system will emit a warning but does not stop you from continuing Use this test to find any sub departments that are programmed with a department number that does not exist in the department table If there are un referenced departments the sub department will appear in a list You can then either correct the entry or create a new department table record Edit Menu Edit Menu Overview The Edit menu is not always visible and only appears when there are open tables to edit Like the File menu the Maintenance application s Edit menu is dynamic its options changing depending on the utility used or the table being edited This is because the utilities and tables do not have all the same options Some of the Edit menu options are alternate links to the same options as the common table edit toolbar such as tools to Add Delete or Post records Item Options Edit Menu Item Options Once the item table is open on the desktop the Edit menu changes to include options that are specific to the item table If an option on the menu has an associated hot key quick keyboard access it is indicated after the menu option description Expand UPC E F12 Use this option so that when entering codes manually in their E format 6 digit short format the application will automatically convert the UPC E to a UPC A This is conveni
246. eploy all changes option will not return any information to the host system It is an item by item decision that can only be activated one item at a time with the satellite icon Vendor Table Vendor Table Programming In order to track the stock level or cost of each item you will need to create the vendor from whom it is purchased From the Maintenance menu access the Item option and open the Vendor table to add the information required for each vendor You may add as many vendors as you require Item cost records must have a default vendor 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 127 ate dr Bv Vendor Account jio Vendor name Best Supplier Ltd Contact name Peter Bohonis Address 1 21 0 Laurier Address 2 City Beloeil State Zip code jac E 4G Phone 450 464 21 31 Fax 450 464 5673 This example shows a vendor table record When you edit the vendor table the file menu includes the send to host option Send to host The Send to host option of the File menu options is only available when the Host active option is selected to return data to a headquarter system The send to host option will allow output of the changes made on the local L BOSS machine back to a host system This means that changes can be made at a store and sent back up to the host system Select this option for the tables that may be edited locally in a store Please consider as well
247. equire Adding records items to the batches Items can be added several ways into a batch From the batch entry screen click the icon or press F6 to open an entry window and enter the product code Press F12 to expand the PLU code from 6 to 10 digits before adding it to the batch When the entry window appears press Alt Enter to select from the browser list Select the item from the PLU list by pressing the Add button Use the F7 button to search by Vendor code Whenever the input form is open you can switch between PLU or vendor code search You can also add an item into the batch directly from the PLU item maintenance screen When the item you want to add to the batch is displayed in the item maintenance press F6 to add that item to the current batch You may also select a group of items from the PLU maintenance using the filter option to locate the products to be added to a promotional batch If you want to add all 2001 2008 Logivision 132 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 chocolate bars currently selling for 0 95 you could set a filter on the sub department for chocolate bars and where the price is equal to 0 75 e Make sure the batch is open in the batch viewer then from the item table e press the Apply filter button to view the list of available items If the filtered items should be added to the open batch e close the list of filtered items then e select Move filtered items to batch fr
248. er level This means that launching most options or applications will open the login panel By default the user 7 is given the programmer security level meaning access to all functions and options 2001 2008 Logivision 16 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Login Use this option to sign onto the system with your user name and password e Open the File menu e Selecting the Login option opens the Enter login panel e Enter the user number from the keyboard see note below about user numbers e Press Enter You can also double click the data entry area to open an on screen numeric keypad useful for touch screen situations NOTE L BOSS uses numbers for users you cannot use alpha characters for users The users their assigned levels and the security level configuration are accessed in the Maintenance application NOTE 2 L Boss restricts the use if level 7 operator for select entries It is not permitted to use an operator assigned level 7 security for continuous operation of LBoss LBoss warns against the usage of level 7 security settings and aborts processing whenever you sign on with an operator using level 7 security NOTE 3 L Boss is often started by means of a shortcut placed in the appropriate start up folder This can cause a problem when the software is running on a machine that is also acting as a database server running an application such as MSDE or MSSQL To ensure that the operating syste
249. er terminal C Merge report data per store This example shows the Configuration panel s Comm tab Preserve report data per terminal If you do not select this option you must create individual terminals for every register in each store on the headquarters system This option should only be set at the headquarters L BOSS not in an individual store Merge report data per store This means that report data from each store will be consolidated not available per terminal 2 1 8 5 1 Stores call head office Store set up When you select the option Stores call head office the communication is driven from the store to the head office The following fields must be defined 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS Main Menus 39 Configuration Company Email System Misc Comm Cleanup Load files Security Communication method What am C No communication C Head office C Regional office C Head office calls stores Store Remote office server L Remote login Connection Name Password Name IP or Domain name Store Term Password 192 168 0 198 003 Iso rrr Local upstream folder C40 utboxHost Preserve report data per terminal C Merge report data per store Encryption If you are setting up L Remote in the store select Store in the What am I window In the Remote office server area you must enter values for the following fields The Connection pull down menu is used to determine how L BOSS conne
250. erator order number Files Query RPT F1165 RPT F1034 RPT F1O31 sum RPT F64 as F64 sum RPT F65 as F65 sum RPT F67 as F67 TLZ F2168 TLZ TLZ IF LANG FR THEN F2120 as F1039 ELSE F1039 TL2 CLK F1126 CLK F1127 This example shows the Editor s SIL field decode feature The cursor is on the first field in the query F1185 2001 2008 Logivision 196 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 5 Entry Module About the ENTRY program Entry module Programmer Files Modules view Help Receiving is Orders i Adjustment F Count Transfer i Eem The Entry module is used for all inventory transactions except for the sale or return of items on the POS terminals The menu options for entry are structured as follows File menu accesses the following options Login to enter your operator ID Language selection Compute on hand inventory This will force the system to re calculate on hand values This may be required if you have re processed transactions from past days View log Exit Modules provide access to the different applications included in the entry system Receiving Adjustment Orders Count Pickup Transfer View is used to access past transactions made on the Entry system Receiving Orders Adjustment 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 197 Count Transfers Help provides access to the help file and version information Contents Function keys a
251. ered into the adjustment transaction Items can be added or removed using the adjustment entry transaction Adjustments Printed Monday April 5 2005 9 04 06 PM Date 4 25 2005 Cost group PAL Remark PB pickup Cashier Programmer Vendor PLU code Description Oooo0o00000006 COKE CLASSIC 12 OZ CA 00000000000001 899712 OREO COOKIES Logivision LV Page 141 450 464 2131 450 464 5673 Weight Qty Cases Regcost Total 0 000 3 0 125 10 80 1 35 0 000 2 0 1667 18 00 3 00 Count report This report shows the stock quantity or weight counted at the count date the result of a count Inventory count Printed Monday April 25 2005 9 08 16 Pm Date 4 24 2005 Cost group PAL Remark Count 24 Cashier Programmer Vendor PLU code Description 00000000000001 899712 OREO COOKIES 00000000000003 12123123 PREMIUM PLUS SODA BIS 00000000000004 Nachos 8 oz bag 00000000000005 IDEAL CREAM CORN 00000000004011 1004011 BANANAS 00000000004012 1004012 BANANAS PLANTAIN 00000000004013 1004013 VALENCIA ORANGE MEDIL Logivision LW Page 1 1 450 464 2131 450 464 5673 Weight Qty Cases Reg cost Total 0 000 200 16 6667 18 00 300 00 300 000 0 25 18 00 450 00 0 000 400 400 0 50 200 00 500 000 D 500 0 49 245 00 11 000 0 11 0 45 4 95 12 000 0 12 0 45 5 40 13 000 0 0 52 48 00 24 96 Inventory transfer This report displays the items being transferred out of the store 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 243
252. erminal Table Programming WARNING The Terminal table setup should only be used by programmers Tampering with the terminals and their respective groups will cause system 2001 2008 Logivision 168 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 communication problems Terminals and Groups One of the key features of L BOSS is the communication method used to move data to and from the L POS register terminals Whether you want to send a programming change or retrieve a report the register must be part of a group Therefore a first step in setting up the software for use in a live environment is to create the terminal list and assign the terminals to one or more target groups Access the Register option from the main maintenance application The following menu and screen layout will appear although the number of terminals and groups will not be the same Terminals 001 Store Terminal 1 001001 Terminal 1 901 Store office 001901 Store Office PAL Store program RAL Store total XAL Store exchange Store Terminal Descriptor joo joo Terminal 1 G Tomina Terminal type Inactive T Group Deserintor Terminal s InBox 001 Store Terminal 1 c Inbox Terminal s OutBox V Report Items m Exchange V Price c UO V Program V Cost This example shows the Terminal and Target Group programming utility The screen is divided into 2 areas The left hand side of the screen displays the groups the rig
253. erstand SQL and are executing the correct command By running an SQL command you can inadvertently or even severely damage the data contained in the system database tables If you are unsure you should not use this option or consult the system administrator or your L BOSS dealer for technical support SQL command iof x Type a SOL command and press EXECUTE 4 gt Execute Save Clear Close 7 This example shows the Maintenance application s File menu SQL command option This option allows a programmer to either select an existing SQL command from the drop down list at the top of the window or manually enter a new SQL command and execute it It is also possible to enter new commands then save them to have them added to the existing list 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 63 3 4 1 Item Options Item Maintenance Utilities The PLU desktop icon and the PLU menu s Item option both open the Item table programming utility Once open the Maintenance application s File menu adapts to include options and utilities that apply specifically to item table The options and utilities are designed to work with item data entry and programming integrity Item Table File Menu Options Tests This option includes item tests that help control item data integrity such as sub department links items with no price and other tests including PLU at zero price in level 1 Items shou
254. es extensions and contents follow internal L BOSS conventions that MUST be respected for the report system to function properly Report properties az This reportis signed and approved by Logivision 6 ead R Cashiers lrp Report name Language EN ted T Minimum user level Report title fo No cashier v Cashier sales Sql file VE Cashiers sql Ed Report section Template file Trigger fields VE Financialfp E E F1185 Category Title fields Field on form Cashiers Bf F1126 F1127 Dialog Total fields x ef IV Preview Geter Hidden I Dialog V Newpage Pagel V Use group V Black and white Debug wp OK Cancel Select This example shows the Report Properties editor the Cashier report Report Properties Panel Options The report s property file name and extension lrp appears at the top left of the panel to identify the report file being edited The Report Title is the name that appears at the top of the report on screen or in printed format Language allows you to set the default language for the report Minimum user level is the security feature for this report The security level must be set for 2001 2008 Logivision 192 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 each report individually The security levels follow the standard L BOSS security levels to read about security levels in L BOSS see the Security help page under the L BOSS File menu Configuration se
255. es all OR conditions before executing the AND conditions All conditions must be true for a search result to be available When you have created a search that you may need to use repeatedly it can be added to the Edit menu With the search active open the edit menu and select Remember actual search NOTE n order to open a prompt window for user input use the question mark in the appropriate column For example to be prompted for the subdepartment number in the example above replace the 5 in the F7 column with a The EJ program will prompt for the subdepartment number instead of using 5 2001 2008 Logivision L Tracker overview 265 9 L Tracker overview Overview This guide will assist you in using L Tracker L Tracker is useful for locating data within transactions that is not available with the normal L BOSS reports program The L Tracker is an optional module that may not be licensed on your system Please contact your dealer to inquire about licensing rights The L Tracker search is performed on the same electronic journal files that can be reviewed with the electronic journal search and review tool The advantages to using the tracker include advanced filtering options and multiple date spanning The L Tracker also provides an integrated details review for the account maintenance module This means that customer transactions can be reviewed directly from the maintenance module 9 1 Main screen The
256. es daily data from before the 90 day period NOTE By default L BOSS keeps the daily financial data for 365 days The cleanup period can be defined in the configuration settings We recommend you consult your LBoss reseller before modifying the values 2001 2008 Logivision About the L BOSS application 11 1 5 1 6 Protecting Your Data Backups Are Important Is your sales information important Is your database important Is your hardware setup important The answer is always YES What happens if the system crashes How can protect my information Like any mission critical information your L BOSS installation should be archived on a regular basis Normally your Logivision dealer will suggest ways to protect your information based on the type of installation you have and how much space your data actually takes up In most situations you ll want to backup every night or other time when the system is not busy L BOSS Data Backup L BOSS provides a backup utility that can be programmed to automatically archive all data from the central database but it does not provide physical backups that store the data on removable media The L BOSS utility can extract all data from the tables and store the information in text type SIL Standard Interchange Language files The backup files contain information about each table and the data to re populate the tables It can completely re build the database from these
257. es not already include an automated backup Event you can create 2001 2008 Logivision File Maintenance Utility 329 one by following several simple steps First open the Events Tasks utility using the L BOSS desktop icon e Click the Add button at the bottom of the Automated Tasks utility to open the Task Editor e Enter a description for the task such as Daily Backup e Place the cursor in the Command entry line then click the button to the right of the Command box e A file browser opens From the Files of type option at the bottom of the file browser select Programs e By default the file browser shows the Office folder Navigate to the LBOSS folder e Find and select the FileMaint exe file e The Task Editor will automatically fill in the Command with the backup option e Place a check mark beside both the Allow manual and Allow scheduled options e Set the time for the backup operation e Inthe Repeating cycle box enter 1 days to have the backup performed every day e Press the check mark icon on the Task Editor top bar to save the new task and close the editor 4 Task Editor Iof x atx aD v Description Jautobackup Command EXE C RUN FileMaint exe BACKUP Bt IV Allow manual Repeating cycle 7 Allow scheduled iela p Hours Next event will occur on 0000 PM 4 1 ia Months J7 Execute one past event This example shows the
258. escription 0000000001234 Camel Carton Vendor code Cases Units Amount Weight 11223344 0 jo 0 00 0 F11 Save F2 Add F3 Delete F4 Cost Worksheet F6 Info F12 Post The screen is divided into 4 sections to allow data entry For help on the different menu options and function buttons please refer to the Entry module introduction 1 Header information displays the general information you entered related to this transaction 2 Products received in the transaction shows a grid of the items that have been entered into the transaction 3 Item detailed information displays the information available from the database 4 Operator input fields are used to enter the items and modify order quantity e f you have not selected the Load all items flag L BOSS will display a blank form The cursor will position itself in the PLU field If you know the product code enter it If not press Alt Enter for a list of items associated with this vendor You may also press Enter to position the cursor in the vendor code field where you can find the item using the vendor s code 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 225 Once you locate the item the cursor will move to the Cases field to allow you to receive by case Press Enter to switch to the Units field if you want to receive by unit count Confirm the cost for the line entry and press F2 Add to accept this line You may also press Enter when the F2 Add butto
259. essed by the system to another back end terminal This could be the case in a larger store that uses more than one back end terminal and that also has many POS terminals If the operator responsible for monitoring the error messages works at the 902 station messages would be set to 902 By default the message terminal is set to 901 Ad This is used to access the message control set up screen Press the Ad button and the following window appears jos Property Error type ee Error number x Display Email SH fz V Email all urgent messages Close This window is used to select a message and define an action to change the default behavior of L BOSS when this message is generated For example you may reeceive Scanner event received when disabled message now and again This is due to the scanner model not recognizing the programmed diable code or not having a disable command If you prefer to display the message only if it occurs 3 times every 7 days you would select Active when it occurs 3 times per 7 days The same definition can be made to email the message It will be sent to the email account defined in the Email tab of the L BOSS configuration menu 2001 2008 Logivision 34 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Messages 2 Use this setting to send a copy of urgent messages received by the Main message center to another terminal in a store The message is sent using the internal email program that allows inte
260. essing the F2 Add button immediately You do not need to actually click the button You can press the F2 function button on your keyboard Restricting the use of the mouse should speed up the process considerably Posting the Receiving to the database You must Post the transaction before it can be printed in final invoice form to match the supplier invoice So if you are sure that the information is correct press the F12 Post button Now L BOSS will actually record the transaction and save it to the database At this point a confirmation prompt appears Answer yes to continue Print Options Print Print shelf labels Print Print items labels Close 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 231 5 1 2 2 6 Print and review receiving Review a receive transaction already posted A transaction that has been posted to the database can be reviewed for reprint or to be deleted up until the time it is received 5 Entry module Programmer Receiving Orders Adjustments Count Transfer fs Receiving R Orders fs Adjustment fs Count l Transfer Pickup Importing transaction data from the Portable device You may own a portable device and receive stock with it by scanning the product codes directly from shipping pallets If this is the case you will need to transfer the data files from the PDT to the L BOSS machine When this operation is complete you will be able to access the file and create a rec
261. ets for the selected item Normally all terminals receiving programming will be in the PAL target Programming ALL For more about the terminal groups see the Register menu Terminal table help pages in this manual Show Price targets The same as the Show POS targets utility above this opens a list of the Price targets programmed for the selected item Auto Update from Batch If you are using the Batch mode utility it is possible to automatically update item programming from a batch even though the batch has not been deployed When this option is selected L BOSS will display the best promotional price in the sales price column extracted from the active batches This option does not affect the way that batches behave For more about Batch programming see the batch programming help pages in this manual Scanner The Maintenance application offers a utility to enter item codes from a scanner This can make it easy to quickly locate items in the database for programming The scanner must be programmed to function properly with the Maintenance application Use scanner If a scanner will be used to enter item codes for programming select the Use scanner option Configure scanner This utility is used to program the Maintenance application for using a scanner The utility provides a list of pre set configurations based on popular manufacturers models If your scanner does not appear in the list it can be added programmed a
262. evel required to access the selected option Once a security level is associated with accessing an option continue by associating minimum security levels to the Modify and Add Delete columns of the option For example you may want to allow a cashier to have access to view items but not modify add or delete them from the system Once the required access level to items is set to Cashier assign the security level required to Modify items then the level required to Add Delete If an option requires a high security level to access it you may not have to bother assigning 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS Main Menus 47 2 1 10 security levels to the Modify or Add Delete columns since a user must have access to an option before they can modify add or delete it Once the required security levels have been assigned to options or data tables the last step is to associate a security level to each operator in the system For help on assigning security levels to operators click here to go to the Operator Table help page now NOTE f you are using the security system be sure to use the logout option to sign off the system when leaving the work station leaving the application on the no user security level L BOSS will still execute any scheduled operations including polling or other communications even if no user is logged Time of inactivity before auto log off should be set if your store personnel
263. event will occur on 11726 2002 04 17 AM a Days Months J Execute one past event J7 Execute at loading time JV View on all terminals Terminal IV Executed on controller Terminal If filename exists _ This example shows the Task Editor programming Description Enter a meaningful descriptor that allows the user to recognize the command s function This is not necessarily the command s actual name and does not affect the actual command that is run Command This is a combination of the L BOSS programming and the actual command file to execute manually or at the specified time Since some commands can overwrite or otherwise change existing data we suggest you consult your Logivision dealer before making changes or adding new Events Tasks Directory The Task list can be configured to use command sections Similar to Report Categories found in the Report selection panel the Directory Task List entries do not execute anything They are used to group tasks into categories or sections Selecting the Directory flag sets this task as a section heading with the related tasks listed below this heading Select Allow manual to be able to force this event from the Task Manager when required Allow scheduled Select this option to force L BOSS to run this event at the selected date and time The event cannot execute if L BOSS is not running at the date and time programmed NOTE You can set tasks to be both manual
264. ey ccieic kien hie ahs ans eel didi 200 Assign vendor and cost to each product e cc eeceeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeceaeeseeeeaeeseaeeeeeseaeeeeeseaeesieeeeaeenes 200 Create inventory record for Products cccceecceceeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeaeeseeeseeeseaeesaeeseaeesneeseaeesneeseaeenes 201 Using the parent child function 202 Lot prices and inventory control Inventory transactions Purchase Ord fS isinic a i iii hind dai iin aia 209 Maintial order sescseeyvesccasevsesenes sce vegevusts seetescecdaseeesscpeanen sapeeecad ageeeseedaateetenee ade aeevvins anteeetisais eater easaaevuces ses 210 Auito gen rate Onder apnena ap E A a E NA Eaa EE iad 211 Portable deviGEi ns cgcs s cccpesdssads eds cage cansczeustedsadpestetadtodes onseccascpesetes sadness biade olatenhe ccasande ded taibati iad iati sai oasia 213 Complete the ordet riirii reiini tiaia iida aaa a ada anaa adita 215 Recalla saved Order ndrsiissnnnsAnnierna dingsen pin dt eder aaaea adnan 219 Receiving Stock Manual receiving Receive from an open Purchase OFder ccesceesceeseceeseeseeeeseeceacecseeseneeseeeeseessaeeeseeseaeeeseessaeeeseeteaeesseees 225 Receive from Portable device file eeeeceeeseeeseeeeesseeteaeeeseeceacesseeseaeesaeseaeersaeseseeseaeeeseessaeenseeseaeesaeees 227 Receiving back 0rders iciauisii ie cianiiniel alae aie alien DAK 229 Complete the reCeiving ssc sccccsed scicecenssec
265. ference Show Tips Show Tips L BOSS File menu Option Show tips is used to display helpful tidbits of information that we expect will make your usage of L BOSS more enjoyable Selecting this option opens a Windows style hints window Once open you can browse through the hints or configure the hints panel to open every time you launch the L BOSS application handy for new users 2001 2008 Logivision 50 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 2 1 13 Exit Exit the L BOSS Application The Exit menu option closes the L BOSS application On closing the application opens a warning message to let you know that if you close the application the back office will not be available for communications or scheduled events Only shut down the application if you are sure that this will not affect the normal store operations Exit Use this option to close the L BOSS application Other programs such as Maintenance polling and other sub applications will also be terminated Whenever you choose the Exit button L BOSS warns you that closing the application will terminate the communication with the registers This is a normal warning but several issues should be considered before terminating the L BOSS program e When L BOSS is not operating the sales data from the POS terminals is not processed The data does continue to accumulate on each lane When L BOSS is re started the data is transferred to the back office and the report system i
266. ffee amp Croissant promo m Over 50 Promo Quick Object POS Price Cost Inventory Sales Picture ECL Cumulative T Sa Ho d Totalizer 3 Description LARGE COFFEE Type ITM Select Quantity 1 Code 0000000000013 Amount ri Weight Method tL ITM 0000000000031 CHOCOLAT CROISSANT This example shows the Promo tab set up for an in store electronic coupon The coupon PLU named Coffee amp Croissant promo will be triggered by the POS once the Large coffee 2001 2008 Logivision 98 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 and the Chocolate Croissant items are entered into the transaction Meal deal or Combo pricing Another scenario exists that occurs when you want to run a combo deal on different products for a total price where the base price of the items included in the deal is not necessarily the same Imagine a combo where any pastry and a small coffee can be purchased for a total of 1 99 even though different pastries combined with the coffee give different totals To use the ECL coupons as mentioned above would require a new coupon item for each different price combination But you can create an item that will replace the individual prices with the price of the combo deal Example of Combo deal Pick 5 deal This makes the POS act on meal deal items as follows when the ECL table criteria are met the Price of each qualifying item becomes ZERO and the MEAL DEAL i
267. files When set as an automated task the backup utility works as a cyclical backup it creates a series of folders named for each day of the week After the first week the process replaces each day s existing backup from the week before There is always at least one week of data going back day by day This type of backup is used to reconstruct database tables that for some reason have become corrupt or have incorrect data However once archived these files should be stored using a disk backup type utility in case of a major physical system failure such as hard disk crash Physical Backup You should definitely consider some kind of physical backup either on tape Zip drive CD or some other recording media These total backups can be very complete replicating the entire drive if necessary or re building portions that have been lost L BOSS does not control these types of backup you should consult your backup program help to configure your backup archiving software It should include a total backup of everything in the LBOSS folder including all sub folders This way the setup can be easily restored Restoring from L BOSS Archives The restoration process is somewhat technical and requires that you understand the table names and what should be restored If for some reason the information contained in the data tables has become corrupt and you need to restore tables we suggest that you consult your Logivision dealer For more on
268. for tare removal Bottle Link This flag is available to automate the charge for bottle deposit in areas where deposits are charged on items like soda beer etc Select the link that is programmed with the appropriate bottle deposit amount Promo ID This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR Restrictor This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR Client Age This setting is available to restrict the sale of age sensitive products such as tobacco or alcohol The value of 18 or 21 is programmed in the LRegister Setup Configuration Oper Age This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR Label The Print flag is used internally by the system It is selected when a price is changed so that a label will be printed for this item the next time you print labels The Type window allows you to select a label type that you want to use for this item Double click to select from the available labels you have on your system NOTE Label is an optional module availalable from your Authorized Toshiba TEC America Dealer If this module is not purchased in addition to the L BOSS Software the following options are not available Link To Links to other PLU Price 12 9 Sub department programming Sub Department Table Settings 2001 2008 Logivision 306 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Sub Department oe q gt v Sub Department fC a POS Description Depart ant MM Tax Tax 2 E Tax3 DD Tax4 Food
269. g an event to run automatically ccseeteeeeee esse cesses eeseeeenseeeeeaeeesaaeenseeeeeeeeesnaeseneeeensenenes 314 4 Configuing the accounting interface cssecceseeeeeseceseeeeeseeeenseeeseeesesneesnseeeeeeneeseaeseseenenseeeees 315 5 Running the Export to G L ss a aiea eana eena cine heel 317 Section XIV Form Manager 319 1 Template Editor necscessnrecnnnnnna cccec ta deneee cd ccecen tv decanted ecaetetetenewtvdsueseedeiencwes 320 2 TOOS inoin EEA funcavelsdeders tuteseetsahcurdstuadercts 322 3 MENUS sosnooe nn cece ca sauce awtes es soucaves saucer cu saueuess cateeren euceeess 323 Section XV File Maintenance Utility 327 Section XVI Glossary 332 Index 335 2001 2008 Logivision 6 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 1 About the L BOSS application LOGIVISION Logivision is a corporation specialized in the development of software for the retail industry with a particular focus on operation systems for front end terminals Innovative and always at the forefront of new technological developments Logivision is committed to improving the service and products we provide to our customers Please take some time to read through the help manual to gain insight into how L BOSS can be tailored to run in a wide variety of retail applications Logivision s documentation and manuals are subject to change as new software versions become available Please ask your Logivision dealer about manual updates This ma
270. gation F2 is used to access the details area of the screen F3 is used to perform a custom search F4 accesses the Field input area of the custom search F5 accesses the Descriptor input area of the custom search F6 accesses the operand input area of the custom search F7 accesses the Value input area of the custom search F8 accesses the condition input area of the custom search F9 positions the cursor on the results list F10 is a shortcut to the transaction number field F11 deletes a line from the custom search F12 inserts a row into the custom search ALT G executes the pre selection to limit the results list to transactions that meet the selected criteria 2001 2008 Logivision L Remote communications 271 10 10 1 L Remote communications L Remote is used to transfer data from stores to head office Flle maintenance such as price changes can be transferred from the head office out to stores L BOSS is designed to create and maintain data from the central head office location and send it to stores not to maintain data at the store locations to send back up to the headquarter system Sales data from the stores is returned to the head office The communication is recommended over a high speed internet connection only Data transfer over dial up is slow and unreliable and should be avoided by using high speed communications L BOSS configuration settings L BOSS Configuration menu 1 In the Comp
271. ght on that transaction date This means that sales or receives done the same date will be removed or added to the count no matter when the count is actually input This means that if you come in at 10 00 and count 5 boxes of Kleenex and post that count the system should show 5 in the on hand field for Kleenex If you had sold 2 boxes of Kleenex that morning the system will show 3 boxes on hand for Kleenex because the Count transaction is reputed as performed at midnight to start the day So you need to make sure that the counts are made first thing in the morning before other transactions that affect the inventory Or you can count your stock after close today and make the count entry tomorrow morning No matter what else you do it will still be accurate because what you had last night will be input as what you started with the next morning Count transaction Select Count from the Entry main screen The following window will appear 2001 2008 Logivision 236 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Selection H Inventory Store number Date ME H Store 3 Inc 4 21 2005 Remark OK Load on hand Cancel Physical count Files Edit view Store Inventory date 003 901 4 21 2005 Portable device F8 Review Remark PB 4 21 GR 12 00000000000001 899712 0 17 2 3 00 0 003 Ea Se sas v gt 12 17 2 8 40 12 Case cost 045 Unitcost 0 45 Qy es L a PLU 000000000040 Vendor code 1004011 Minimum 100
272. gs on the Object tab are also available from the Quick Tab Modifying data on the object tab modifies the same data field if it is located on the quick tab cu 4 gt V tm ltem number Fe Active 00077414730052 S133 M E THRIFTY WATER REG Cost ECL List items avg cos Quick Object Pos Price Cost Inventory Sales Picture ECL A2 a W kit Alias Category Commodit 9000 00000000000445 Family Report code a a Item detail Brand THRIFTY Unit of measure Size description milliliter 330 ML Created by IMPORT 23 06 2007 1656 Comment pSaegect This example shows the Item table s Object tab Kit Leave this field blank for normal items Set this field to create a kit only A kit is used in some businesses to track multiple inventory items when the kit product is sold Note that when the Kit field is selected the Cost tab becomes a kit tab to allow you to enter the content items that make up the kit Category is not compulsory It can be used to link items for reporting purposes only This can be used to associate items that are not in the same sub department or have no other association in the system to get a special report on item sales Categories are user 2001 2008 Logivision 76 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 6 1 4 defined you must program the Category table before assigning items to categories This field is numeric up to 6 digits Family Like the C
273. hand would show 5 pieces If you also make a count for that day of 10 items the total on hand stock would show 15 pieces for the item e The pre selection window allows you to select a Load on hand option This will display a list with current on hand of the selected items This way you can change the items that are different and post the values that are correct without modification e When you select Load on hand several new fields are available to filter the list of items to count The filter includes all fields from the OBJ_ TAB of PLU maintenance By default not all fields will appear on the list The fields are added under the File menu by selecting Count filter configuration Select the menu option choose a field to add to the filter assign a name and press Add Use the delete button to remove an existing filter If you filter by description or other string fields the system will use the From To values like this If you enter From A to N all items beginning with A in description up to all items beginning with N in description will show on list e Count transactions are always considered as the first entry made to the inventory system on the date selected for the count So a normal count procedure would be to count the stock after close of business day The report system allows you to print physical count sheets to note the on hand values Once you have completed the actual counting use the Entry program to post the count But post the count fo
274. he Parent PLU item 1234 Orders receiving counts will be performed on the parent item even if the child item is entered in an inventory transaction Lot prices and inventory control Lot pricing L BOSS includes a special price type useful when different sizes of the same product are sold For example coke can be sold as a single item or as a six pack If you want to use the UPC from coke single can to sell different number of cans you should consider lot pricing Method P The example shown below is for wine that can be sold by the bottle wrapped in a pack of 3 6 or as a case of 12 A price has been assigned to each different quantity When the item is scanned a table will appear and the operator will select the quantity being purchased If one of the rows is selected as default the system will sell that quantity automatically To override the default quantity the operator must press the Price modify button BEFORE scanning the item Then the table will appear as if no default quantity had been programmed 2001 2008 Logivision 206 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 onan Active Nent 6 99 M E Gallo Fairbanks Shery REG Quick Object POS Price Cost Inventory Sales Picture EcL 4 Price like code 00000000000505 Sugg Retail Sale price Price tasgat Price Default 6 Hal case 31 99 r Margin Projected Act fiz Full case 59399 F _ Last digi Calculate This method
275. he host system Select this option for the tables that may be edited locally in a store Please consider as well that changes sent back up to the headquarter system will be deployed to all terminals that are part of the same target group for that file type This means that if a price is changed at store 3 and all stores share the information on that product the change will make it to the other stores in the next communication cycle To force a change to make its way back up to the head office you must press the Satellite from the menu for that record Using the deploy all changes option will not return any information to the host system It is an item by item decision that can only be activated one item at a time with the satellite icon 3 4 2 Other File Options Other Dynamic File Menu Options Not all tables have utilities or additional options in the File menu If there are no tests or other options for a table the File menu usually only contains the Close option to close the table saving all modifications 2001 2008 Logivision 68 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 5 3 5 1 Sub departments When the sub department table is open for editing the Maintenance application s File menu changes to include an option to test the sub departments Unreferenced Departments Although the Maintenance application has drop down lists to allow you to select the correct department for a sub department you can also enter the d
276. he item normally sells for The POS can be programmed to calculate and display or print on the receipt the difference showing a You Save type message based on the Suggested Retail Price field Size This information applies to the Label module only This is the size weight or volume of the item that will be displayed on labels created using the Label module The field must be included in the label template Factor This information applies to the Label module only The factor determines the pricing base displayed on the labels printed for the item For example the item s size above may be 500 grams but the label shows the price based on 100 gram quantities Margin or Markup The title of the cost calculation box and the way the price calculation is performed depends on the setting selected in the L BOSS File menu Configuration utility s Misc tab s Cost Price Calculation setting described in the Misc tab s help page It is important to understand the difference between a MARKUP and a MARGIN as the calculation and results are different These fields allow you to calculate a price based on a profit margin or a percentage markup To use the Margin fields there must be a cost in the item s cost field Each price level has its own target pricing box and each price level can be set to different values as the target It is also important to note that if you use price levels you should be sure that there is a target valu
277. he labels both horizontally and vertically Also the label page margins Based on the information you enter here and the Page Setting option determines the page size the bottom portion of the label setup tool shows the number of labels per column and row 4 Labels Iof x M Label size Gap between labels Label width 2 500 in Horizontal 0 025 in Label height 2 000 in Vertical fo 025 in m Page margins Top margin 0 500 in Bottom margin 0 500 in Left margin 0 500 in Right margin 0 750 in Number of labels Across page 2 OK Down page 4 Cancel This example shows the Form Manager s label page setup The measure used inches or centimeters depends on the template s rulers set using the Configuration menu s Metric option Enter the correct values for label width height the gaps and margins You can either click the field and enter the number or with the cursor in the field to modify use the up and down arrow keys to increase or decrease the value Page Setting This option is used to establish the size of the page being produced by the current template The measure used inches or centimeters depends on the template s 2001 2008 Logivision Form Manager 325 rulers set using the Configuration menu s Metric option 46 Paper size Iof x Paper size Paper width e 500 in Paper height 17 000 in Orientation OK Can
278. he remark field is compulsory Make the necessary adjustments Use the minus button to enter a negative quantity to remove a damaged piece for example Post or save the transaction as you would for an order or receiving NOTE tems entered into an inventory transaction can be sorted several ways to improve reconciliation with supplier invoices or for any other reason Open the View menu and select 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 239 the Order By option By default items are sorted in the order they are entered into the transaction To sort in any other order use the View menu option The sort order on the screen cannot be changed once a transaction has been posted to the database The printed copies of inventory transactions are always made in the order that was visible on the screen when the transaction was posted 5 1 2 5 Transfer In a multi store inventory system you may want to move stock out of one location and add it to another Access the transfer module to use this function Note that the items need to be assigned to each inventory store in PLU maintenance under the inventory tab When an item is transferred from store 1 to store 2 L BOSS actually creates an order for store 2 to use as a receiving slip This will be transferred to store 2 during a subsequent communication among the stores i Select store to transfer from File Options Search 001 Store 1 Inc 002 Store 2 Inc 003 Store 3 Inc
279. he system will continue flashing the warning Delete any urgent message from the list by selecting it and pressing the x delete icon on the View log toolbar 7 3 Unprocessed Files Viewing Unprocessed Files Unprocessed will flash on the main L BOSS menu whenever a file is sent to the L BOSS unprocessed folder This is not a normal situation and it should be addressed immediately Access the unprocessed folder by pressing the flashing Unprocessed message The screen will switch to the Status view of all terminal folders and you will have access to the list of unprocessed files Right click on the unprocessed files to reprocess them If they cannot be reprocessed successfully contact your dealer for assistance in determining the contents of the file NOTE The LBoss stops all further processing when file s are present in the unprocessed folder It is imperative that the files are processed before the system can resume normal operation If you decide to manually delete the file from the LBOSS OFFICE UNPROCESSED folder L BOSS will still refuse to start processing because it remembers that a file was deleted When this must be done and you accept the consequence proceed as follows Delete the file from the LBOSS Office Unprocessed folder This will cause an urgent message related to the file you deleted 2001 2008 Logivision 260 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 URGENT messages we Gla xv Files From 003901
280. help distinguish them from back office report templates Shelf and Item Labels The Form Manager is also used to create templates for item or shelf labels allowing you to configure the label page layout columns and rows label contents such as bar code description price and other common label type information 2001 2008 Logivision 320 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 14 1 Template Editor Form and Report Template Editor Opening an Existing Template The Form Manager can be launched as a stand alone application from the L POS Windows application menu It is also possible to select a report file using the Report Selection tool right clicking it opens a menu The Property option opens a panel that contains the report s configuration The name of the template file for the report is entered in the Template File properties field To the right of the Template s frp file name the pe button opens the Form Manager s template editor 4 Form manager Financial mask of x File Records Configuration Help Ln Detail count z L 0 OT Gridsize aj Langage E fi Add label on wW it oH JE fen x 5 ls 7 This example shows the cashier report template in the Form Manager s Editor Template Objects Anything that appears in the template is called an object When selected objects display nodes that are used to re size the object e When acorner node is selected the cursor changes to a d
281. here on the Form Manager desktop or made to Dock on the right side of the window FIELD Properties Data All pages False Left 59 Company FAX Font name Arial Font size 10 Font style fi Formula Tag 12 This example shows the Form Manager s Object Inspector NOTE To dock the Object Inspector click its top bar and drag the inspector to the right side of the Form Manager When the Object Inspector is being moved the Form Manager shows the Inspector s outline When the Object Inspector reaches the right side the outline will snap to the side of the window Releasing the Object Inspector at this point docks the Inspector It can only be docked on the right side of the Form Manager window Re snap to grid The Form Manager uses a hidden grid to help position objects on the form or report template This option forces all objects to snap to the closest invisible grid line 2001 2008 Logivision File Maintenance Utility 327 15 File Maintenance Utility L BOSS File and Database Maintenance Utility WARNING The aspects covered by this utility are technical Given the critical nature of the L BOSS system data and because it is possible to seriously damage the information in the database we suggest you do not attempt any database manipulation unless you are absolutely certain of the results of the operation Please contact yo
282. his option to enable reporting per POS terminal at head office Otherwise select Merge report data per store If you select Preserve report data per terminal you need to create each store s POS and Back office terminals at Head office If you select Merge report data per store you will only create the back office terminal 901 for each store when defining the terminal list at head office e L Remote login Name and Password need to match at both ends Encryption is used to set an encryption password to protect data Must be the same at both ends Once this configuration is done don t forget to create the store terminal list Comm tab set up for a Store that calls head office 2001 2008 Logivision 274 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Configuration Company Email System Misc Comm Cleanup Load files Security Communication method What am I C No communication C Head office Stores call head office Regional office C Head office calls stores f Store Remote office server L Remote login Connection Password Name LAN JE test IP or Domain name Password 74 58 218 11 m Local upstream folder CA0 utboxHost Preserve report data per terminal C Merge report data per store Encryption Cancel Select the communication method as Stores call head office This method is preferred because it means you only need a fixed IP address at the head office In the What am I form define the locati
283. ho purchased a particular product or spent an amount equal to greater than etc Cashier review tools such as finding voids refunds or other negatives are also easily performed The pull down windows in the search columns can be accessed by clicking the small arrow button or the function button above the search fields The headers in each of the columns are explained below F4 Field is used to set filters to use within your search The fields include Transaction text cashier amount PLU number customer date time store terminal sub department department function and totalizer F5 is adjusted dynamically to reflect the filter type you selected in the F4 column For example if you select PLU number the header for the F5 column becomes PLU F6 Operand is used to set an argument such as equal to gt greater than lt lesser than etc F7 also changes according to the filter field set in the F4 column For example set the F4 column to PLU number and you will see the F7 column becomes Amount F8 Condition is used to determine whether or not an additional search line should be added to the current entries As you add multiple lines to the search you may realize that one of the entries is invalid Use the F11 Delete line button to remove a search line Use F12 Insert line to add a search line into the current search data The first step is to select a field to search by in order to display only data that is
284. host option of the File menu options is only available when the Host active option is selected to return data to a headquarter system The send to host option will allow output of the changes made on the local L BOSS machine back to a host system This means that changes can be made at a store and sent back up to the host system Select this option for the tables that may be edited locally in a store Please consider as well that changes sent back up to the headquarter system will be deployed to all terminals that are part of the same target group for that file type This means that if a price is changed at store 3 and all stores share the information on that product the change will make it to the other stores in the next communication cycle To force a change to make its way back up to the head office you must press the Satellite from the menu for that record Using the deploy all changes option will not return any information to the host system It is an item by item decision that can only be activated one item at a time with the satellite icon Adjusting the account balances Account balance is normally increased by maing a house charge transaction on the POS It is reduced by making a Received on account entry through the POS Any other manual adjustment to the account balance is entered in the Maintenance application Open the customer and press the F4 button Enter the adjustment amount positive to increase the account balance or use the neg
285. hout changing the message in store 2 etc The Mail Server in each store may also have a different name This means that at the head office you need to create a group for each store for example S01 S02 S03 S04 Within these groups you would place the back office terminal that acts as controller in each remote store Then L BOSS will be able to transfer the correct data files to the correct store You MUST NOT use group numbers such as 001 002 etc This would create a conflict Here is a sample list that may be created at the HQ if you have 3 stores to communicate with S01 Terminal 001 901 created as Program report S02 Terminal 002 901 created as Program report 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 173 S03 Terminal 003 901 created as Program report PAL Terminal 001 901 002 901 003 901 created as Program group RAL Terminal 001 901 002 901 003 901 created as Report group XAL Terminal 001 901 002 901 003 901 created as Exchange group When you are using multi zone pricing you need to define the Item Price and Cost settings on the appropriate groups In the 3 store example from above if each store has separate prices then you would need to select Price on each of the S01 S02 and S03 groups If different items go to different stores then you need to select Item in the same groups Same for the Cost records of items If some of the prices are common to all stores then make sure that the PAL group
286. how to restore using the L BOSS file maintenance utility see the File Maintenance Utility help page in this manual PCI compliancy PCI Security concerns System access 2001 2008 Logivision 12 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Logivision recommends that access to PCs servers and databases with payment applications should be restricted by the use of a unique username and complex password combination Data retention Logivision took steps to minimize the storage and display of card data so as to minimize the possibility of that data being lost or compromised Card account data is truncated on receipts in electronic journal and in log files Logivision only stores the LAST 4 digits to comply with both PCI requirements and FACTA rules The data retention policies cannot be modified by system integrators or by end users Remote Access Remote access is the ability to connect and interact with a remote network or computer as if you were directly connected of that remote network or computer Full remote access implies that this access is available at will on demand and some level of network communication is allowed to or through a firewall PCI PABP recommendations are to use two factor authentication for remote access login The industry recognizes that implementing two factor authentication can be difficult and costly If a merchant cannot justify the expense of implementing a two factor authentication solution for rem
287. ht hand side shows the terminals that have been created Each PC or POS terminal in the store must be created as a terminal to be used with L BOSS Adding terminals automatically When the terminal window is opened the Edit menu option in the main Maintenance application can be used to set the total number of lanes in the store This option will prompt for the total number of lanes that are to be used in the store If your store has 3 lanes enter 3 at the prompt for number of lanes Even if you had 2 it will set the system to 3 lanes by creating a terminal and target list for you Because the system uses computer names and directory paths several conventions must be followed 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 169 e Terminals will be numbered sequentially beginning at 001 and the store number entered during the L BOSS configuration If you are in store 001 the terminals will be created as 001 001 001 002 001 003 etc e The terminals will be created as LPOS terminal types e The terminal inbox for POS 01 will be set to POS01 C INBOX so you must identify L POS lane 1 as POS01 in the network identification settings You must also share that POS terminal s hard drive that contains the INBOX as C e The terminal outbox for POS 01 will be set to POS01 C OUTBOX so you must identify L POS lane 1 as POS01 in the network identification settings You must also share that POS terminal s hard drive that cont
288. iling backslash On each L BOSS work station you need to set the UNC path to connect to the server s drive If your L BOSS server is named LBOSS01 and his hard drive has been shared as C the server s main directory would be entered as LBOSS01 C LBOSS Server s office directory Enter the path that this PC will use to locate the main data directories on the L BOSS server On the L BOSS server this setting should point to C LBOSS OFFICE yes we do need the trailing backslash On each L BOSS work station you need to set the UNC path to connect to the server s drive If your L BOSS server is named LBOSS01 and his hard drive has been shared as C the server s office directory would be entered as LBOSS01 C LBOSS OFFICE Alias L BOSS requires an alias to connect to the database that contains the files used by the system The database alias was created during the BDE setup as described previously in this document If you followed the default installation select the LBOSSSQL alias NOTE This alias will not be available unless you have installed the MSDE database server Database type Select MSSQL to manage the database tables unless you want to run the 2001 2008 Logivision 32 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 system under Paradox and you have selected the LBOSS alias User The user default for the native database is SA Password Leave this entry blank with the default database Use internal stored procedures u
289. ined Even if there are several L BOSS terminals at each store you must only 2001 2008 Logivision L Remote communications 277 define the INBOX and OUTBOX of the main terminal 901 All other terminals at each store get there data from terminal 901 in that store This is because the data that leaves from L BOSS is sent to the back office in each store not directly to the POS or to other back office terminals At each store the normal terminal list will have an inbox and outbox defined for each POS terminal As usual stations 902 903 etc use the data directly from the 901 with a network connection When you define the L BOSS terminals of each remote store it is very important to set them as L BOSS terminal type Extra setting in terminal set up when head office calls stores Refer to the previous paragraphs on terminal set up for information about creating the head office terminal list There is an extra setting that needs to be made for each remote L BOSS terminal when the head office calls the stores In this situation you need to define the IP address of the remote LBOSS that the head office calls During the configuration of L BOSS Comm tab settings if you select the communication method for head office to call stores an additional Connection tab appears in the L BOSS terminals configuration Terminals i Terminal 5 P01 STORE 001 Program 001001 LPOS 001001 P02 STORE 002 Program 001002 LPOS 001002 PA
290. ing purchase order transfer adjustment and count screens there are both menu options and shortcut buttons Here is an explanation for each function File Review F8 This function allows you to select an inventory transaction that has been posted to the database When you review a transaction it may be possible to print print labels print shelf labels or delete the transaction Not all functions are available for all transaction types Delete This function can be used to delete an open purchase order that has not been received yet Print or Print worksheet if an order is in progress Use this option to print the transaction in report form as required Print shelf labels This function will generate one shelf label for each different product in the transaction assuming the label option was purchased and the product set up is complete Print item labels This function will generate an item price label for each product in the transaction assuming the label option was purchased and the product set up is complete Save F11 This function will save the transaction you have opened without posting it to the database Post F12 This function records the transaction to the database This function cannot be undone Exit Edit Cost edit F4 This function opens the cost table so you can modify the cost of an item permanently rather than changing the line cost within the current transaction only Add item F2 This function posts the cu
291. ing displayed You can do this by clicking with the mouse anywhere on the list You can also press Enter to move from the Search box to the current list and move up or down the list to select the record you were searching for File Menu File Menu Overview The Maintenance application s File menu contains common options such as login logout language setting etc but is also dynamic Depending on the table being edited the options in the File menu change to include utilities designed to test or verify system integrity for the selected data type For example it is important to verify that all items have links to sub departments When the item table editor is open the File menu changes to include an option to check for PLU links Not all tables have utilities or additional options in the File menu The Send to host option of the File menu options is only available when the Host active option is selected to return data to a headquarter system The send to host option will output the changes made on the local L BOSS machine back to a host system This means that changes to prices accounts and other files can be made at a store and sent back up to the host system Select this option for the tables that may be edited locally in a store When this option is selected for any item in a table it means that any change made to any record in that table will be returned to host For example you cannot send item 1 to host but not send item 2 If
292. installation time and usually not changed L BOSS File Menu Options Login Allows system operators to gain access to system applications Logout Security feature that allows the communications to continue while protecting access Language Change the application s display language English French only View Internal Process Watch what s happening behind the scene View Polling Status View which machines are online Execute Command File Force the system to execute a command or event Deploy Individual File Send one type of information at a time Configuration Panel Company information network and database configuration security system Date Conversion A calendar and date conversion utility Messages Send messages over the network to other stations Background Change the look of the L BOSS desktop Show Tips Helpful hints at startup Exit Close the L BOSS application stopping all communications Login Logging into the System As with any critical data system security is always an issue L BOSS offers configurable security levels so that users can only access functions that are available to their assigned security level For example you probably want the store manager to be allowed to add remove items but cashiers should not be allowed When a user logs into the system they can only activate or use options that their security level allows them When L BOSS is first launched the application runs at the no us
293. inted on the register receipt when a button containing the function is used Functions are created and modified using the L BOSS Maintenance application Buttons are created and modified using the POS Set up module accessed from the L BOSS Modules menu Functions also have a relation to data that appears on a sales report such as functions that collect amounts To track the information entered using a function it must be linked to a totalizer Functions that do not collect information do not have totalizer links Totalizers are created by selecting Totalizer from the Maintenance application s Register menu From the Maintenance application s Register menu select Functions mate o Bv Access Fune 1401 V No User v New Host REG bal IV Cashier y Clerk v Assistant A Cah Z Manager paeen E Ra I Programmer Alpha parameters This example shows a Function table record Func This is a number used by the system to sort the function list We suggest that you leave the existing functions numbered as they are If you cannot locate a function you need for the register operations you can add new functions Remember that functions that collect amounts must be linked to totalizers for reporting so if you create a new function you may need a new totalizer to link to Host This is a reference used to advise the back end which functions should be sent to the front end Desc This description field will b
294. ion e Nocustomer account balances will be available until the system returns to normal but the L POS front end station will prompt the cashier with a server not available continue anyway error message At this point it is up to the store manager to allow or not allow account charges during a network down 2001 2008 Logivision 10 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 1 4 Data Maintenance Controlling Database Size Except for the POS hardware configurations such as printer and scanner settings L BOSS keeps all data in database tables The original size and growth in size of the database tables depends on the number of items and other factors such as the amount of transactions per day Daily transactions which include PLU sales information are probably the biggest factor taking up large amounts of space Large amounts of data can also slow down the processing times for database operations Some database types are more robust but eventually even Paradox or MSSQL databases cannot handle the amount of data Data cleanup tasks are automated with the Task Manager and are included in a default L BOSS installation Instead of keeping all daily data L BOSS provides automated utilities that consolidate sales information into weekly monthly and yearly totals The consolidation process is also automated by the Task Manager and greatly reduces the amount of space the information occupies in the database report tables Dail
295. ion If the Projected markup calculates evenly the Projected and Actual fields will show the same amount It is also possible to set the Last digit field to force L BOSS to calculate the markup then substitute the last digit for example all prices end in 9 L BOSS just replaces the last price digit For example you enter 9 in the Last digit and the item s price calculated by markup is 1 81 L BOSS will use 1 89 or if was is 1 89 If the last digit is 1 and the price was 1 89 L BOSS will use 1 81 Often this makes the Projected and Actual markups different The MARKUP calculation takes a percentage of the cost and adds it to the cost to obtain a selling price An example of a markup calculation an item costs 1 00 and you want to markup the item by 30 L BOSS calculates 30 of the cost 0 30 and adds that to the cost to obtain a sales price of 1 30 note that this is a MARGIN of 23 1 Margin vs Markup Comparison Chart 2001 2008 Logivision 88 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Margin Markup Margin Markup Margin Markup 4 8 5 0 22 0 28 3 37 5 60 0 5 0 5 3 23 1 30 0 39 0 63 9 7 0 7 5 24 0 31 6 39 4 65 0 8 0 8 7 25 0 33 3 40 0 66 7 9 0 9 9 25 9 35 0 41 0 69 5 9 1 10 0 26 0 35 1 41 2 70 0 10 0 11 1 27 0 37 0 42 0 72 4 11 0 12 4 28 0 38 9 42 9 75 0 12 0 13 6 28 6 40 0 43 0 75 4 13 0 15 0 29 0 40 8 44 0 78 6 14 0 16 3 30 0 42 9 44 4 80 0 15 0 17 6 31 0 45 0 45 0 81 8 16 0 19 0 32 0 47 1 45 9 85 0 1
296. ion in the same day Ctrl PgDn moves ahead one full date Use the track bar to the right of the scroll bar to move up and down the transaction list for the date you selected The track bar moves proportionally to the size of the file indicated below the Store and Terminal numbers Press Esc Exit to close the EJ program Press F3 Search to extend the EJ window to the following layout 2001 2008 Logivision Electronic Journal 263 4 Electronic Journal Viewer Professional IOl x File Edit View Print Help Transaction Cashier Customer 106 Programmer F11 Delete ine Date __ Time Cust Store Terminal 2000 01 20 09 56 41 on on E12 Insettine 20701700 6 1 Kb F4 F5 FE F Fa MELITA CORFER FILT 100 Field N24 Operand Trans a Item discount 13 0 13 Transaction j fics gt x PLU 2 SCOTT HAND TOWELS Z PLY 9 38 Tl Item discount 13 A ZZ Bottle deposit 0 20 PLUS 3 SUNDAY TIMES NEWSPAPER 3 00 Item discount 13 39 Bottle deposit 0 20 PLU 1 MELITA COFFEE FILT 1 00 Item discount 13 0 13 PLUS 2 SCOTT HAND TOWELS 2 PLY 9 38 Tl x Ese Exit F2 Date Palp Prv PaDni Net F3 Search This example shows the Electronic Journal Professional version The EJ program includes search functions The search tool allows you to set a maximum of eight criteria to find the data you need For example you could search for all customers w
297. ipt 10 07 04 THU 0 01 1 192 168 0 1 02 2 192 168 0 2 03 3 192 168 0 3 0010 12 48TM 3 PC Transmission Information Setting Mode Lock Set Position 68 for 1 ST A Enter PC IP Address and depress Example 192 168 000 100 B Enter 2 ST and enter the port setting 49155 depress DO NOT CHANGE THE PORT C Press AT TL Thank you Call again Your receipt 10 07 04 THU 0 PX168 1 192 168 0 100 2 49155 2001 2008 Logivision 290 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 0009 12 24TM 4 Hourly Range Table Setting Submode 7 For report purposes in L BOSS the full range of hours have to be programmed as shown in the example 7 for 0100 0200 0300 0400 0500 0600 0700 Continue through 2400 AT TL Thank you Call again Your receipt 10 10 04 THU 01 P07 1 00 TM 2 00 TM 3 00 TM 4 00 TM 5 00 TM 6 00 TM 7 00 TM 8 00 TM 9 00 TM 10 00 TM 11 00 TM 12 00 TM 13 00 TM 14 00 TM 15 00 TM 16 00 TM 17 00 TM 18 00 TM 19 00 TM 20 00 TM 21 00 TM 22 00 TM 23 00 TM 24 00 TM Sample LAN Configuration The TEC MA 1595 use a fixed IP address If registers are added to an existing network check with stores network personnel for IP address subnet mask and gateway address that can be used If the register is in a standalone network one PC using L BOSS any IP address subnet mask and gateway address can be used follow standard
298. ironment this menu 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 57 provides controls such as tiling or cascading views Help Launch this help document or view the About for version number and contact information Several buttons that give direct access to frequently used menu choices have been placed on an icon bar below the menu choices in the Maintenance application Right click anywhere on the Icon bar to add or remove a menu option For example to add the Gift certificate option to a direct access button right click anywhere on the icons area and place a checkmark beside Gift Certificate To remove an option from the icons area right click anywhere and remove the checkmark from the option to be removed 3 2 Common Data Edit Toolbars Common Data Table Toolbar Regardless of which data table you edit the Maintenance application provides a common set of tools on a toolbar at the top of the data table editor The Maintenance main menus change as well depending on the table you are programming The toolbar is common to all tables you edit NOTE f you have the Bubble help set to on you can hold the mouse cursor over a tool to see a Short description of that tool s function To set the help on or off close all data tables then open the File menu The help bubble option acts as a toggle displaying a check mark when set to on Top Bar Tools abe HY Cdr Bo The tool allows you to post the changes
299. is assigned to the product or products in PLU maintenance For example every 10 purchases of a 10 pound bag of dog food entitles the customer to the next bag for free If the purchase is only applicable on one specific item you will assign a unique Promo ID code to that item Then you create the Free item record under the account menu Free item menu If you want to allow different flavors of the dog food to accumulate together you would enter the same Promo ID code to each of the different flavors of dog food Then you create the Free item record under the account menu Free item menu Rest code This is a link to the Restrictor table programmed in the POS Setup module Restrictors are used to prohibit the sale of products during a certain time periods or to restrict items to a maximum quantity Select the Restrictor required for this item Client Age This flag is available to restrict the sale of age sensitive products such as tobacco or alcohol When this flag is set the first item entered will prompt for customer age Oper Age This flag is available to restrict the sale of age sensitive products such as tobacco or alcohol When this flag is set the POS will verify the age declared in the set up of the operator signed on Coupon family This field is used to validate coupon family for cross reference when scanning vendor coupons The coupon family is part of the vendor coupon number In this coupon number 51234511102 the bold digits 111
300. is used when the price on file should be discounted by a pre defined dollar amount For price levels 2 or greater a discount entered here will be removed from that level s price If the price level being used has no price entered the discount programmed will be removed 2001 2008 Logivision 86 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 from the price of the item on level one Disc is used when the price on file should be discounted by a pre defined percentage For price levels 2 or greater a discount entered here will be removed from that level s price If the price level being used has no price entered the discount programmed will be removed from the level one price of the item N B The account discount table does not over ride the prohibit discount status of individual PLU s If you need to give a discount to customers on some PLU s even when the item is set to prohibit discount you must add any value in the item discount for the specified price level Access item maintenance and the price tab Enter any value in the item discount field Price F112 This discount will not be given to the customer The customer will receive the discount from the related sub department as programmed in the customer discount table The value in F112 only means that the prohibit dicount flag should be ignored if there is a discount rate in the discount table S R P The suggested retail price can be used to show the customer the price that t
301. ities The most commonly used drop down menu options have been included as buttons on the L BOSS desktop to facilitate access In other words some drop down menu options lead to the same location as clicking that option s icon counterpart Not all options have buttons and must be launched from the drop down menu Options that are not often required or single use setup tools used to configure the system at installation time do not have main screen buttons If an option does not appear to have an button use the drop down menus to locate and launch that option Using the keyboard As with most Windows style applications the drop down menu titles and options are also accessible using the keyboard This can actually be faster than navigating with the mouse after you ve memorized the keystrokes involved for a specific task The keystrokes associated with menu titles and options are underlined For example the File menu has an underscore under the F 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 1 2 e Hold down the Alt key on the keyboard e Simultaneously press the F key e The File menu opens The options in the drop down menus also have underscored letters Once a drop down menu is open you can press the letter that is associated with the option you wish to launch You can also use the up or down arrow keys to select the menu option then press Enter to launch the option Within applicati
302. itor window is empty when first opened It is used to view the results of the SQL commands in table format with the field numbers as column headers not as a formatted report after pressing the Test toolbar button Tool Bar Tools Test tests the currently loaded query and displays the results in table format Use this to test changes to the query and get immediate results View Qry Opens a panel displaying the current version of the loaded report query The panel also contains an execute option that runs the query displaying the results in table format like the test option Re Read If you make changes to the report file for example adding new prompts this 2001 2008 Logivision Report System 195 forces the editor to re read the code and refresh the upper right pane that shows the prompts used in the code Save The save button is greyed out until you actually change the loaded query This saves the modifications in the sq file Close Closes the Report SQL Editor window If changes were made to the query the close process will prompt to save the modifications NOTE The editor has a SIL field decoder feature field numbers like F1024 While editing the code if the cursor is anywhere in a field number the field s description is displayed in the Editor window s top bar beside the report file name Click any F field in the query to see which field is referenced SQL Editor Cashiers sql Op
303. izer number If you do not want to use the default bottle deposit number for all deposit 2001 2008 Logivision 122 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 6 5 2 amounts enter the totalizer number to use here The related totalizer must be created with the proper values in the Totalizer set up If you add a totalizer in the bottle link table set up it will override the totalizer you set in L POS Posetup System Totalizer tab Environmental fee In some areas non returnable bottles no deposit carry an additional fee to help pay for the handling re cycling Description Enter the description you want to use for this fee This description will not be used on the POS it is only a reference on the back end system The description used for the Environment Fee is taken from the totalizer you assign to this record Totalizer number Set the totalizer you want to use for this fee It will be both printed on the register receipt and used on all reports for this fee Tax flags Set the taxes required on this item When you edit the bottle link table the file menu includes the send to host option Send to host The Send to host option of the File menu options is only available when the Host active option is selected to return data to a headquarter system The send to host option will allow output of the changes made on the local L BOSS machine back to a host system This means that changes can be made at a store and sent
304. k the screen image You can press the F2 function button on your keyboard Restricting the use of the mouse should speed up the process considerably Posting the order to the database You must Post the order before it can be printed in final purchase order form So if you are sure that the order information is correct press the F12 Post button Now L BOSS will actually record the order and save it to the database At this point a confirmation prompt appears Answer yes to continue 2001 2008 Logivision 218 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Print Options Print Print shelf labels Print Print items labels Close Printing an order worksheet You may need to print a worksheet before finalizing the order Whenever an order is begun the Worksheet button can be used to print an order worksheet This form can be used to verify the suggested order list in the stock room or on the sales floor Any adjustments can be noted on the worksheet and entered back into the order before it is posted Once an order is posted it cannot be modified You can receive against it or delete it but you cannot modify it Saving the order If you are interrupted while you are creating an order it may be necessary to save the order to complete it later L BOSS allows you to Save the order without posting it to the database Whenever you need to press the F11 Save function to terminate the order you are working on without losing it
305. last installation step is to send the current L BOSS information to the register The Deploy and Replace Event Task must be executed with the register s terminal as the Target 2001 2008 Logivision 302 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 P Task list mfx Description Scheduled Load Nextevert Deploy all changes Manual Auto 2008 11 17 3 ECR communication lt DIR gt Unitech Directory lt DIR gt L HT HAL Terminal Monitor Manual DeplogPDT Pump images Manual Auto Deploy security table to Pump server Manual Deploy pump images Manual Deploy load to ALL Manual Deploy screen Manual Deploy amp Replace Manual Deploy all amp Replace Manual Update program Manual Send soft date Manual Daily maintenance Manual Auto 2008 11 17 1 Monthly maintenance Manual Auto 2008 12 01 3 Use this command to send program updates to target terminals You will be prompted to select a terminal group and to select the files to be deployed By default the system will select all files and subdirectories from the LBOSS Programs folder You are responsible to place the files in the correct folders on the L BOSS machine If you are sending a new version of the POS EE file to the POS terminals place it in the Execute Edit Add Close After successfully programming the register with the PLU and Clerk tables the basic installation is complete The last factors to consider have to do with testing o
306. late Editor 320 Form editor 322 Main Menus 322 tools andmenus 322 Form Manager Main Menus 323 Form Manager Module 319 FREEZE 18 19 Func 158 Function access security 158 Function Table Programming 158 Cx Gas PLU 76 General Ledger 164 Generating Item or Shelf Labels 186 Gift certificate valid for 35 Gift Certificates 173 Global Modification 103 Glossary of Terms 332 Graphic objects 320 grayed out 76 Grid Size 322 Groups 167 H Hash Item 76 Help 52 help manual 8 Hints 49 Host 37 active 37 data communications 37 path 37 Port 37 Tab Settings 37 How polling works 9 icons 7 Ignore Un posted changes 68 Image File Naming Convention 95 Image objects 320 Image Type and Size Restrictions 95 instant deploy tool 108 Interest Rate 149 internal commands 22 internal exchange system 17 Internal process 19 Inv Inventory tracking 91 Inventory Adjustments 234 Inventory application 196 IP or Domain name 37 Item PLU maintenance 71 Cost Tab 88 ECL Tab 96 Inventory Tab 91 Object Tab 75 Picture Tab 95 POS Tab 76 Price Tab 81 Quick Tab 73 Sales Tab 94 item data integrity 61 Item Detail 75 Item flags 73 item maintenance screens 73 Item Maintenance Utilities 63 Item Navigation Menu 175 Item number 73 Item related tables 120 Item Table Tabs and Fields 71 Item tables 120 Bottle Link Programming 120 Category Table Programming 123 Mix amp Match Table Programming 125 Price Level Table Progra
307. ld have a price on level 1 This tests the item tables for any items that do not have a price on price level 1 and opens a list box If there are no items without a price the list is empty If there are items without a price you can double click an item to edit it right away You can then either edit or delete the item in question Repeat the process until all items have been dealt with NOTE tems can exist without a price The Maintenance application will not stop you from creating an item then leaving the item table without entering a price No sub department Items in the database should all be linked to a sub department Sub departments allow for selective reporting and item group programming For more about sub departments see the Sub department help in this manual Use this test to find any items that are not linked to a sub department Selling items that are not linked to sub departments will lead to discrepancies in the item sub department and department sales reports As with the item test a list appears allowing you to select the item for immediate editing Unreferenced sub department Although the Maintenance application has drop down lists to allow you to select the correct sub department for an item you can also enter the sub department manually This makes it possible to enter a non existent sub department as a link The system will emit a warning but does not stop you from continuing Use this test to find any items that are
308. le columns to be displayed Once you press OK the query is saved and a new button will appear on the item screen Press this button to execute the custom query Delete POS Target Items are linked to several types of targets POS targets are the front end terminals that require the programming in the POS table including descriptor status etc Often there is only one POS target for items all terminals except in multi store situations for example where some stores are under different state taxation laws You can delete POS targets from an item if they are no longer sent to the target to delete Items must have at least one 1 valid POS target Delete PRICE Target The PRICE targets are the terminals that the price is sent to Once again in most situations there is only one Price target all the terminals In multi store conditions some store will not have the same pricing It is possible to remove unwanted price targets Items must have at least one 1 valid PRICE target Item List Per POS also PRICE COST Target In situations where there are separate targets for pricing or POS information you can list the items that are in a specific target for PRICE COST or POS targets Previous Next Add Delete Record These options are the same as their toolbar counterparts Calculate Price Before using this option items must have a cost and a value in the Projected field You must also decide which method L BOSS will use to calculate
309. le printers and options will be available through the printer dialogue window Setting a default printer for reports Reports are normally printed to the default printer as defined in Windows printer settings You can set a different printer to use with L BOSS if you cannot redefine the default windows printer You will need to make a few changes to the system settings Refer to this help guide under the L BOSS gt File gt Configuration gt Misc Setting a different printer for specific reports Refer to report properties for information on choosing a specific printer for each report s data output Printing Labels Generating Item or Shelf Labels NOTE The Label utility must be registered for use Although L BOSS ships with several default label templates your Logivision dealer may have provided other label formats for your installation ALSO Items must be associated with a label type and set to print before they are selectable during the label printing process For help on setting up the item to be able to print labels see the Item Label Setup help page under the Working with items Maintenance application help section The Label printing process follows the same general steps as printing other reports From the Report selection utility select the type of labels to print then click the Preview button 2001 2008 Logivision Report System 187 y Report selection o x Label Type B
310. les From disk Cancel Once you see the file LRegister v 2 0 0 2 ROM 1 007 1 008 on the Available loads list press the Load selected files button This will install the option files needed to use L Register Terminal set up L BOSS Terminal Table Setup Please refer to the L BOSS guide s terminal set up for a complete explanation of creating terminals and targets with L BOSS This explains the difference when working with the TEC ECR As with any terminal within L BOSS ECRs must be present as terminals for communications to function normally For example when the Deploy All Changes event is executed L BOSS relies on the Terminal Table to know which terminals should receive the communication ECRs can only be reached through the Master ECR which then conveys information to other ECRs in line 2001 2008 Logivision L Register interface 295 Terminals 001 TEC MA1595 PAL Store program 001901 LBOSS 001901 RAL Store total SAL Store exchange e fe f R Store Terminal Descriptor joo foon fTEc1595 Terminal type E1595 Inactive T Path Terminal s InBox fc LBOSS LRedgister register e Group __ Descriptor Terminal s OutBox AL Store exchange S Voutbosi Report I Items Terminal s program path V Exchange Price Program I Cost e Terminal s Inbox Instead of pointing to a physical disk location the Terminal s Inbox tells L
311. lication s Module menu by selecting Pick up The pickup loan and declaration screen will appear The screen has two types of columns the gray columns cannot be edited and only show amounts that have already been posted The white new columns are used to enter transaction amounts by cashier that once posted are added to amounts already existing for the corresponding gray column NOTE f you have entered and posted incorrect amounts you cannot edit the grey columns To modify existing entries you must make a new perhaps negative entry for the transaction type in question For example if the declared amount for cash tender was supposed to be 1024 10 but was entered incorrectly as 102 41 and was posted you can either enter the difference as a new declaration and post which will add the new entry to the previous or you can enter 102 41 post and re start from zero 2001 2008 Logivision 250 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Pick up 6 11 2003 D x Peter In Drawer In Drawer Pickup JLoan New Pick New Loan New Decl Declared Ovi Shit_ 2 22 1 00 774 85 0 00 1 00 Debit card MASTER CARD Lotto terminal win Lotto ticket win Bottle return Paints redeemed 6 0 00 5 60 0 00 0 00 Refund ticket Paid out Recy on account Layaway tendered New Gift Certificat 6 0 00 5 60 0 00 0 00 gt 10 0 00 10 73 0 00 0 00 44 1 00 785 58 0 00 000 000 000 0 00
312. list only the items that match exactly with the data you enter in the search field Begins with will list all items that begin with the same data you enter in the search field Ends with will list all items that end with the same data you enter in the search field Includes will list all items that include the same data you enter in the search field Not equal to will list all items that do not match the data you enter in the search field Filtering with a Currency Field When you set a filter in a currency field the search criteria is different as shown below Right click in a currency field such as price to obtain the filter window Currency field Equal to and en This example shows the Filter setting tool Equal to will list only the items that match exactly with the data you enter in the search field Greater than will list only the items whose price is greater than the data you enter in the search field Smaller than will list only the items whose price is less than the data you enter in the search field Different than will list the items whose data is different that the data entered in the filter 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 105 field Between will list the items that are between the 2 amounts entered Filtering with a Logical Field A Logical Field is a field that has only two 2 possible values for example On or OFF True or False selected or not selected When
313. lity is stopped you must exit and re launch the L BOSS application to re start it NOTE You can also launch the polling viewer by double clicking the system tray icon or right clicking it and selecting the View status option The context menu right click also has both the Close and Quit Polling options explained above Viewer Display windows Top window Each line displayed in the polling viewer includes the exact time to the millisecond as well as the store and terminal number If the server cannot reach a POS station for sales information the viewer displays the error Example top window line 13 58 18 130 Polling 001 024 Bottom window The polling viewer s bottom window shows all the POS terminals presently configured in the L BOSS station s terminal list their store and terminal number current status and machine network name Selecting a terminal from the list will display that terminal s location information in the status line at the window s bottom bar It is also possible to stop or force the polling process for one or all terminals from the View polling bottom window After selecting a terminal from the terminal list clicking the right mouse button opens a menu allowing you to Pause Use this to stop one terminal from communicating Communicate now Forces that terminal to begin polling immediately Stop All Stops all terminals in the terminal list from communicating Start All Forces all terminals to poll immedi
314. ll affect certain utilities throughout the L BOSS application where multi store information is required NOTE f you are not in a multi store control situation selecting this option is not suggested Although it will not harm the installation it will cause the system to prompt you to select a target store for many everyday operations adding unnecessary steps to the operations 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS Main Menus 27 The Configure format button opens a window where you can set the telephone number formatting Example e f you enter 450 4 L BOSS will replace any 7 digit entry with a preceeding 450 and place decimals as the digit group separators e f you enter 4 4 L BOSS will not replace any digits but will place decimals as the digit group separators The Advanced button opens a list of options that control the behavior of the system The software compiled date is displayed for convenience The Updates until date is shown as a warning so that you do not update with a newer version that the license does not permit you to operate with For example if the Updates until field shows 10 31 2007 you can install an update for any version that is compiled on or before that date e The LBossins exe is used to install a full version of the software onto a new system or to install a complete upgrade to a new version During this process the install program will warn you whether you can run the
315. llection POS Point Of Sale the front end terminal where sales transactions are performed Post Save to the database only Posting does not Deploy send Relational Database Any type of database where data is kept in tables and linked with other tables by a common key field or combination of key fields Risk Level Associated with customer accounts a table that contains information about credit limit Customers are then assigned a risk level that establishes their credit limit SIL Standard Interchange Language An extensive industry standard data dictionary and established numbering system for data fields that relate to the retail business used to transport information in a common format SIL files combine data and the SQL command necessary to export or import data SQL Standard Query Language an industry standard database language used to manipulate extract and store data in relational tables Target Any terminal or group of terminals that must be sent to or received from Including portable data terminals back office stations front end terminals Targets have a specific naming convention explained in the terminal table programming help page in this manual Task The actual job or process usually associated with an event Command files contain the specific code for individual tasks Terminal Any system station front or back end computer or other data device Normally part of a target group UPC A UPC E EAN Code39
316. lone 2 Backup Master 3 16 Satellites B Enter 3 ST and enter the IP Address for that terminal Standalone Address 3 will be setup with Master settings Example 192 168 000 001 Master Standalone 192 168 000 002 Backup Master 192 168 000 003 016 Satellite C Enter 4 ST and enter the Master Terminals IP Address Standalone Address 4 will be setup with Master settings Example 192 168 000 001 D Press AT TL address 5 Subnet Mask and address 6 Default Gateway are left at the default setting as in the example below Thank you Call again Your receipt 10 O7 7 O04 THU 0 PX 17 7 1 2 0 3 192 1608 U 4 L92 LOS Qa L 5 209 20082998 VU 6 0 0 0 U 0008 12 48TM 2001 2008 Logivision L Register interface 289 Enter the Register Number and Depress Example 1 Master 2 Backup Master 2 Terminal Connection Table Master Only Mode Lock Set Position RTR ON SFKC Programming Submode 76 in the MA 1595 Programming Manual SFKC for RTR 138 69 for A Enter In line ID Number 01 to 16 and depress ST B Enter Register Number and depress C Enter IP Address and depress D Repeat A through C until all terminals in the system have been set up to 16 E Press AT TL Example 1 ST 1 192 168 000 001 2 ST 2 192 168 000 002 3 ST 3 192 168 000 003 AT TL Thank you Call again Your rece
317. ls that are part of the same target group for that file type This means that if a price is changed at store 3 and all stores share the information on that product the change will make it to the other stores in the next communication cycle To force a change to make its way back up to the head office you must press the Satellite from the menu for that record Using the deploy all changes option will not return any information to the host system It is an item by item decision that can only be activated one item at a time with the satellite icon Totalizer Table Totalizer Table Programming WWARNING The totalizer table is normally programmed for you at installation time and should not be modified unless you are certain of the consequences Modifying the totalizers can seriously affect the report results Please consult your Logivision dealer if you require additional support Totalizers are used to collect the sales or transaction data that was entered using a function on the system 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 165 A Totalizer oj x ate dr Bv Tler r Description TOTAL SALES Alternate description VENTES TOTALES Files FIN CLK HOU CLT D or C Debit Credit General Ledger Report section Tizr sequence 600 9999 Report formula BLD This example shows a Totalizer table record The totalizer number determines the section and position of each total
318. lucode IV Assistant Alternate IV Manager Dese PLU code IV Owner V Programmer Alpha parameters TOTAL SALES 3 Net Sales 5000 Dept mask Functions ath 4d Bv Func 715 Host SAL X Assistant Desc Subdepartment Manager Seale Sous d partement iv ae Programmer Alpha parameters Access No User New Cashier i w ed Iv IV Clerk Iv IV IV 2 TOTAL SALES 3 Net Sales 5000 Dept mask On both function 710 and 715 we have added totalizer 5000 in the bottom of the window and assigned the operand S 2001 2008 Logivision 162 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 If you want to collect department information you need to modify the PLU function 710 and the Sub department function 715 or the Department function 716 You would modify the sub department function 715 if you assigned open sub department buttons on the L POS keyboard You would modify the department function 716 if you assigned open department buttons on the L POS keyboard Functions ca fe 4 gt yv Access Func 710 No User New Cashier Clerk Assistant Manager Owner Programmer Host SAL X Desc Plu code ptemate PL code Alpha parameters KIKIKI T TOTAL SALES Net Sales Dept mask 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application Functions fe Yo gt Bv Func 715 Host SAL Desc Subdepartment elles Sous d partement Alpha parameters
319. lue greater than 90 days will compromise the PCI DSS compliance level of your system If you modify this flag you will be prompted to accept responsibility in the event of data security breaches Reset password Use this button to clear the password for this operator Note on passwords Back end passwords must contain at least 1 uppercase letter 1 lower case letter and one number Passwords must be a minimum of 8 characters Front end User must change their password Set this flag to require a password change at next logon to the back end system User account is disabled This flag will be set whenever the operator tries to log on unsuccessfully more than 3 times in succession To re enable this operator immediately remove this check and deploy the record with the satellite Reset password Use this button to clear the password for this operator Functions Table Function Table Programming WARNING The Function table should only be modified by programmers Tampering with the Function table can create serious system failure or inaccurate reports We suggest you consult your Logivision dealer if you require new functions Functions are required in order to make entries on the L POS system Functions are assigned parameters and then embedded within buttons that are placed on the POS 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 159 keyboard or on the POS touch screen The description of a function is pr
320. m and database server have adequate time to load all the required services you can add an argument or switch to the shortcut that starts L BOSS Delay 20 will force L BOSS to count a 20 second delay before loading Set the delay required on your system Logout Logging off the system To maintain data security and to prevent unwanted access to the system it is important to logout or log off the system when you are not working with it Logout Use this option to sign off the system leaving the application on the no user security level NOTE L BOSS will still execute any scheduled operations including polling or other communications even if no user is logged Language Setting the Language It is possible to change the language displayed in the L BOSS application At this time there 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS Main Menus 17 are two possible languages English or French e Changing the language does not affect the way that functions or options behave e You do not have to re start the application It is also possible to configure L BOSS to display a specific language based on user preferences When a user operator logs in to the system the application switches immediately to that user s preferred language Click here to go to the Operator Table help page now Language Use this option to change the current language displayed in the L BOSS application After selecting the language menu op
321. magine the case when you want to 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 97 sell a coffee and a croissant for a total of 1 99 even though the normal price is 2 48 combined coffee at 79 and croissant at 1 69 You cannot use a mix match group because 2 of either product would trigger the 1 99 price and you don t want to allow 2 croissant or 2 coffee to be sold at that deal price So we move to the ECL table and create a new item that will give a 49 discount when a coffee and croissant are sold together Set up 1 Create a new PLU item called Coffee amp Croissant promo 2 Set the sub department for this new item to where the discount will be reduced 3 Set the Store Coupon flag on this item it will make the price negative so this PLU acts like a coupon 4 Set the price of this item to be the price reduction price for this item combination 5 Add a first qualifying record in the ECL tab of the new Coffee amp Croissant promo item Set this to type ITM and enter the PLU number for the Coffee 7 Add another record to the ECL table of the Coffee amp Croissant promo item Set this to ITM and enter the PLU number of the Croissant You have now instructed L POS to sell the Coffee amp Croissant promo item automatically when the 2 products on the ECL tab are entered in the transaction 8 Deploy all changes to the POS A PLU Oj x wate eX 4d By tim ltem number F2 0000000009001 Active Next Co
322. mation Click here to access the Maintenance help files Reports L BOSS includes tools to generate view and print reports lists labels etc It also includes access to the report configuration settings Report system help files PosSetup Common configuration of front end stations screens peripherals etc Use the L POS help file link to access help on the Pos Setup application The Poshlp chm file can also be opened individually from the LBoss folder or from the lane s Poswin folder A printable pdf version of the file can be obtained from your L POS reseller 2001 2008 Logivision 52 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 2 3 2 4 Entry Module Receive Order merchandise fix inventory quantities etc Help with Entry module Events Tasks The Event Task launcher scheduler Help on Events Tasks View Logs View system events system in out boxes contents etc Monitor This utility allows L BOSS to view L POS transactions as they occur used to monitor cashiers Help with Monitoring Journal or Tracker Displays the actual sales information from the front end L POS stations in sales journal format The EJ also includes poweful search and review functions EJ Help file LBoss Desktop Icon shortcuts Several of these menu options have corresponding icons on the L BOSS desktop You can limit access to these applications or utilities using the security access For help on configuring the security system see
323. mber actual search from the Edit menu L Tracker will memorize the search and ask you to give ita description This description will then be placed on the top section of the Edit menu for repeated use in future sessions By memorizing your frequently used searches L Tracker will save you time when you need to locate specific data in the sales journal files Erase actual search Use this option to remove the currently selected search option from the top section of the Edit menu To remove the search statement first you need to open it by accessing the Edit menu and clicking on that search statement Then use the Erase actual search option to delete it from the list View menu e PLU number This option allows you to view the PLU number in the details area of the transaction review screen Print menu Several options can be used to obtain printed copies of the transaction results e Current transaction details will print the transaction displayed in the details window e All transaction details will print the details for each transaction displayed on the results list e Summary transaction list will print a summary list of all the transactions that contain the specific data defined in the custom search The summary list will show the transaction number data searched for and the amount A total will be available at the end of the report The summary list is useful in situations where you want to see details because a suspicious total appeared on
324. mber created in LBOSS Choose First x digits copy to place the copy identifier digits at the start of the PLU number Or select Last x digits copy to place the copy identifier at the end of the actual PLU number You may also determine that the PLU number itself is a specific length and the remaining digits are used as the copy number following the same logic as above Select First x digits Item or Last x digits copy if this is the case You can also define how many digits are required to identify the copy If you never have more than 9 of the same item select 1 in the digits entry This field corresponds to the value x referred to in the First x digits copy field If you never have more than 9 copies of a film one digit will be enough to differentiate between the films Take the example of item number 12345 which is the PLU code for the film Titanic If you had 4 copies of the film you could number them 123451 123452 123453 12344 if you were to set the configuration of the copy identifiers to use the Last x digit and set 1 in the number of digits field L POS will understand to search all 4 items when you request status for item 12345 Note When no copy identifier is required the value of digits should be set to zero to speed up inventory queries on the POS system This would be the case when you never have more than one copy of a film or when you receive pre coded films that cannot be fit with the L POS masking system Type
325. mber of inventory adjustment records in the daily item movement table Receiving records Total number of inventory receiving records in the daily item movement table Transfer records Total number of inventory transfer ecords in the daily item movement table Order records Total number of inventory order records in the daily item movement table Price levels Total number of records for sales by price level in the daily item movement table Inventory before cleanup Total number of inventory related records prior to the last cleanup date in the daily item movement table Delete This will remove any inventory records from the file that are dated prior to the most recent cleanup performed This will speed up system Executing this file means that you will no longer be able to review inventory transactions prior to the last cleanup date There are no other negative effects COUNT before cleanup Total number of inventory count records prior to the last cleanup date in the daily item movement table Delete This will remove any count records from the file that are dated prior to the most recent ccleanup performed This will soeed up system Executing this file means that you will no longer be able to view inventory counts prior to the last cleanup date In reality Reports tab This tab displays the number of records for each report table on the system Account Related Maintenance Account Customer Related Tables NOTE The accounts
326. mming 124 Tare Table Programming 122 Vendor Table Programming 126 2001 2008 Logivision 338 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 K Keep listening 37 keystrokes 7 jis Label 76 Label Printing Options 186 label to start printing from 186 label type selection tool 112 Language 16 L BOSS File Menu Options 14 LBoss mainmenu 14 Leading 0 30 Line Tool 322 Linking functions to totalizers 158 List Reports 179 Live communication 37 Load Files Tab Settings 43 Load selected files 43 Loans 249 log 16 log off 16 Logon 15 Logging 15 Login 15 logout 16 Log Utility 257 Logical Field 103 Logs and Messages 257 LQD 81 main descriptor 73 MainMenu 14 Maintenance 68 Edit menu Overview 68 File Menu Overview 61 PLU Menu Options 71 Maintenance Application Overview 54 Maintenance File Menu options 63 Maintenance Menus and Icons 55 Managing the Customer File 143 Manual Weight 76 Margin 81 Actual 81 Last digit 81 overcost 81 Projected 81 Margin vs Markup Comparison Chart 81 Markup 81 Memorizing a new navigation 175 Memorizing the Item Table s Tab Order 175 Merge lane report data together 37 Messages 30 Messages Utility 48 Method type 81 109 Min Minimum on hand 91 minimum security level 45 Misc Tab 35 Mix amp Match Table Programming 125 Modifying Adding Automating Tasks 253 Modifying L BOSS Report SQL Code 193 Modules 51 Monitoring Statistics 285 Monitoring Utility 285 Monthl
327. move it Fields can be streched or shinked the same way by selecting the field and using the Ctrl Arrow combination Adding fields to the quick page Open the tab that contains the field to be added Right click in the field Return to the quick page and click on the quick tab in the area that you want to locate the new field Other data can be placed on the quick screen by using the pull down window that displays select the field to ada If you decide to show more than one price level you need to select price level n then assign the field on the page When this is done right click that new field and adjust the level to the one you want to view Only the base price and base price quantity can be shown for levels 2 and greater You can also set a tabbing sequence for the fields placed on the quick page Press the Set tab order button and then click in each field in the order you prefer to work in The greyed fields only display information they cannot be edited NOTE f you are not sure of yourself on this we recommend that you contact your dealer for assistance 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 75 3 6 1 3 Object Tab Item PLU Maintenance Object Tab The Object table contains additional information for each PLU When combined with the PLU s item code and descriptor the Object table information provides a detailed identification for each item in the system NOTE Remember that some of the settin
328. must set this flag to have this product added to an an automatic purchase order requested for the vendor who supplies this product Min Enter the minimum stock level in selling units ROQ Set the re order quantity in case pack size Using the parent child function Child parent relationship Some products are ordered in one format such as a case but can be sold in more than one 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 203 selling unti Cigarettes may follow this rule Here is an example on how to use the parent child relationship to control different UPC codes that affect the same vendor product Let s work with a carton of Camel cigarettes This item would normally be purchased from the supplier in a carton of 10 packs of 20 cigarettes each The retailer may sell either cartons or single packages We will assign fictitious codes to demonstrate Item 1234 is the PLU number to sell a carton of Camel This item will be given a retail price of 45 00 per carton and a cost of 37 00 for the carton Cane q gt By fim Item number F2 Ypoooon00001234 SOS Active Next 000000001 234 000 H ee Camel Carton Quick Object POS Price Cost Inventory Sales Picture ECL Cost target PAL Regular cost Cost break 4 gt X gt Vendor 1 Vendor fi Quantity break ltem code fi 1223344 From Case Cost 1 37 00 F7 To Remark Discount Default w Discount Tl Unit cost 37
329. n Min amount is used to set the lowest amount that can be keyed into the sub department during a register transaction Max void will control the highest void amount that can be used without manager approval Note that the approval warning will flash and manager approval will be required before tendering can begin not to continue entering or scanning items To prohibit a cashier from using the void function entirely change the function authorization rights in function setup Max refund will control the highest refund amount that can be used without manager approval Note that the approval warning will flash and manager approval will be required before tendering can begin not to continue entering or scanning items To prohibit a cashier from using the refund function entirely change the function authorization rights in function setup As with Item programming the toolbar s a Modified icon is used to advise the operator that changes have been programmed on this sub department but they have not been transferred to the front end database Using the instant deploy tool will send any modification that was made to the sub department 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 117 3 6 4 3 6 4 1 Department Table Department Table Overview L BOSS requires that a sub department be linked to a department This is used only for the reporting hierarchy within the system Because the Sub departments often provi
330. n In other words you can set the default font then use variations where required Show position ruler The position ruler displays a position marker above the horizontal and vertical page rulers It also causes the Form Manager to track the cursor s X Y position displayed at the top of the Form Manager Setting the Show position option to on uses more system resources and may slow down the system 2001 2008 Logivision 326 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Auto load last file The Form Manager is a stand alone application It can be launched from a report s properties box or from the L POS Windows menu Set this option to on if you want the Form Manager to re load the most recently used template at start up Auto repaint Some screen displays seem to have difficulty re drawing the template when objects are moved or modified Set this option to on if you notice that objects in the template disappear forcing the Form Manager to re paint the screen more often Metric The Form Manager can be set to use either metric or inch measures When selected this option forces the rulers and page settings to metric measures The Form Manager uses inches by default the metric setting must be re set each time you launch the application Object Inspector Is used to display all information about the selected object including object dimensions page position and other object attributes The Object Inspector can be placed anyw
331. n 54 1 Maintenance Main Menus cccccceseeeeeeee sees ee eeneeeneee seen nnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 55 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 2 Common Data Edit Toolbars si iiiiicisscecvesteoerwnad cctvessetecveneadetenaleaccrwnadeetwnssdecvmncadetunssoaecnnssaee tendon 57 3 Displaying Data Lists q22 sescece2 sce cel se cet cae stg eh ce ceed sted hes cele cece std eee dene une sted la ee ewes nee nnmnnn nnn 58 4 File Men a era rra amr arara a paara chaxstaccnnnceng cxsnsudeonnuasny cxansnancnnunengtasxsaapenscceusGiexsaagansenense 61 Hem OptiOMns wicecesceececccccceeee assed ccsezecetes aeae eiad ranana ea adapa Edasine aaaea aa aa a aaaea iaaa 63 Other File Options seen aaa a aae a coc cc a a A sce aaa AAE E Aaa Aaaa Ea NAANA NESS 67 5 Edit M U adonan naa aeea aa eera a aeaaea aa ae aaa ae aaa Eaa Eae a eaa EA aa aed aaa aa Eaa a adacsadeannceouss 68 Item Options EE E EEE E E E A E E E E PE E ET 68 Other Lle ohio Ae eE E E E E E N 70 o CU ET a EEEE E E E E TT A A A 71 1 a A A A PE E E ee E ee ee 71 eUe Tea eE E EAA T E E E A casaecedas eacesaaetaeiees Gitar ee 73 Editing the Quick Tab eeccecceeececeneeseeeeeneeseneeeaeeseaeesseeseaeesaeesaeessaeesaeesaeseaeeseaeesaeeseaeeeeeseaeeseeeseaeeeaas 74 Object Tapis E E niae raged teaceesuaieeaeie 75 POS T e EA E EE E E E AA E EE EA AE E E T EAE EE ET 76 Pric Renn eee er eer re eee ere Per er
332. n is highlighted At any time in the receiving you can modify a previous line entry by entering that product code You can delete a line entry with the F3 Delete function You can modify the current cost record by pressing F4 Cost This will change the cost on file on a permanent basis If you change the cost of line items using the amount field that change will only affect the current transaction You will be given an option to save the cost changes when the transaction is posted You will not be able to save a new cost for specific items only when the amount was edited manually If you want to save the new cost for specific products only you must use the F4 function to update the file for each of those items During the entry you can use a built in calculator that allows simple math operations in the unit case amount and weight fields To view movement information on this product for today s date press the F6 Info button Select the Auto refresh flag if you want this window to update each time you enter a new product code onto your order Once the items have been received you save the transaction by pressing F12 Post You will have the option to print the transaction The print option window will display even once the transaction has been printed This way if another copy is required or if you want to print labels you can still make the selection before the transaction is archived If you need to save the receiving data without posting
333. n opens the default L BOSS Image folder a sub folder of the Office folder Image File Naming Convention L BOSS is programmed to assign the correct name for images that you select for items Regardless of the image name you select using the Browse button L BOSS will copy and 2001 2008 Logivision 96 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 6 1 10 rename the file with the required internal image file name The name is actually created from the item code so that the POS lane will select the correct image according to the PLU scanned or manually entered at sale time Image Type and Size Restrictions L BOSS supports two common image file types bitmap BMP or JPEG JPG Image resolution and file sizes should be kept as small as possible while maintaining reasonable image appearance Required POS Setup The POS screen display must be configured to display the image The size of the screen area Form that displays the image must be determined as well as how the image will be displayed If the images all have a standard size the form can be set to fit the standard image If the images vary in size the POS screen form can be set to stretch the image to fit the screen but this can lead to unreasonable image appearance Use the L BOSS Modules menu POS setup utility to access the POS screen setup ECL tab Creating Electronic Coupon links Situations arise where mix and match or other price models do n
334. n shows in Window s System tray bottom right corner of the Windows desktop tool bar The Polling process can only be displayed on the LBoss terminal that is set as the Controller during the initial set up of the system This setting is normally made for terminal 901 If the Polling Process can not be viewed it is probably because another backoffice terminal is set as the Controller NOTE The polling viewer uses Window s regional settings to determine language This means that the language specified in L BOSS does not control the language displayed in the viewer To change languages you must change the settings in the Window s Control Panel Regional Settings utility e Polling Iof x Eile Help Status information Files opened Idle mode activated 21 17 09 900 Opening files 21 17 12 370 Polling 001 001 21 19 26 670 Polling 001 001 21 21 39 590 Polling 001 001 Terminal transfer list Description 001 Running Terminal 1 This example shows the Polling Process viewer Menu Options 2001 2008 Logivision 22 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 File Menu The File menu has two options Close Closes the viewer leaving the polling software running it s icon visible in the Window s System tray Quit polling Closes the viewer and also stops the communication process You should only use this option if you are certain that you want to stop communications all together Once the polling uti
335. nbox means that those files were received with the archive bit set on and L BOSS cannot process them This is extremely unlikely Files in the Local Outbox is possible if one of your POS terminals is not online The data that should be transferred to that terminal is stored on the local terminal outbox folder until communication with that terminal is restored Then the data will be moved from the Local Outbox to the terminal inbox If there are files in the Unprocessed folder L BOSS was unable to import the data contained in those files Your first remedy should be to try and reprocess the files Place the cursor on the Unprocessed folder and right click Select Reprocess files If the files return to the Unprocessed folder you will need to verify the file contents to correct the situation If there are files in the register inbox it is probably because the register is connected to the network but is not operating the POS application If the POS is operating and there are still files in the register Inbox action is required to determine the problem If there are files located in the register outbox you have not collected all the sales This is not a normal situation and should be addressed immediately The N normal messages icon displays the normal priority messages recorded by the system The ok check icon can be used to validate the data that has been collected and posted to the report database by L BOSS This option shows the number of t
336. nd menu options available in the Entry transaction screens Within the receiving purchase order transfer adjustment and count screens there are both menu options and shortcut buttons Here is an explanation for each function File Review F8 This function allows you to select an inventory transaction that has been posted to the database When you review a transaction it may be possible to print print labels print shelf labels or delete the transaction Not all functions are available for all transaction types Delete This function can be used to delete an open purchase order that has not been received yet Print or Print worksheet if an order is in progress Use this option to print the transaction in report form as required Print shelf labels This function will generate one shelf label for each different product in the transaction assuming the label option was purchased and the product set up is complete Print item labels This function will generate an item price label for each product in the transaction assuming the label option was purchased and the product set up is complete Save F11 This function will save the transaction you have opened without posting it to the database Post F12 This function records the transaction to the database This function cannot be undone Exit Edit Cost edit F4 This function opens the cost table so you can modify the cost of an item permanently rather than changing the line cos
337. nd saved This is usually done by the dealer programmer or system administrator at installation time If you are unsure about how to setup the table please consult your Logivision dealer 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 65 lf Scanner Setup This example shows the Maintenance application s Scanner Setup panel Definition table Scanners can be programmed to read different bar code types and the way that they are read The Maintenance application uses the scanner definition table when accepting codes from the device Use this utility to setup the definition table This is usually done by the dealer programmer or system administrator at installation time If you are unsure about how to setup the table please consult your Logivision dealer 2001 2008 Logivision 66 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 A Definition table iof x 1 TE 1 Key 2 PLU S08A0549001 A5000000001 1111111111 3 PRICE 4 EXTEND Hu Cancel Apply Test input This example shows the Maintenance application s Scanner Definition Table Set quick page This option can be used to personalize the home quick page of the PLU editing screens When the quick page editor is activated a yellow banner is displayed as a warning Select a field from another tab in the PLU maintenance screen by right clicking on that field Return to the quick page and click on the form to place
338. new program version with your license key If not your delaer needs to contact Logivision to obtain an authorization code bossins exe Properties General Version Compatibility Summary p lbossins exe i Type of file Application Description GP Install Location C Bin CDDist LBOSS Size 25 2 MB 26 430 220 bytes Size on disk 25 2 MB 26 431 488 bytes Created Friday November 19 2004 4 31 50 PM Modified Friday November 19 2004 5 56 25 PM Accessed Today May 16 2005 11 19 21 AM Attributes C Hidden e f you install from a service patch normally updates zip you need to verify the date of 2001 2008 Logivision 28 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 the LBOSS exe file It controls the compiled date for service patches Verify the Compiled date under the version tab of the file properties window to determine if it will run with your license key LBOSS exe Properties General Version Compatibility Summary File version 2 0 2 15 Description L BOSS Copyright Copyright Logivision 1999 2004 Other version information ltem name File Version Internal Name Language Legal Trademarks Original File name Product Name Product Version Web site Comments A Compan Compiled date Value 0149 2005 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS Main Menus 29 2 1 8 2 Email Configuration Company Email Syst
339. nformation such as item movement on hand cost and retail stock values it does not affect accounting information such as billing or invoices For example you can transfer inventory out of a store reducing inventory values but there is no trace of how that inventory was paid for as with sales 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 241 potentially causing accounting problems You should consider this before using the Transfer option NOTE 2 Items entered into an inventory transaction can be sorted several ways to improve reconciliation with supplier invoices or for any other reason Open the View menu and select the Order By option By default items are sorted in the order they are entered into the transaction To sort in any other order use the View menu option The sort order on the screen cannot be changed once a transaction has been posted to the database The printed copies of inventory transactions are always made in the order that was visible on the screen when the transaction was posted 5 1 2 6 Inventory reports Inventory reports The inventory system can produce many different reports to assist your store operations Reports can be printed to display stock on hand inventory value stock below minimum etc The following pages display report samples and explain the reports intended use Most reports include totals that are not displayed here to save space Order report This report is used as a purchas
340. ng its item number If you leave the PLU blank and press Enter the cursor will jump to the Vendor code field so you can select an item by Vendor code To display a list of items by PLU number or vendor code double click in either field and the list will appear When you double click in the PLU number field and the list opens you will have a column for PLU number and a column for the description You can click the title bar where it says Select item to re sort the list in alphabetical order by description Once you select an item from the list or type in a product number associated with this vendor the cursor will move to the Cases field Now you must enter the number of cases you wish to order If you leave the field blank and press Enter the cursor will jump to the Units field You may also enter the quantity in the units field to place the order Whether you enter the quantity in cases or in units L BOSS will display both in the grid above 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 217 PLU Description ooo0 0000000001 OREO COOKIES Vendor code Cases Units Amount Weight 899712 F2 Add F3 Delete F4 Cost F5 Print FE Info After you input an order quantity the cursor will move to the Amount field and display the extended cost for the quantity being ordered You can modify the cost to be recorded for the order directly in this field For example your supplier is offering you a 2 00 rebate on a product normally pur
341. ng log files After months of use these tables become quite full and some of the information within may not be essential to keep Cleaning up the tables and log files promotes system efficiency and should be carried out on a regular basis L BOSS is usually set to cleanup data automatically based on scheduled events in the Events Tasks list and pre set times declared in this tab Most of the options are set by default to reasonable values for a normal installation Configuration Company Email System Misc Host Cleanup Load files Security 366 H Number of days to keep individual terminal f2 Number of days to keep successful log fi 4 Number of days to keep all log 366 Number of days to keep processed files 366 Number of days to keep daily sales information 999 Number of days to keep financial daily sales information 365 Number of days to keep PLU items per customer M Active V Keep log of all export in the processed directory This example shows the Configuration panel s Cleanup tab Number of days to keep individual terminal This is the number of days to keep individual terminal item sales Past this number of days the data from all lanes is consolidated into lane 001 This process is done daily Number of days to keep successful log This is the number of days to keep successful communication log LO Please note that the LOG files MUST be kept small This process is done daily and affect
342. ning the label printer 2001 2008 Logivision 190 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 4 7 Labels are normally printed to the default printer as defined in Windows printer settings There are several ways to overcome this default behaviour In the report properties selection window you can select the Printer dialogue option This will open the printer menu so you can select a printer when it is time to print the specified labels Available printers and options will be available through the printer dialogue window Setting a default printer for labels and reports Labels are like other reports and are normally printed to the default printer as defined in Windows printer settings You can set a different printer to use with L BOSS if you cannot redefine the default windows printer You will need to make a few changes to the system settings Edit the file in the LBOSS directory called LOCAL INI Search for the section called System and add an entry to define the default report and label printer System MainReportPrinter Printer name where Printer name is the name of the system printer L BOSS should use to print system reports and labels Setting a different printer for specific reports You may also set a different printer for any report or label by making an entry in the SERVER INI under the section that contains the settings for the specific report Each report has a section in the SERVER INI that shows the report n
343. nished the count press F12 Post You will have the option to print the transaction e f you need to save the count without posting it definitely to the system use the F11 Save option The system will prompt you to enter a file name The count will then be saved so that you can finish working on it later 2001 2008 Logivision 238 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 5 1 2 4 Adjustments Inventory adjustments Stock adjustments may be required from time to time Damaged goods returns credits free items are all examples of stock level change You may add or remove items using the adjustment feature Access the Adjustment menu in a multi store environment the system will prompt for store number Select the store and the entry grid appears for the transaction i Adjustment Files Edit View Store Inventory date 003 01 4 21 2005 Portable device F8 Review PAL Remark us vendor coveloescreton cares _ unts _Janourt_ reigt store Case cost TT Unit cost PT Oty cs E PLUH 0 Minimum ROAA Onorder 0 PLU Description Vendor code Cases Units Amount Weight aaron Sas EES r F2 Add F3 Delete F4 Cost Worksheet FE Info The screen is similar to the order and receive screen There are a few differences No prompt for header information you are adding or subtracting items from stock irregardless of the different suppliers you may have for the product Adjustments on a unit level only T
344. nseeeeeenseeeeeeeseeeeeseseeneeseseeneeseseeeeeseseeneeseseeneeens 266 3 Running L Tracker esencdira a stoneeds stoners steceeetstuetets 268 4 Localing Gala enssins E asncer lt unsccedescucereysctcursss 268 5 Keyboard Short CUIS ssssinirasnsni i sodeceeetedeenessadeeeeeseeerdhs 270 Section X L Remote communications 271 1 L BOSS configuration settings ccccssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeseeeeeeeeeseaeeesaeesaseeeeeseeeseeseseanenseeeeeees 271 2 Terminal set up With L Remote sssssnsesuunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn mnnn nn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnana 275 3 Inbox and Outbox folders sssnsssnneunneunnnunnnennnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn unnn nnnn nnne nnnnnnnn ennnen annann nannan anneanne 280 4 Different targets like price Zones ssssssnsssnunnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnana 280 5 Initiate the communication sssssssnneennnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nunn nnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnn nana 282 6 Deploying TCS ocrsueninansnan deteeesctetessgedeteesseteteeestcceees cecetveesecceressttecveesbceeedss 283 Section XI Monitoring Utility 285 1 Monho MON sssinesnnnsrinnn ecccctee eecneee ceeetcueneccunce cecettue sdecuuue ceeetiue eccuude eddencuerddenueee 285 2 Monhor tOolDar se let nonin Sn Ste as ne en a sR RS ae Ee en eo nee eee 286 Section XII L Register interface 287 1 Preparing the EGR eiiieaen ianareo ee we cnet de we cesar ace ceed eae vena te aaa anaa aE 28
345. nt to establish the real quantity for items in the sales process Declaration The act of counting and entering the in drawer amounts for all tender types at the end of a cashier s shift The declaration is used to report Over Short amounts by cashier Deploy Prepare to send place information in an outbox or in a target inbox Electronic Journal In the front end terminal an electronic version of a register tape used to store ALL transaction details tracked by a front end terminal Entry Any process that involves manual data entry for inventory operations or other management related processes such as cashier loans or pickups Event A process or task set to run automatically at a pre programmed time Can also be forced to run manually Execute Run a command file utility or program perform a process Flag An indicator or attribute used by the system to identify a process or item status Front End The portion of the store where sales transactions are performed The points of sale POS Grand total information e Financial and end of day reports may display a grand total value The grand total Totalizer 4003 is the total of all positive sales This is the Total Sales TIzr 2 of every SIL file taxes included that has a positive total The grand total range is 0 00 to 2001 2008 Logivision Glossary 333 9 999 999 999 99 e Negative GT before L POS version 2 1 5 9 Totalizer 4002 is the total of
346. ntinue as usual this does not stop actual internal processing Although similar to the Freeze button the stop option skips all process lines or activity between the time it was stopped and when it is restarted The activity or processes that occurred during the time the viewer was stopped will not be displayed Freeze The same as the button found at the bottom of the viewer this option freezes the viewer at it s current display line It behaves as a toggle in other words clicking the first time freezes the display clicking the second time unfreezes the display which then continues to display lines Although similar to the Files menu s stop option no lines are skipped the viewer continues displaying all activity from the point at which it was frozen When unfrozen the viewer displays all activity lines since frozen Reset transaction counter This option resets the internal process line count for the viewer only not the actual internal process number It is a counter used by the viewer to keep track of which line is being displayed The current process line count is displayed at the bottom right of the viewer s status bar bottom of viewer window Close The Close option closes the viewer and is identical to the OK button at the bottom left of the viewer View menu The viewer allows you to control which types of internal processes you wish to track Checked items in the list will be tracked and displayed as transacti
347. nts to issue based on manual entries to this department Item points follow the points assigned to the sub department records not the department records Note that the rounding on points issued occurs on each entry not at the end of the transaction Restrictor code allows the user to decide whether on not sales into this department should be restricted at certain times This could be the case for example of alcoholic beverages that cannot be sold after 11 00PM The restrictor number used with the department is assigned here The restrictor table is maintained in the PosSetup under System Restrictors Customer age This flag is available to restrict the sale of age sensitive products such as tobacco or alcohol When this flag is set the first item entered will prompt for customer age Operator age This flag is available to restrict the sale of age sensitive products such as tobacco or alcohol When this flag is set the POS will verify the age declared in the set up of the operator signed on Max amount is used to set the maximum dollar value that can be keyed into the department during a register transaction Min amount is used to set the lowest amount that can be keyed into the department during a register transaction Max void will control the highest void amount that can be used without manager approval Note that the approval warning will flash and manager approval will be required before tendering can begin not to continue entering
348. nual covers changes to L BOSS version 2 2 3 0 Logivision has attempted to make this document accurate Logivision is not responsible for any direct incidental or consequential damages resulting from this documentation or inaccuracies within Specifications are subject to change Printed in Canada Overview The Back Office System Software is designed as the back office controller for L POS front end terminals Together they represent Logivision s most recent store management tools L BOSS is the core application for back office control acting as the centralized data storage programming interface communication center event scheduler and office application launcher As the core of the store system L BOSS is designed to run continuously on at least one station in the network This allows it to execute scheduled events for example sending item prices to all front end databases Data Storage L BOSS uses a relational database system to maintain all system information Conventional 2001 2008 Logivision About the L BOSS application 7 databases often use single records that contain all information about a specific data type in a set number of fields This limits the amount of information that can be kept for a data type If new information is required fields must be added For example if you keep customer information a conventional database record might have two 2 possible telephone number fields If a thi
349. o all stores if it is still in the file along with PO1 and P02 you will be sending the PAL and P01 to store 001 and PAL and P02 to store 002 There is no predictable result of which price will be active at the remote stores So you MUST DELETE the price from target PAL for items that have individual prices This system allows you to maintain only the exceptions that are different from one store to another For example Items 1 200 are the same everywhere so they only have a PAL price and it is deployed to everyone when it changes These items will only have one price for the PAL target Items 201 210 are different at each target So you create P01 and P02 prices for each item in that range The P01 prices will go to store 1 and P02 will go to store 2 If you have several stores that use the same price put all those stores into a common price target when you are creating the target list NOTES It is very important to remove items from the PAL target if they belong to 2001 2008 Logivision 282 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 10 5 individual targets This explanation was given for prices the same holds true for tax status POS target and for cost COST Target It is also important to understand that price or other information does not go from stores UP to head office Price information goes down from head office to stores You can send prices for individual items from store to head office by using the Send t
350. o define their own search criteria and result columns Here is a sampleof the advanced search window available in many of the database fields related to products Search PLU number File Options Search PLU Select PLU 0000000000001 ooooooo000002 ooooooo000003 ooooo00000004 ooooo00000005 oooo000000006 oooooo0000007 ooooo00000008 ooooo00000003 oo0000000001 0 ooo0000000011 oooo00000001 2 oo0000000001 3 oooo00000001 4 Oreo Cookies UNCLE BEN S RICE PREMIUM PLUS SODA BISCUITS IGA SALAD DRESSING IDEAL CREAM CORN COKE CLASSIC 12 02 CAN DIET COKE 12 02 CAN STRAWBERRY JELLO RASPBERRY JELLO KODAK FILM 35MM Bw 24 EXP SMALL COFFEE MEDIUM COFFEE LARGE COFFEE DAILY NEWS v Locate OK Enh Search Cancel Once this type of list is open you can have many more search options Clicking at the top of any column will use that column to sort the data From the example shown above if you click on the column header description the list will sort in alphabetical order If you click again in the same column the list will sort again in alphabetical order starting from the opposite end of the alphabet Click in the PLU number header and the same list will sort numerically Re click the PLU number and the list will sort from the last PLU to the first etc You can also use the locate entry window to type data If you have sorted the column by clicking in the PLU number field the locate tool will search the PLU numbe
351. o enter custom search data The 5 data fields allow you to make custom searches within the transactions returned by the pre selection filter Customized search Reset F4 F5 6 F7 F8 Field Descriptor Operand Yalue Condition NE STORE cou gt E Previous Next F11 Delete line F12 Insert line F3 Search The F4 Field pull down list allows you to select among different search types To search for STORE COUPONS choose Text and enter that descriptor in the F5 Description field In this 2001 2008 Logivision 270 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 9 5 case the fields F6 Operand F7 Value and F8 Condition are not required If a situation arises where you needed to find for example all STORE COUPONS and SUB DEPARTMENT 15 you would use the F8 Condition pull down and select AND A new row appears in the custom search area In this row you would modify the F4 Field window and select Sub department on the pull down list When you do that the F7 column is used to enter the Subdepartment number Once you have finished defining the Custom search press the F3 Search button L Tracker will once again filter the transactions and produce the list of transactions that respond to both the pre selection criteria and the Custom search filters you set Keyboard shortcuts L Tracker can be operated both with a mouse or using the keyboard shortcuts listed below Several shortcuts have been added to simplify navi
352. o have values in the SCT table that do not have a link to any item in the Object table The SCT table is programmed in the Maintenance application s PLU menu Item option Inventory tab The number here indicates how many items exist in target SCT table that do not have linked records in the Object table You can press the Delete button to the right to remove these items from the SCT table NOTE f you double click the number field a list of the non referenced SCTrecords appears Non referenced ECL Items in the Object table have links to the ECL table to keep track of their advanced promo settings It is possible to have records in the ECL table that do not have a link to any item in the Object table The number here indicates how many items exist in target ECL table that do not have linked records in the Object table You can press the Delete button to the right to remove these items from the ECLtable NOTE f you double click the number field a list of the non referenced ECL records appears Missing POS This is the opposite of Non referenced POS above In other words items that have information in the L BOSS Object table but have no associated record in the POS table used to program the front end terminals Remember that this may include items that have been created but not yet sent to the POS table NOTE f you double click the number field a list of the items not in the POS table appears Missing Price This is the opposite of
353. o host option as explained in the L BOSS user guide Initiate the communication Initiating L Remote communication Once L Remote is configured at store and head office it needs to be scheduled to communicate This is done by creating an event in L BOSS In systems that use stores call the head office create the L Remote event at the store Create the event at the head office when the head office calls the stores Only one side should have this event to start the communication The other L remote is always waiting for the call Create the event as shown below Task Editor mae eK aD Vv Description Head office communication Command Directoy EXEC RUN LRemote exe CLIENT Fd V Allow manual Repeati IV Allow scheduled epeating cycle 2 Hours 2 3 2005 01 45 PM r Days Months Next event will occur on V Execute one past event V Execute at loading time V View on all terminals V Executed on controller If filename exists eS e Enter a description such as Head office communication e The Command field must show EXEC RUN LRemote exe CLIENT e Select Allow manual and Allow Scheduled e Set Next event to the first date and time you want communications to begin Please use 2001 2008 Logivision L Remote communications 283 the calendar and time tools to ensure the correct formats are saved e Set Repeating cycle to the desired frequency e If using ECR you need to realize that dat
354. o register This flag is available to stop sending data to the ECR May be required at some point to allow sending data to the Lregister database but not to the lanes Configure Press this button and the following window will appear General Communication Report Definition EJ Definition Store 7 1 OutBox C Outbox a Age 1 trigger V Keep raw data backup 18 Days Age 2 trigger 30 Number of cashiers fi 5 Number of plu s 5000 Number of Customers M Use second language Cancel GENERAL tab Store Enter the store number Outbox This is the folder where L Register will save the data from the ECR It must match 2001 2008 Logivision 298 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 the terminal s Outbox in the terminal set up of L BOSS Age 1 trigger Enter the age 1 trigger value for the ECR s age verification feature Sub mode 41 Age 2 trigger Enter the age 2 trigger value for the ECR s age verification feature Sub mode 41 Keep raw data backup This will keep a copy of the data sent to the ECR in its native format Days Number of days to retain the raw data Number of cashiers Enter number of cashier records in the ECR Number of PLU s Enter number of PLU records in the ECR Number of customers This feature is not supported Use second language Select this option to send alternate language data to the ECR such as PLU descriptions General Communicati
355. obtained from the accounting software authors Server machine name Enter the network ID computer name of the L BOSS server 901 Append store number or target number to export file name This will append the 3 digit store number or the 3 digit target identifier to the file name For example a file sent to Simply Accounting is named GLIMPORT11062007 txt for an export done for Nov 6 2007 If you include the output in export filename it will create an export file named GLIMPORT1 1062007003 txt where 003 represents the store number This may be useful in a multi store environment Zero skip Set this option to skip GL accounts that are at zero total for the period selected NOTE For the export type AVANTAGE the store number field is read from the LBOSS internal store number Set this value in L BOSS gt Maintenance gt Register gt Store information programming screen by entering the accounting store number into the Internal number field 2001 2008 Logivision GL Interface 317 13 5 Store Info ae eX Cr Bo Store number Internal number 003 15594 Store name Garage 3000 Inc Address 101010 3rd Avenue City Anytown Prov State ac Code J3G 6Y7 Phone 450 464 2131 Fax Email Manager Logivision Manager Set Running the Export to G L The GL export creates a file that is imported into the accounting system The data file you create will contain totals for the stores or targets you choose You can also sele
356. om the Maintenance application s Edit menu All the items that responded to the filter will now be included in the current batch Note Items that use Like code do not need to be sent in the batch Only the Like code itself should be in the batch Setting the Price When a batch is created it is for a specific price level Regular and split prices can be entered through the batch mode You can assign a mix match number to the items as well If you want to set a rental item in a batch use the price type status letter to choose the appropriate type Several price types are not compatible with price batches Only the price types available in the pull down list can be modified from a batch Changing the Field Order The default field order can be changed in the batch viewer window Select the title of the field to move hold down the left mouse button and drag the field left or right to its new position This allows you to place the most used fields together for easier editing L BOSS will save the new field order when closed Posting Batches Press the apply change icon to record and save the batch contents Return to the main L BOSS menu and use the Events Tasks option to scan the batch files for active prices that should be applied immediately Best Price Option L BOSS allows you to create as many batches ahead of time as required Items can be included in many batches and these batches can overlap in dates For example an item
357. on Report Definition EJ Definition Master s settings Register Table IP address 192 168 0 254 Port number 49155 7 cr cr System option settings 5 I PLU Local File E WV Cashier Local File 5 rc rc r rc r Time intervals Merge Msec 7000 Programming Msec 15000 Comm Time out MSec 30000 j Cancel COMMUNICATION tab Master s settings IP Address Enter the Master register IP address Port number Enter 49155 System option settings PLU local file Make the selection that corresponds to your ECR settings Cashier local file Make the selection that corresponds to your ECR settings Time intervals 2001 2008 Logivision L Register interface Merge Msec Enter 7000 unless instructed otherwise Programming Msec Enter 15000 unless instructed otherwise Comm timeout Msec Enter 30000 unless instructed otherwise Register table Select the number of registers used in the store General Communication Report Definition EJ Definition Report number o Financial Record number Record description 0009 Otherlnco LBOSS s totalizer 6 TT Browse Tlz Skip Save Stack Report 0 v MV RPT_CLK M RPT_ITM vV RPT_FIN M RPT_HOU MV RPT_SDP RPT_EJ Soft date offset 0 V Consolidated Report Definition Use this tab to modify the report settings if required 299 2001 2008 Logivision 300 L BOSS User Manu
358. on boxes Select Promotion when the batch has a start and stop date such as in a weekly ad special or in an long term everyday low price promotion Enter the beginning and ending date for the batch Select Change price when the goal of the batch is to update the prices on a permanent basis If you select Change price the system will automatically set Non Active to the batch type once the price change has been activated Select the date range for the batch In a Change price batch the ending date is not available In Promotion batch the ending date must be greater than the start date The discountable flag can be used to allow or prohibit discounts on items included in the batch without modifying the default item status NOTE There is a related flag under PosSetup gt System gt PLU tab settings When No discount on promo is selected it forces all batches to be non discountable no matter how you set the discountable status for each individual batch The discountable flag does not affect price change batches only promo type batches Press the SQL button to execute a specific SQL command This SQL command can execute a change to the items in the batch FOr example you want to use the filter tool to select a range of items to include in your batch The SQL command could then make a change to all the items at once for example add a percentage to the price Ask yur dealer for more help in setting up this function to execute the command you r
359. on as Store In the Remote office server form enter Connection type The Name and Password are related to the connection If you need to enter a name and password every time you connect to your ISP or your VPN enter it here IP or Domain name refer to the IP of the Head office L remote server This may be the DNS of the L Remote server or IP Local upstream folder is the folder on your store s L BOSS server where the transactions are saved for transfer to the headquarters By default use C OutboxHosit Preserve report data per terminal Select this option to enable reporting per POS terminal at head office Otherwise select Merge report data per store If you select Preserve report data per terminal you need to create each store s POS and Back office terminals at Head office If you select Merge report data per store you will only create the back office terminal 901 for each store when defining the terminal list at head office L Remote login Name and Password need to match at both ends Encryption is used to set an encryption password to protect data Must be the same at both ends Make sure to verify that the C Outboxhost folder exists 2001 2008 Logivision L Remote communications 275 Comm tab set up for a Store when Head office calls stores Configuration LSompany Email System Misc Comm Cleanup Load files Security Communication method What am I No communication C Head office C Stores c
360. on individual terminals by store you must create each of the terminals at the head office This also means that you set the flag to Preserve report data per terminal in the Comm tab settings of each store In an example where you have 2 stores with 2 L POS and 1 L BOSS each and a head office with 2 L BOSS your terminal list may show Terminals Terminal _ P01 STORE 001 Program ooroor LPOS 001 001 Be is err q 001907 E055 001901 Store program 002001 LPOS 002001 R01 STORE 001 Report 002002 LPOS 002002 R02 STORE 002 Report 002901 LBOSS 002901 RAL Store total 101901 LBOSS 101901 RHO HEAD OFFICE Report 101902 LBOSS 101902 XAL EXCHANGE LIST Eseee seee seme See See See Sees Store Terminal Descriptor oo 901 LBOSS 001901 Terminal type LB0SS Inactive Path Terminal s InBox C MAIL INB0X_0015 Group Descriptor Terminals OuBox POI STORE 001 Program CAMAIL OUTBOX_001 I Report Items Terminal s program path Exchange Price J Program Cost Terminal List 001001 LPOS 001001 Type L POS 001 002 LPOS 001002 Type L POS 001 901 LBOSS 001901 Type LBOSS C MAIL INBOX_001 C MAIL OUTBOX_001 002 001 LPOS 002001 Type L POS 002 002 LPOS 002002 Type L POS 002 901 LBOSS 002901 Type LBOSS C MAIL INBOX_002 C MAIL OUTBOX_002 101 901 LBOSS 101901 Type LBOSS 101 902 LBOSS 101902 Type LBOSS In this configuration example only the remote stores L BOSS terminals have inbox and outbox def
361. on is used to record a search for repeat use or to delete an entry from the top section of the Edit menu options wndow View menu options View transactions with without visible PLU number Extended to view the search input area Animation option to highlight results of searches Print menu options Print the current transaction only Print each transaction with data that responds to the current search criteria Print the entire transaction file for the current day Help displays version information The EJ program can be operated without the mouse by using the function buttons to execute the required command It is also possible to use the mouse if preferred Press F2 Date to select the date you want to review You can also select the date from the date pull down window above the receipt area When the calendar is open the Home key will select today s date automatically You can also scroll to the previous or next date using Ctrl PageUp or Ctrl PageDown keyboard combinations The receipt area shows the transaction data Use the scroll bar within the receipt area to move up or down the transaction From anywhere within the transaction file for a given day the Home key returns to the top of the file and the End key advances to the end of the transaction file PgUp Prv moves back to the previous transaction in the same day Although it is not shown Ctrl Pgup moves one date backward PgDn Nxt moves ahead to the next transact
362. on lines The option acts as a toggle click to select or unselect the items to be tracked In some cases searching for a specific type of internal process it may be easier to follow only one type of process to determine communication problems MailSlot Information requests to and from the back office hardware copy protection key information etc EJ Electronic Journal actual POS transactions as sent to the back end after a tender key finalizes a transaction Mime Other information communicated to and from the POS such as images search results Import Information files received from external sources such as PLU files from another store or head office Export Information files sent to external destinations such as PLU files sent to another store or head office Misc Other types of files messages Errors Error messages communicated through the system after an error occurs normal urgent etc Commands Polling requests and other command type files 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS Main Menus 21 2 1 5 View Polling Status View Polling Process This File menu option opens a two pane viewer that displays the files being retrieved from and sent to the POS terminals along with a list of the stations or POS terminals involved in the polling process The viewer is not actually part of L BOSS but a separate utility or application When the polling software is running in the background it s ico
363. on that product the change will make it to the other stores in the next communication cycle To force a change to make its way back up to the head office you must press the Satellite from the menu for that record Using the deploy all changes option will not return any information to the host system It is an item by item decision that can only be activated one item at a time with the satellite icon AdaBatch utility L BOSS includes a utility called AddBatch exe This program is to help you setting up advertising for your batches Addbatch will search for active batches to help you set up advertising files for the batch You will need to create an event to run ADDBAtch or open the program from the LBOSS folder L BOSS must be running to use ADDBAtch If Addbatch finds active promotions it will open the batches in a list on the left hand side of the window Promotion Advertising Fie view Help Batch List Batchit 2 y v Place a check in the EndDate 01 03 2008 Total 6 Item s bix to add a batch to Price Pek Oty Pck Price teh advertising file 0 69 Soin 0 79 Fa ooo00000000066 0 69 E3 00000000000067 0 69 ME 00000000000068 0 69 00000000007763 1 25 Generate The window above shows batch number 2 which will be added to the advertising images and batch 3 which has not been selected There are 6 items in the batch 2 called Coke batch 5 of these items have pictures associated with them and will be added to the Advertising file
364. on the default report system included with L BOSS The description is used by the report program to print the description of each total on the report Alternate descriptor is used on receipts and reports when the second language is called by operator or by customer Files determines which report database will be updated when the totalizer is used The file names are internal to L BOSS and were programmed at installation time We suggest that you consult your Logivision dealer if you require specialized reports Debit credit and General Ledger are all used to output data for an accounting system This requires a special interface If you wish to send report data to your accounting package please contact your Logivision dealer Report Section L BOSS reports make use of sections for example a portion of the report may show the negative transactions that reduce net totals Tizr sequence This number is used to sort the report section If more than one record has the same sequence number they will show up together ordered by their totalizer numbers Report formula L BOSS uses this field internally to perform special calculations or format the font behaviour of this report line NOTE n order to use the Client Sub department report or to obtain sub department or department totals on the Cashier sales report you need to make some adjustments to the 2001 2008 Logivision 166 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0
365. on the sub department table to signify the same thing as Hash item on the PLU record Gas PLU This flag is used to calculate the quantity sold whenever an amount is entered The result is computed by dividing the amount entered by the preset price The gas volume can be changed from liters to gallons as required Scalable This flag defines that the product is sold by weight read from the POS scale This flag should not be selected for pre packaged and pre priced items such as items weighed and labeled for scanning at the POS Manual Weight Select this flag to allow a manual weight entry for this product 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 79 Override Allowed Certain situations may require an item price to be changed when it is being rung through for sale Select this flag for items that you need to permit price override on It is possible to restrict the usage of the price override button by operator level No Repeat Select this flag to prohibit the repeat function with this item No Refund Select this flag to prohibit refund of this product code The POS will prevent the cashier from entering the item s code and pressing the refund function No pts redemption Select this flag to prohibit payment of this item with customer points For example you may not want to allow customers to pay for tobacco products with their accumulated loyalty points Bottle Return This flag is used to determine tha
366. ons or utilities the Tab key will move the cursor from one box window or editable field to the next in a pre set order Holding down the Shift key and pressing the Tab key will reverse the pre set order Once the cursor is on an option press the Enter key to launch the option Printing Help as a Manual Printing help pages as a paper document Logivision s L BOSS help pages can be printed from the Windows style help viewer However when you print the entire help from the help viewer the resulting pages will not be indexed no page numbers or table of contents If you wish to print the entire help you should run the L BOSS pdf file that is placed in the L BOSS folder at installation time The L BOSS pdf document is the manual in a printable format with a table of contents index and page numbers To view print the L BOSS pdf document requires Adobe Acrobat Reader You can download the reader from the Adobe website free of charge at http www adobe com products acrobat readstep2 htm The Install help can also be downloaded from the Logivision website in all existing formats Several smaller manuals are available on individual subjects such as A R Preferred shopper Labels Inventory etc You can download the help files from the user documentation section at http www logivision com To print a single page from the help viewer Select the page you wish to print Click the print button at the top of the help viewer
367. or a vendor the system removes the Default flag from all other vendors for the item The default vendor flag is used by the system when working with inventory such as orders generated by the system Unit Cost The Unit cost field is the calculated cost per unit based on the information entered above You cannot edit this field directly and appears as a confirmation Cost Break Section The Cost break section allows you to enter additional cost information from the vendor notably the quantity purchase breaks offered by the vendor Many vendors offer dollar or percent discounts when certain purchase quantities are reached Each vendor for an item 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 91 can have many Cost break entries For example if a vendor offers several cost break levels they can all be entered so that when purchasing items in the Entry module s Order option the system can alert you that there may be a better cost if you order more Note Each Cost break record MUST HAVE both start and end dates to be valid If both dates have not been selected the system will prompt you before leaving the record e To add a cost break for an item s vendor enter the purchasing quantity specified by the vendor in the Quantity break field You will be prompted with a calendar to enter the start date for the cost break To add additional cost breaks for the same vendor use the button within the Cost break se
368. or in this field and clicking will pop up a calendar for date selection Select the date you want to have the sale price begin on The next column is to enter the time if the sale price is time sensitive To is the date the sale price will terminate It is used for sale periods only After the sale is over the price will revert to the regular retail price If you do not enter an ending date L BOSS will automatically assign a date 7 days after the start date NOTE f you are using the Batch module DO NOT enter prices directly into the sale price column because they will be erased by the system L BOSS updates the sale price column automatically from batches If any batches exist even 1 batch all pricing that is entered directly into the Sale price column of the PLU maintenance will be erased the next time the system checks to see if all batches are up to date in the price fields Points is used for customer loyalty building You can enter a value of points that will be issued when this product is sold The points system can be defined to issue in either amount or Related programming in the register programming utility PosSetup System PLU The default points setting is to issue the points as an amount not by percentage NOTE Points can also be issued off the tendering amount to simplify maintenance requirements This is set in the Button and form programming of the PosSetup module under the parameters of the actual tender function Disc
369. or rental with L POS is controlling films in a c store type application In this type of environment the return time is usually determined as being 6 00 pm or thereabouts If this is your case leave the Check box for Based on the period as a blank An item rented today at 3PM will be due at the return time tomorrow Same thing for an item rented at 11PM tonight it will be due tomorrow at 6 00PM if a return time is specified When L BOSS is used for rental that is based on time you need to place a check mark next to Based on the period This would be used in an application where something is rented for an hour 2 hours 8 hrs etc An example would be strollers rented to customers by the hour in an amusement park When you select this option any time that shows in the Return time will be ignored Late fee Open account Set this flag to automatically open the customer account who is returning a film late There is a related flag in the PosSetup gt System gt General gt Advanced flags Bypass customer contact on late return This flag must be set if you want to open the account and charge a fee automatically with the Late fee button Charge late fee Select this flag if you want the system to activate a button when a film is returned late Automatic quantity Use this flag to send the number of days an item is late to the Late fee button An item returned 3 days late will enter 3 QTY end press the Late fee button Use same PLU Select this fl
370. orts The Pickup module screen is not automatically refreshed when you make entries You may need to press the View button to refresh the screen view of the current operator Note n order to view the Short Over status on the Pickup screen you must have made an entry to the declare column Otherwise over short information will only be available on the cashier or store end of day or financial reports LBoss allows you to post a 0 00 declare so that over short can be viewed without using the sales reports 2001 2008 Logivision 252 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Events Tasks Events Tasks Utility The L BOSS system includes both fully automated procedures and a Task Manager that provides access to run other events upon demand When the Events Tasks icon is accessed L BOSS displays a list of currently assigned tasks or events The task list shows all events programmed on the system The events set to run automatically appear with a date in the next event column One of the most common uses of the Events Tasks option is to execute commands manually and can be used to force the system to execute automated commands that failed or did not execute automatically as programmed Description Scheduled Load Nextevent Deploy all changes Manual Deploy LOAD Manual lt DIR gt Deploy load to ALL Manual Deploy amp Replace Manual Deploy all amp Replace Manual Deploy screen Manual Update p
371. ose between using the word item in that message or the descriptor associated with the PRP record Trigger quantity This is the number of items that must be purchased before a free item is triggered by the POS system Discount rate Set the discount rate that will be applied to the reward product Client level Set the customer level required for this reward to be issued WARNING The free items cannot be issued if L BOSS in not operating Transactions that are entered in off line mode will update the free items sold when the system goes back on line 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 155 3 7 8 Custom messages 3 8 _Custom messages f ax Custom message 1 ATTENTION Changes were made to improve the customer statements The columns showing outstanding amounts in the 90 days 60 days 30 days and current have been modified The system now applies payments to the oldest outstanding invoice no matter when the payment is made The previous version of the statement and aging reports used the wrong formula to display those columns Use this option to modify the messages that are printed on account statements issued from the L BOSS reporting system Several different messages can be programmed by changing the number showing in the Custom message number area The language setting is available for areas where statements need to be sent in different languages to different customers Register
372. ot work for the type of deal you may want to run L POS has the ability to trigger a discount when specific criteria have been met in a transaction The ECL tab allows the user to create items as electronic coupons linked with a set of rules that establish when the coupon is issued The ECL tab displays the records created as the coupon rules It is possible to have multiple records programmed with different conditions that must be met to trigger the coupon For example you may want the POS to issue a coupon when a customer purchases a specific quantity of items buy 6 get one free or combination of types of items marked with a Promo ID The ECL tab records can be used to maintain simple or compound promotional rules The ECL tab table is dynamic meaning that depending on the Type field for each rule record the fields in the rule record contain values for the related type To use the ECL tab you must first create a new unique item code with a description subdepartment and value price fields In the POS tab of this item set the flag store coupon to yes The coupon s value in the price field is positive but because it is marked as a store coupon in the POS tab the front end will subtract the coupon s value from the transaction it is applied to Once the coupon item has been created you can determine the set of conditions in the Promo tab that will issue the coupon during the sale Example automatic discount by electronic coupon I
373. ote access there are other options available by providing connectivity needed to support customers without creating a full remote access solution When considering these alternative solutions the following principles must be addressed to ensure net the solution provides needed controls without enabling full remote access Ensure that remote connectivity can be traced to a specific service request this would allow identification the customer support representative and the user requesting support Ensure that the solution does not allow on demand or always on access Ensure the solution uses robust at least 128 bit encryption for all communications Ensure that the solution does not allow for the exchange of credentials Mandate that the customer environment must be monitored while access is enabled Ensure that the connection is enabled by an outbound connection that does not require firewall port enablement Here are some examples of this type of solution that can be implemented to meet these requirements include Go To Assist full usage tracking with unique session tokens created by customer support rep http Awww gotoassist com LogMeIn Rescue full usage tracking with unique session tokens created by customer support rep https secure logmeinrescue com HelpDesk Home aspx Techinline Remote Desktop full usage tracking with unique session tokens created by customer support rep http www techinline com iRemotePC
374. oth Risk and Customer levels from a pop up list 2001 2008 Logivision 146 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Contact Required Set this option to on if L POS should require the contact number to be entered along with the account number Account statements and other account reports will show information from all contacts for the account as a single account To be able to track each contact s transaction information the contact number must be included when entering the account number at L POS lanes L POS lanes can be set to require the contact number by setting the Contact Required flag on PO required This flag will force the entry of a purchase order number whenever this account tries to make a charge PO Digits Min Max Set the minimum and maximum number of digits allowed for PO entry for accounts with a PO required Contact information fields Each account must have a main contact Additional account users contacts can be added using the button or removed using the scissor button from the tool bar in the contact section The left and right arrow buttons are used to move to the next previous contact Although you can create many contacts for each account the standard contact list will not show more than 30 contacts for any single accounts For accounts with more than 30 contacts you must assign a search function rather than the normal contact list Number This field contains the contact s number a
375. ouble ended oblique arrow used to re size both horizontally and vertically at the same time Hold the 2001 2008 Logivision Form Manager 321 cursor over the corner node Click and hold down the left mouse button and drag the corner node to re size the object e The center nodes between the corners re size either horizontally or vertically depending on the node selected When a center node is selected the cursor changes to either a horizontal or vertical double ended arrow Hold the cursor over the center node Click and hold down the left mouse button and drag the center node to increase either the height or width of the object e Once an object is selected showing its nodes you can move it by pointing the cursor over the object anywhere within the nodes Click and hold down the left mouse button dragging the object to its new template location The template page uses color to distinguish between Label Field and Prompt objects e Label objects are yellow and contain titles that describe the type of information often column titles e Field objects are green and contain fields associated with the SQL file s SIL fields that their data comes from e Prompt objects are blue and are the variables used in the report s SQL file to collect information from the user e Graphic objects lines and rectangles are black e Image objects are not assigned any color they appear as graphic images bmp onl
376. ows are use to go directly to the first or last report page Search Utility You can search through a report preview for specific text or numbers e Hold down the Ctrl key and press the F key to open the search tool e Enter the text to search for e If the search finds the requested characters the report line containing the matched text is highlighted e Press the F3 function key to continue searching for the same text or e Hold down the Ctrl key and press the F key to enter a new search NOTE The search only finds the exact match For example if you are searching for sales the search will not find sale For a more global search enter only a portion of the text to match Following the example above entering sal will find all report lines with sal 2001 2008 Logivision 186 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 4 5 4 6 anywhere in the line NOTE 2 When a report has nothing to print the message will auto clear after 15 seconds This will help in situations where reports are scheduled to run automatically Report printing Default report printer Reports are normally printed to the default printer as defined in Windows printer settings There are several ways to overcome this default behaviour In the report properties selection window you can select the Printer dialogue option This will open the printer menu so you can select a printer when it is time to print the specified report Availab
377. pen multiple monitor windows simultaneously and arrange the open windows within the Monitor utility Beep on red You can set the Monitoring utility to alert you with a BEEP when certain functions are used notably functions that are set to be red meaning negative functions that subtract amounts from the current transaction To activate the warning beep select the terminal to track then from the Monitoring utility s File menu select Beep on red If a negative function is used during the transaction the Monitoring utility will issue a warning beep Monitoring Statistics The utility also provides totals for all activity tracked during the monitoring process The File menu contains a Statistics option that opens a window showing the statistics for the selected terminal 2001 2008 Logivision 286 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 SELCE Programmer Last Login O1 12 19 13 24 02 l Transactions 6 Lines 11 43 Amount l Sessions This example shows a sample of Monitor Statistics Redirect output Use this option to set up a data output for a 3rd party security system This data will be sent to the designated TCP IP or RS232C port for display on another system such as video surveillance cameras The Prefix field may be required by some systems when more than one POS terminal is sending data to a common port This prefix on lane one could say POSO1 the prefix on lane 2 could say POS02 etc This
378. perations on the register and reviewing sample reports to be sure that all register functions that collect amounts or other values display correctly in L BOSS reports 12 8 POS tabs new fields POS Tab Item PLU Maintenance POS Tab 2001 2008 Logivision L Register interface 303 cop gt Bv_ tm ltem number F2 Active Next 00000000000001 s139 E M ITAL 1 5L 6 REG ON HAND Quick Object POS Price Cost Inventory Sales Picture ECL vi TAL 1 5L 6 PAL POS target Link to 1 Sub Dept Follow sub dept Scalable Tax1 Manual weight E Tax2 Override allowed Tax 3 No repeat Tax 4 No refund Var Tare Food stamp No pts redemption s OSS Wict 2 3 E Bottle return Battle Link Prohibit discount Validation req d Ha Promo ID z z Divisor Tare link Prohibit Qty EH MPF Oty required Sl 1 Price required l 2 Visual verify _ Price Print Off Not for sale _ Manual Tare SI 4 Hash item SI 3 Gas PLU Vendor coupon Store coupon Rest code Client Age Oper Age Coupon family Label Tee E Print This example shows the Item table s POS tab POS Target This field is used in multi store environments when the status flags for the items are not the same in all stores To understand the Terminal table programming go to the Terminal table help page in the L BOSS help file The default target for items is PAL To change the target for
379. pid search can be performed to locate data you require As you are navigating through the fields of different tables you will notice that sometimes a question mark appears beside the cursor This means that the selected field is indexed so that its contents are viewable as a searchable list Double clicking the selected field will open a viewable list of the table s contents 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 59 The sequential order that the contents will appear depends on which field you have selected for the drop down list For example if you are editing operators and double click in the operator number field the list is in numerical order according to the operator numbers Double clicking the operator name field opens the same information but listed alphabetically according to the operator names The data list s left column will contain the data from the field selected The LBoss program has 2 different styles of search windows The first is fixed and the data and fileds included in the window cannot be changed Here is a sample of a simple search window l vendors oix a h Search Query Vendor Accot select F334 F27 upper F334 as F3345 from Ve i E Vendor name Vendor 1 Contact name Select vendor Vendor Best Supplier Ltd 101 Hitchcock Foods 102 Kraft Foods 202 Address 1 Address 2 Woodstock Ltd 103 Cityville xl Vendor 1 City State Zip cc
380. port from the list of reports This hides the report but does not remove it from the list View Hidden Used to locate hidden reports showing the entire list accessible according to the user security level programmed Property Opens the report s properties panel see the Report Properties help page below New Create a new report list entry and its associated report Delete Remove the report from the list and delete it Report Selection Report Selection Utility The L BOSS reports are accessed by clicking the Reports icon found on the L BOSS desktop Depending on how the security levels are programmed you may be required to login The Report utility will open displaying the reports available according to the logged user 2001 2008 Logivision Report System 181 ioi xi Cashiers Certificates Clients Department Financial Inventory Labels List PLU sales Promotion Sub Department System Category analysis cS End of day GF Hourly Layaway Print Next Close Y This example shows the Report Selection Utility The Report Selection utility functions much as a Window s style browser with folders for each report type More frequently used reports appear as icons in the root of the report list Remember that reports are linked to security levels and that if you don t have access to a report it will
381. precedence over option 1 and 2 Printer The Preview Maximized option is set to on by default and is used to determine the Report application s default Report Viewer window size When selected reports open Full Screen When not selected reports will open without using the entire screen area Re Init Printer Some printer drivers do not re initialize the printer between print jobs For example this means that if a previous print job was printed in Landscape the next job will also print that way unless the printer is reset Select this option to force the printer driver to re initialize to default settings for every print job it receives from L BOSS The Default selection is used to define that reports will be directed to the default windows printer If you prefer using a different printer for reports press the Select button and choose the printer Note that you can set a specific printer for any report that will override the settings you make here Refer to the report properties set up for information on how to set a different printer for a specific report Cost Price Calculation This option determines how the Maintenance application will calculate prices from the cost Selecting Markup of cost uses the number indicated in the Price tab s price calculation field as the percentage of the cost to add on top of the cost to obtain a retail price The Margin Profit setting uses the number indicated in the Price tab s price calculation field a
382. preferred shoppers The discount table functions as part of the preferred shopper module Contact your dealer to order the option if it is not licensed Discount cu q gt Bv Sub department GROCERY Client level 1 Regular customer MPF Sale Discount rate Cost NO NO 10 00 E NO YES 5 00 NO 0 00 2001 2008 Logivision 152 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Understanding the discount table The discount table is used to control discounts by customer type and by sub department By now you understand the relationship between PLU s and sub departments You should also understand what a client level is before proceeding Assuming that you have a grasp on the above here is how the discount table works As an example let s suppose that customers assigned to client level 1should get a 5 discount off the price of items linked to sub department 1 But the same customers assigned to client level 1 receive 15 off items linked to sub department 2 By adding records to control these discounts the L POS can automatically handle the price control for you Now let s add into the equation that customers assigned to Client level 2 receive 10 off the price of items in sub department 1 and 20 off the price of items linked to sub department 2 Getting more complex but still a way of life in some retail stores To go a step further imagine a scenario where employees are assigned as Client level 3 and they receiv
383. presented until the Maintenance application is restarted Please read the warning below before using the Modify option WARNING Be extremely careful when using this option This option is normally used in situations where an error has been made while creating a new item code The new item has 2001 2008 Logivision 108 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 6 2 3 been created and programmed but with the wrong code Since the new item has not been sold in the system there are no serious effects Before using this action you should consider these factors e Although occasionally necessary because manufacturers sometimes change their product s UPC the repercussions of this action are serious In such cases you should use the Copy option creating a new code with the same information as the old code In this way you can continue to sell the old code e The item s sales history is linked to the old code The Modify option actually deletes the old code from the database so when you view item sales reports that contain the old code the code will appear without a description WARNING The copy function does not copy all data from the existing product to the new one you create with the copy function The inventory records are not copied The system only copies the price information for the price target and level you are on to the new item The system only copies the default vendor for the cost target you select to the new
384. programmed with a sub department number that does not exist in the sub department table If there are un referenced sub departments the items will appear in a list You can then either correct the entry or create a new sub department table record Unreferenced bottle link Similar to un referenced sub departments it is possible to assign a non existent bottle link to an item that sells with a bottle Run the test to find any items that have been incorrectly linked From the ensuing list you can either fix the bottle link number or open the bottle link table to add a new record Unreferenced tare link Run this test to discover items in the database that reference a tare table record that does not exist If any items appear in the list double click to edit immediately correcting the problem in the item or programming the tare table to include the unreferenced record 2001 2008 Logivision 64 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 PLU price over 100 00 This test looks for items that have prices over 100 00 The system does not limit item pricing this utility is included to find items that have probably been incorrectly programmed often an undetected typo This is handy if your store does not have any items with prices in the 100 00 range Show POS targets L BOSS makes use of target groups to know which terminals are to receive programming When selected an information list opens displaying a list of all POS targ
385. r Manual 2 2 3 0 2 1 4 1 10 12 07 680 Mailslot received 00190611ACT SUPPORTS the precise time that the process began including milliseconds 10 12 07 680 Mailslot received 00190611ACT SUPPORTS a short description of the process 10 12 07 680 Mailslot received 00190611ACT SUPPORTS3 the three digit store number 10 12 07 680 Mailslot received 00190611ACT SUPPORTS the three digit terminal number 10 12 07 680 Mailslot received 00190611ACT SUPPORTS3 the two digit internal Mailslot line number internal id 10 12 07 680 Mailslot received 00190611ACT SUPPORTS the terminal s status ACT means active 10 12 07 680 Mailslot received 00190611ACT SUPPORTS the terminal s machine network name The viewer has both a top bar main menu and buttons to control how the viewer behaves and to allow you to determine what exchanges are being traced The help pages below this topic explain the functions and controls for the View Internal Process viewer utility Process Viewer Buttons Controlling the Viewer Internal process of xi Files View 12 03 22 940 Mailslot received 001920024CT GUY SUPER 12 03 42 940 Mailslot received 001920030FF 12 03 50 520 Mailslot received 00192000BEG 12 03 50 520 Send MailSlot MailSlot wSERY 001906184CT SUPPORT3 12 03 50 520 Mailslot received 001904634CT SUPPORT2 12 03 50 520 Mailslot received 001906184CT SUPPORT3 12 03 50 630 Mailslot received 001920024CT GUY SUPER
386. r Manual 2 2 3 0 Logivision LV Page Entry tracking 1 Printed Wednesday April 27 2005 8 42 16 PM EET From Friday April 01 2005 450 464 5673 To Wednesday April 27 2005 Store 003 Module Receiving Vendor 1 PLU Description Weight aty Cases Reg cost Total 1 Joe s Fresh Produce 00000000000001 OREO COOKIES 0 000 418 34 8333 52 39 628 67 00000000000004 Nachos 8 oz bag 0 000 16 16 2 00 2 00 00000000000005 IDEAL CREAM CORN 17 000 0 0 0 00 0 00 Qoooo000000006 COKE CLASSIC 12 OZ CAN 0 000 207 8 625 3 88 93 15 00000000000007 DIET COKE 12 OZ CAN 0 000 48 2 0 90 21 60 00000000000013 LARGE COFFEE 0 000 132 11 7 50 90 00 00000000001234 Camel Carton 0 000 3 3 111 00 111 00 00000000004011 BANANAS 43 000 0 0 19 35 19 35 0000000000401 2 BANANAS PLANTAIN 30 000 D 0 13 50 13 50 00000000004013 VALENCIA ORANGE MEDIUM 15 000 0 0 1 16 28 80 00000000004014 VALENCIA ORANGE SMALL 6 000 0 0 0 54 10 80 00000000004015 VALENCIA ORANGE LARGE 12 000 0 0 23 40 23 40 00000000004017 APPLES GRANNY SMITH 12 PC 16 000 0 0 0 59 28 33 Total 1 Joe s Fresh Produce 135 000 824 75 4583 1 070 60 Items below minimum This report displays a list of items below minimum stock level Items below minimum Logivision LV Page 144 Printed Thursday April 28 2005 11 44 30 AM 450 464 2131 Store 003 450 464 5673 item group PAL All stores eae Price group PAL All stores Supplier 1 Cost group PAL All stores R
387. r entering the new code the standard PLU edit screen appears allowing you to enter the complete item information Adding New Items by Copying Often new items contain much of the same information as an existing item For example a manufacturer decides to distribute a new flavour of an existing product This means that the new item s format vendor and price are probably identical as existing items with the only difference being the UPC item code and descriptor In these cases it is much easier to create the item by copying the information from an existing PLU To create a new item by copying from an existing one Instead of pressing the enter the new code directly in the Item Number field just as you would to extract an existing PLU from the database Because the Maintenance application doesn t find the new code it opens a QueryForm panel with the following options 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 107 PLU 0000000011111 A Please the type of action to be taken Create Modify Always New Always copy Eee Modify existing ry ways m o d ify This example shows the item creation options Options Cancel to abandon the operation if you have entered a non existing item code in error New creates the new item and blank all the existing data fields following the same procedure as described above for creating items with the toolbar button Always
388. r example you have done a count for today and then you realize that their are sales that were not processed After you have processed the sales data use the Compute option to recalculate the stock levels View or reprint previous transactions Use the View menu option to recall any transaction including your orders received goods adjustments and counts that have been entered on the system Once the transaction is recalled you may revise it print it or even delete it If any change is made to an order that had already been posted you need to use the Compute option to recalculate the stock levels A warning will appear to this effect Purging Old Inventory Records The View option allows you to see entries made in previous transactions To remove 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 249 5 2 received transaction data from the list use the Purge option You cannot purge orders Select the date before which you want the transaction data to be removed Note that this does not in any way affect stock levels Pickups and Loans Working with Cashier Pickups Loans and Declarations Pickups and Loans This Entry module option is used if your store balances cashiers in the back end that is to say from an L BOSS station Entries made here are used to compile the financial information used and viewed in the reports such as end of day financial and cashier reports The Pickup module is accessed from the Entry app
389. r field F01 in the database If you have sorted the column by clicking in the description field the locate tool will search the item description field F29 in the database You can also use this type of search window to perform a wildcard search the field you are searching contains the data in a continuous string For example you want to search for all products that include the word berry anywhere in the description Type the word berry into the locate window The system will display the first product it locates beginning with the word berry Press the Enh Search button The system will display every product that includes the word berry So the first list may show no results unless there are products that start with Berry But the second list would show strawberry blueberry raspberry etc The File menu option in the search window allows you to send the data from the search list to an export file or to a printer This is a simple way to print a very specific list set a filter to find your items The Apply button will produce this type of search list which can then be printed or exported to a csv file 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 61 3 4 The next major advantage to this type of list is that a customized query can be defined if you understand the LBoss database structure and you have a minimum knowlegde of sq commands Access the options menu and select custom query The system will open up an
390. r terminal messages to be sent This second message center is sometimes required in stores where the main message center is left unattended You would still want to send a copy of each message to the front of the store where someone is working on a terminal It is possible to turn on or to turn off the second message center from the L BOSS file menu Polling local Do not changed unless requested to do so by technical staff This flag means that the server will retrieve transaction files from the terminals on the polling list In rara situations it may be necessary to move polling to a separate machine When this occurs your system will be changed by a qualified technician Email all urgent messages Select this option to send a warning email every time an urgent message is received by the L BOSS The message will be sent to the destination defined in the email configuration tab 2 1 8 3 1 IP List set up The system can use what we refer to as an IP list This is a list of fixed IP adresses that different internal applications use to exchange messages Here is what you need to do to implement the IPList system which will direct the mailslots to a specific IP instead of being broadcast over the network This means that terminals can be in different sub nets in different workgroups etc 1 Create a text file called IPList ini anywhere on the PC 2 In that file you need to create the following sections in there for every component of the
391. r the following business day If you post the count for that same day it will be done as of 12 00am before any sales or other inventory transactions occured So the on hand will display the wrong totals You need to select the following day as the count date The count transaction in Entry can be made any time the following day because it is always considered as the first transaction of the day e You can select the Load on hand option to create a list of all inventory items When this option is selected you also have the option to reset all current stock on hand values to Zero to facilitate the count procedure This way you will not need to worry about stock on hand values for items you no longer carry they will be reset and if they are not counted they will remain at zero Use the Menu select Edit and the select the Reset all items to 0 option e When you add an item that was already counted for the day you are prompted for user decision should the system add the new count to the existing count for the day or should the system replace the previous entry with this new count This will allow you to count stock found in more than one physical location By definition multiple counts performed on the same item using a portable data terminal are added to each other not replaced e At any time in the count you can edit a previous line entry by entering the product code e You can delete a line entry with the F3 Delete function e When you have fi
392. r the statistics Price Target The target data that is being tested for the results that show in the Statistics panel This determines which Price table is being used for the statistics NOTE For help about targets see the Terminal Table programming help in this manual Customer tab This tab allows you to view statistics related to the customer file Total records This is the total number of records in the customer report database RPT_CLT Weekly records This is the total number of weekly sales records in the customer report database RPT_CLT Old weekly This is the total number of old weekly records in the customer report database RPT_CLT Monthly This is the total number of montly records in the customer report database RPT_CLT Old Monthly This is the total number of old monthly records in the customer report database RPT_CLT Delete Use this button to purge the old data from the file This will eliminate unused data and may speed up processing RPT_ITM_D tab This tab shows statistics in the daily item movement file 2001 2008 Logivision 142 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 7 Number of records Total number of rows in the daily item movement table Number of INV records Total number of inventory related records in the daily item movement table Physical count records Total number of inventory count records in the daily item movement table Adjustment records Total nu
393. rameters The alpha parameters section only appears here to maintain compatibility with a third party software used in early L POS versions and is no longer used Totalizer Link List The bottom portion of the Function table shows a list of all Totalizers associated with the currently selected function If the Totalizer window is open on the Maintenance desktop clicking on the Totalizer number in the list forces the totalizer table to display the totalizer s information The Operand field is used to change the sign of the totalizer information to match the accounting status of the totalizer usually or If the operand is incorrect or is required but missing L POS terminals will issue an Out of balance error warning NOTE When you need to collect sales data by sub department or by department per cashier or per customer you need to adjust the properties of certain functions You need to decide whether you will store sub department or department data in the cashier report database and in the customer report database You cannot store both Once that decision is made here are the modifications you must make in the function table If you want to collect sub department information you need to modify the PLU function 710 and the sub department function 715 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 161 Functions ateEX Cr Bv Access BR 10 M No User M New Host SAL IV Cashier IV Clerk Desc P
394. ransactions and the total that the system processed and compares the numbers with data stored on the registers The total in the difference column should amount to zero If there is a difference in the amounts it is very important to reprocess the data collected for that day A difference in the quantity is less alarming It means your system has functions that do not involve dollar amounts which do not have a counter programmed in the report totals Correct this in the totalizer setup of L BOSS or in the System settings under totalizer in Pos Setup 2001 2008 Logivision View Log 259 The Lo log icon displays the table containing information that is recorded when files are exchanged with the POS terminals There are 3 different views available they are accessed by pressing the logs icon successively The first view shows the information on files that L BOSS sent to the lanes for which no status file was returned to the backend The second view shows information on files that were received and not processed properly by a POS terminal The third view shows a log of all the files transferred to the lanes 7 2 Urgent Messages Viewing Urgent Messages Urgent Message will flash on the L BOSS Desktop whenever a new urgent message has been received by the back end controller Clicking on the flashing Urgent message will access the view log page and open the urgent message immediately If you do not delete the urgent message t
395. rd telephone number field becomes necessary the entire database must be changed to accept the new information Relational databases use table sets to link information allowing for far greater flexibility As with any database each data type must have a unique identifier to distinguish it from other data items of the same type By combining two or more unique identifiers it is possible to keep multiple values for a single data type For example if you sell items at different price levels you need to keep many prices for the same item Instead of adding price fields the relational system allows you to have a price level table with as many levels as required By combining the unique item code and the price level it is possible to create a new unique record for each price for the item in the price table Security As with any critical data system security is always an issue L BOSS offers configurable security levels so that users can only access functions that are available to their assigned security level For example you probably want the store manager to be allowed to add remove items but cashiers should not be allowed When a user logs into the system they can only activate or use options that their security level allows them 1 1 Navigation Navigating the L BOSS Application Using the mouse Throughout the L BOSS application you will find drop down menus and main screen icon groups to navigate through the program or launch util
396. rds You only need to add contacts and place the check account number in the home ohone number field Cellular This is an alternate number for the contact 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 147 Email This is the contact s email address entered here for office reference only Remark This is a per contact message that can be programmed to appear on the POS display when this account is used Then icon opens a window where you can add contact specific information into 5 text fields Use these fields to build reports as required The fields can contain information such as driver s license favorite wine or anything else you may need to track for your accounts The field titles are info field 1 to info field 5 by default These screen labels can be changed by opening the L BOSS configuration menu and accessing the Advanced flag settings Here is the contact table extra info fields window Information fields x Favorite red wine SantenyteCu ssts S Favorite white wine ChateaudesMerles ss tst S Info field 3 iiss Info field 4 E Info field 5 OK Cancel Note if the current cashier s phone number matches the account phone number or the account contact phone or cell number the transaction will not be allowed This is to prohibit cashiers from using their own account to sell to themselves or to others with their own account discount Associating a Photo with a Customer L
397. re cere reece errr renee aai Eana a iDan raia an Eaa AESi 81 GOSE TADS E TEET AEE T EA E custo igsuss E A E AT 88 Inventory Tabios aaa aAa ASEA aA a aaraa aE Na 91 STE E e E EAE E EE EE A AE E E E E E E E E 94 Picture TA sss 2c fcc science ana aE de Seta sas E Ea Aaa E OEE ESERE EEEO ALN 95 A ccc arcsec E E T E E E E E A ene te 96 Kitaba E EE E 100 Working With Items eccscserensteeesscsenensenenensneeesaccesessenenenaneeesaceeessenenenaneeenaeceseasnenenaneessaeeesanenenenaneeenaceeeeanene 103 Filtering and Global Modifications 0 ceccecceeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeaeesaeeeaeeseneeseeseaeesieeseeeseeeeaes 103 Add Copy Delete Iteims cei eeceeeceeeceeeneeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeaeesaeeeaeeseaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseeeseeeseaeeseeseaeee 106 Deploying Modified Items ee eeceeeeeeeceeeeeneeeeaeeeseeseneeeseeseaeecaeeseaeeeaeeeaeessaeeeseeseaeesaeessaeeeseeeeaeersaees 108 Rental W mS 25 cc c 22cicceteessugecechsasacascescedssehleaeseneeasiseusleneceandsucedoe cneessancecacesacacaccenceezceseneseaenanistustenecsndeseleate Item Label Setup Sub department Table Sub department Programming ccccecceeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeesneeseaeesieeseaeene 114 Department Table ciciccsiscicniccssecicssecscscectcsessastscavasspcncnescascerssabdsaveccnceansanascutassnasendsaasesseeatdsascvabennsassscatasspdbandeansentene 117 Department Programming icicscis
398. re data is sent to the L POS terminals If you know the specific data table or configuration file you need to send use this option for quick results e Select the Deploy individual file from the L BOSS File menu e A list window opens showing all available data tables and configuration files e From the list select the file to deploy If you need to overwrite the data on the POS terminal with the data from the back end database select replace see note above Click the Deploy button A window opens displaying a list of available terminals and terminal groups targets Select the destination terminal or group Press the OK button to send now Cancel to abort 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS Main Menus 25 Configuration Panel Basic L BOSS Set Up Information WARNING Most of the options available in the Configuration panel control how L BOSS behaves Tampering with these settings can cause serious system failure Please consult your Logivision dealer before changing any settings L BOSS uses a basic configuration file to keep track of global application information for the installation The configuration panel is divided into tabbed sections Company Company name address and other information used to personalize report pages etc System Store number database type server and office disk location and other installation setups Misc Various system options and settings Host For multi store
399. re not setup in the Events Tasks list For example commands that re program front end machines or other utilities that maintain the database tables Use this option to execute a command file manually Warning You should only use this option if you are certain that you are executing the correct command By running an internal command file you can inadvertently or even severely damage the data contained in the system database tables If you are unsure you should consult the system administrator or your L BOSS dealer for technical support Execute command file This menu option opens a Windows Explorer style window file browser to allow you to select an internal command file for execution The L BOSS internal command files have a common sql file extension The file browser s Files of type setting bottom of window is set to find sql files found under the default LBOSS Office folder To execute one command file Browse the Office folder to locate the command to execute Select the file and press open or double click the file A confirm execute panel opens Press Yes to accept no or Cancel to abort the process Deploy Individual File Sending Information From One Database Table L BOSS keeps all data in database tables with one table for each specific data type For example system operator information is kept in an operator table within the database In normal circumstances daily routine involves modifications to da
400. red into the transaction To sort in any other order use the View menu option The sort order on the screen cannot be changed once a transaction has been posted to the database The printed copies of inventory transactions are always made in the order that was visible on the screen when the transaction was posted 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 227 5 1 2 2 3 Receive from Portable device file Receiving Stock using a Portable Device The L BOSS portable interface includes a receiving option that allows users to collect reception information by scanning the products and entering received quantities Select Portable device from the receiving menu to open the Select vendor information window Select vendor information Vendor fi 01 Best Supplier Ltd 03701 2008 v Inv PO Inventory Store number Cost target 003 Store 3 PAL Store program Remark From portable 1 Portable device file OK el I Cancel Select the vendor to use for this receiving transaction Enter a remark and select the portable device session file that was saved to the system Portable Device Set up Portable device import file C LBOSS Office Portable RFO001 Rec Type of file HT Receiving v OK Cancel The receiving application files are located in the LBOSS Office Portable folder The files will have the REC extension and include the session number used when creating the file with the wi
401. reless device When the file is selected press the Ok to open the file Now you will press OK in the Select vendor information window to import the file saved with the portable terminal 2001 2008 Logivision 228 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Confirm 2 lines processed 100 percent done a Do you want to delete the file RF0010_101 0rd The system will process the file display the number of rows it processed and prompt you if you are ready to delete the file It is possible that you have scanned some items with the hand held that cannot be processed by Entry The following window will appear if this situation occurs It is up to you to take the required action to correct the problem Information There are 2 skipped items in the import file The reason could be o Items not Found in the database o Inventory flag not turned on o No vendor associated with this item o Items are not sold by this vendor Do you want to see the exception File now Press Yes to view a list of the items that will not be processed as part of the receiving If the items are not set up properly in the database you need to correct them and assign the inventory status to each item as explained previously Once you have viewed the skipped items list all other items that were processed will be sent to the receiving screen for you to process the transaction The skipped items are saved in a file that will have the same n
402. required For example if you 2001 2008 Logivision 264 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 need to see all transactions between 10 00AM and 2 00PM that included manual amount entries into the subdepartment 5 you would set the following Electronic Journal Viewer Professional O x File Edit View Print Help Transaction Cashier z Customer F11 Delete ine Date Time Cust Store Terminal 2000 01 20 09 28 09 on 001 F12 Insert ine line 20701700 61 Kb i F4 F5 Field NA TA Sub Sopi Corciion tre E gt S ps g jozi boon le e a Esc Exit F2 Date PgUp Prv PaDri Nxt F3 Search Initiating a search with incomplete data will display an error telling you which search line is incomplete The cursor will be positioned automatically in the field where the data must be added to assist you Note that in the interest of simplifying the data entry we have enabled use of the Enter key to change fields within the search data entry forms So if you have entered Time in the F4 column press Enter to move to the F5 field enter to move to the F6 column etc If the last column is left blank L POS assumes that the search criteria is complete and pressing Enter will execute the search If an additional entry is required to funnel toward the data you are searching for press the down arrow key to add a condition to create another search entry line The EJ search execut
403. return data to a headquarter system The send to host option will allow output of the changes made on the local L BOSS machine back to a host system This means that changes can be made at a store and sent back up to the host system Select this option for the tables that may be edited locally in a store Please consider as well that changes sent back up to the headquarter system will be deployed to all terminals that are part of the same target group for that file type This means that if a price is changed at store 3 and all stores share the information on that product the change will make it to the other stores in the next communication cycle To force a change to make its way back up to the head office you must press the Satellite from the menu for that record Using the deploy all changes option will not return any information to the host system It is an item by item decision that can only be activated one item at a time with the satellite icon Mix amp Match Table Mix amp Match Table Programming Mix and match should be used when you need to associate items for pricing deals For example if you want to price packages of Jello at 0 50 each and 3 for 1 39 you would use the package price feature To take it further you can associate similar UPC codes by mix and match number L POS will accumulate the quantity of all items in a common mix match group to give the quantity discount So associating the strawberry orange and lemon Jello into
404. rice 68 Calendar 47 case cost 88 case pack size 88 Category 73 75 Category Table Programming 123 change at midnight 30 change manually 30 change the current language 16 Changing the Events Tasks List Order 253 Cleanup Tab 42 Client Age 76 Client level 143 Client Port 37 Close L BOSS 50 collecting sales information 9 21 Command Directories 252 Comment 75 Communicate now 21 communication 21 communication failure 9 communication problem 17 company 26 name 26 Tab Settings 26 Compression 30 2001 2008 Logivision 336 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Compute Option 248 Computer Configuration 35 configuration file 23 Configuration Panel overview 25 Configure scanner 63 Contact 143 Controller 30 Controlling Database Size 10 Controlling Rental Items 109 Controlling the Maintenance Desktop 177 Controlling the Viewer 18 19 Copy item 106 Cost Price Calculation 35 Cost Break 88 Cost Target 88 Counting 234 and Adjusting Stock 234 Inventory 234 Coupons 96 Create new items 106 Creating An Automated Backup 327 Creating Batches 130 Creating Promotional Coupons 96 Criteria 103 cursor with question mark 58 Customer 142 Account view 142 Customer Level Table Programming 148 Discount 148 Level Table 148 Risk level 149 Customer Account Flags 143 Customer accounts 142 Customer number 143 customized options 52 D Daily Maintenance Process 10 data integrity 9 Data integrity test 137 Data Maintenanc
405. rice of all other items with the same like code will be instantly changed If you leave this code blank the system will place the same UPC code into the Like code when a report is taken that uses this PLU So don t be surprised to see a number in that field even though you did not place it there 2001 2008 Logivision 82 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Price Target In a single store situation there is normally only one target However if you are working in a Headquarters L BOSS system or the store has different pricing depending on the terminal you may need to set different prices for different targets To learn more about Terminal table programming go to the Terminal table help page By default the target for prices is PAL which means All Lanes When prices are common to all targets you should not need to change the default PAL target If you do need to change targets double click the Price Target field and select the appropriate target for the price The targets are created using the Maintenance application s Register menu Terminal option The system allows you to enter both regular and sale prices for as many price levels as required Price Level L POS and L BOSS support an unlimited number of prices for each item Price levels can be used for customer accounts or preferred shopper situations or for special pricing To change the price level for an item double click the Level field If the price level exi
406. rk Centre Page 210 Laurier 1 1 Printed Monday May 23 2005 4 45 08 PM pope tlt Store From Tuesday March 01 2005 450 464 5673 003 to Monday May 23 2005 item group PAL All stores Cost group PAL All stores From sub dept lt First gt to lt Last gt End of End of Physical Calculated Period Period Count PLU Description count date Start Received Adjustments Transfer Sales Count count Variance pate 00000000000001 OREO COOKIES 2 1 2005 102 430 2 1 481 48 1 47 412412005 00000000000003 PREMIUM PLUS SODA 2 1 2005 53 0 0 0 1075 1128 1046 82 412412005 00000000000004 Nachos 8 oz bag 111900 1 16 0 2 72 59 361 420 412412005 00000000000005 IDEAL CREAM CORN 4 1 1900 0 0 0 0 57 57 0 57 412412005 00000000000006 COKE CLASSIC 120Z 2 1 2005 536 207 3 0 139 601 601 0 2712005 00000000000007 DIET COKE 12 OZ CA 21 2005 10 432 0 0 31 411 411 0 2112005 00000000000013 LARGE COFFEE 4 1 1900 0 132 0 0 3 129 129 0 17111900 00000000000077 DIET COKE 12 OZ CA 1 1 1900 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 0 17111900 00000000000078 DIET COKE 12 OZ CA 1 1 1900 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1711900 00000000000088 DIET COKE 12 OZ CAM 1 1 1900 0 0 0 0 4 4 4 0 17141900 00000000000100 Beer 355ml cans 27112005 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2112005 00000000000101 REGULAR UNLEADED 2 1 2005 11 0 0 0 75 86 86 0 2112005 00000000000200 Beer 355ml cans 212005 0 0 0 0 0 f 0 0 2712005 00000000000224 Beer 355ml cans case 2 1 2005 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2112005 00000000000817 25EXPORTAREGULA 1 1 1900 0 0 0 0 0 25 0 25
407. rogram Manual Send soft date Manual Daily maintenance Manual Auto 6 13 2002 1 00 Monthly maintenance Manual Auto 7 1 2002 3 00 Account maintenance Manual Account Cash maintenance Manual Generate interrest Manual Auta 7 1 2002 2 30 Backup Auto 6 13 2002 2 30 Execute Edit Add Close This example shows the Events Task utility The Description column displays the command s name The Scheduled column displays the command s execution status manual manual and automatic Auto only The Load column shows which Tasks or Events are set to run when L BOSS is launched The Next Event list the next time date for automated commands The Task Manager s option buttons are positioned below the list of system commands Execute After selecting the appropriate command press this to force the system command to run Edit Use this button to modify the programming for the selected command 2001 2008 Logivision Events Tasks 253 6 1 Add Use this option to add new commands to the Task Manager list Close Closes the Task Manager This does not stop the automated commands from executing Navigating Command Directories Some Tasks in the list are found within Directories or event categories In other words if more than one command exists for a specific task the tasks may be grouped together under one heading In the example above the PT600 is a goup of commands that deal with th
408. ropriate data table selected To find out more about testing tables using the dynamic File menu options please see the Dynamic File Menu Options help page under this manual s Working with Items help section Once the Statistics utility is open on screen Execute Button Press the Execute button at the bottom left of the panel to test the data tables Cancel to close the utility without testing the data NOTE The information collected using the Statistics utility always refers to the data tables for the Item Target selected at the bottom of the screen above the Execute button In single store situations this is normally PAL In Multi store situations be sure to select the correct target for the operation For help about targets see the Terminal Table programming help in this manual 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 139 M Statistics General Customer Rpt_ltm_D Reports Number of items OBJ PRICE records COST records Non teferenced POS Non referenced PRICE Non teferenced COST Non teferenced SCT Non teferenced ECL Missing POS Missing PRICE PLU too short PLU too long Deleted items Records not deployed Sub Departments Departments Promo Price N A Batches Items in Batch ltem target PAL v This example shows the Statistics Data testing panel Number of Items OBJ This indicates the number of items that exist in the selected target s Object tabl
409. rrent item into the transaction Delete item F3 This function deletes the current item from the transaction Reset all items to zero This is used with the count function Reset on order to zero This will reset the on order quantity for this item back to zero Description search F7 This opens the search window based on product description View 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 209 5 1 2 1 Day info This window will display movement on this product for today and is most useful during the count function Extended day info This displays the contents of custom sql statements Order by This option allows you to determine the display order of items added to the transaction grid Select Entered to view as the items were added to the transaction or imported from the portable device If you are entering receiving off a supplier invoice this may assist in matching the 2 documents The transaction will print and re print in the same the order that was displayed on screen when you post the transaction Entered will appear as entered into the transaction PLU Vendor item code Description Store Case Unit Note The order is saved as entered by default Note 2 The entry menus and some buttons are dynamic meaning they can change depending on what you are doing For example when you are working on an open order the Print F5 buttons becomes Worksheet Some buttons or menu options may appear grayed
410. rs keyboards etc This group would be selected as Report and Program 002 including register 2 only This group would be selected as Report and Program etc for all other registers as for group 001 901 including the back office terminal number 901 This will be selected as a Report target Then a report can be taken for back office operations such as account payments performed on this unit 902 if terminal 902 exists same as above for 901 2001 2008 Logivision 172 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Setting up terminals and target groups with remote data communications Under normal circumstances LRemote will be used to transfer data between L BOSS stations found in different locations In order for this to occur you need to set up parameters at each side Create an Outboxhost folder on the hard drive of the L BOSS server in each store See the related programming on the L BOSS File menu under Configuration and Host tab Terminals required at Headquarters to transfer data to remote stores The headquarter terminal list will include a terminal for each back office machine in each store Each of these terminals will have its Inbox You have a choice as to whether report data is available per terminal for each store or whether the report data from each terminal in the store is merged into a common total for the store Related flag in L BOSS File Configuration menu under Host If you do not want merged data then
411. s Both L BOSS and L POS ship with basic report and form templates that meet the needs of most retail businesses In some cases your Logivision dealer may have included specialized reports If the reports and forms that were included in your installation adequately display your information you do not need the Form Manager The Form Manager uses a visual programming interface that allows the user to drag and drop fields and other design elements objects on a template making it simple to create visually attractive reports The Form Manager provides a complete set of tools to configure report and form templates as well as item or shelf labels The tools are designed to work with data fields graphic elements including line and rectangle drawing tools and formulas for report time calculations L BOSS Report Template Files Each L BOSS report file sql has an associated template file frp that controls the report s on screen and printed format along with special formulas that allow data manipulation within the template The report template uses fields that are linked with the fields in the report s SQL file to report the SQL query results L POS Form Template Files Front end L POS terminals can also print reports by requesting information from the L BOSS controller Because the L POS reports are often printed on the receipt printer they cannot use the same template as the L BOSS reports L POS templates are called Form templates to
412. s NO NO NO YES etc If you need cost plus place a check mark in the cost plus box Modifying records in the discount table Locate the record to be changed and enter the new values Removing records from the discount table Locate the record to be removed and press the Delete tool E3 from the menu To locate an existing record double click in the sub department field A list of the sub departments currently assigned to the table will appear N B The discount table does not over ride the prohibit discount status of individual PLU s If you need to give a discount to customers on some PLU s even when the item is set to prohibit discount you must add any value in the item discount for the specified price level Access item maintenance and the price tab Enter any value in the item discount field Price F112 This discount will not be given to the customer The customer will receive the discount from the related sub department as programmed in the customer discount table The value in F112 only means that the prohibit dicount flag should be ignored if there is a discount rate in the discount table Note When you edit the discount table the file menu includes the send to host option Send to host The Send to host option of the File menu options is only available when the Host active option is selected to return data to a headquarter system The send to host option will allow output of the changes made on the local L BOSS machine ba
413. s 142 CUSTOMED scssccndicescctcscececnsscuzcsusteisentenessvctessusseicnocscteccuevsaseercsnsdestccetesdesterveutceshebceceseseetssntenencuchsesasdetesndcsessbcesestete 143 Adjusting the account balances cccccseeessneeeesseeeeeseeeeessneeeesseeeeeseneeessneesesaeeeaseneeessneesessaeseaseneeenseesassaeeeasens 148 Client Level Table isiiccicccscscssccvsssececcsscssnctcnessascercsancasacocecesasceecssuceesccensesasteaceenceesuscncvsuseerseutcssssscnsevaseetestbevensbcuserdaes 148 Risk Level Table aoicncscicccse ccisdee ss denni ccacezeccctece naisia raa edana tesesbeces pad sa aaaea addaa ceadcpencobececeisdertuses rda piispaa nadi eae 149 oTa En A EEEE E E E E EE E E E E E E 151 Discount 2001 2008 Logivision Contents III 9 10 11 Section IV Product reward program PRP 153 CUSTOM MESSAGES oiriin cciedict secu ce veces edecc 2d gees cece eaaa iERdE Na aano cs sued de ceedsurecaue cies se edueeceided vecy edauescacdsius cthezedereaden 155 Register Menu senenenssisinni ctieeteecccesnsccccesteecedesttectcestaenceesdesncsstuecduesnacctiesties 155 Operator Table EE E E E E E E 156 FUNCTIONS Table issii osisir asro decide iato aruit ra dedetececeiee ail ara aona iiano p idoira eaueesacersaardedebesetevaesebicconersaces 158 T talizer Table cna aa e ideterccetcecerecdesubaecncde cpuddedebsucochdestedeyebe coeds etubdefesnuapcbeeyadesunessueteesesdebeecuctsieepsudevenesces 164 Store information wes
414. s an account balance Before trying to delete or modify account numbers set the balance to zero see the balance option in the client table If an account number is modified or the account is deleted past transactions will still appear on reports for that period If you create a new account with a previously used then deleted account number past transactions viewed in reports for the re used number will show as if they belong new account NOTE Payments made to accounts do not target specific transactions Amounts received on accounts apply to the global amount Customer Managing the Customer File L BOSS allows you to create an unlimited number of records within the Client or customer table Each customer account can have multiple sub accounts or Contacts account users but must have a main user Accounts must be linked to both a risk level and a customer level 2001 2008 Logivision 144 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 L Client L Customer leyel x Toit EX ADP Bo Pee pec ed Ih Client number fi Modified Level number 2 ee A wee 7 we Company logvision escription ISivercustomerd Address ja 0 Laurier City Beloeil Pricelevel 1 Prov State Gc Code J3G 4G7 Discount 5 Country Canada Expiry Phone 450 464 2131 Fax 450 464 5673 Info 1 Info 2 Risk level td Tax 1 oo Tax 2 Cu Exempt Exempt x 4 gt a v Points 6103 Balance Risk level 3 Boo Group 223 32 Cli
415. s brought back up to date without user intervention e Customer account balances cannot be retrieved when L BOSS is not operating Charge sales can be posted and the account data will be transferred and posted when the L BOSS system is restarted No store credit limit etc is verified e No reports can be requested on the front end terminals if L BOSS is not operating e Floating cashiers have totals that are retrieved from the L BOSS machine whenever a floating cashier logs on The floating cashier balances are not available when the L BOSS Controller is unavailable 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS Main Menus 51 2 2 Modules Menu LY L BOSS 003 901 File imc Special Help Pickup Safe balancing GL Export Maintenance Report Pos Setup Maintenance Entry module Events tasks a Report view log Monitor Eo Entry Tracker View log R Tracker E Exit DEBUG BUILD System ready 901 Modules Menu Options The Modules menu option is used to open other applications available from L BOSS These include Pickup This choice will open the pickup screen Pickups are also available directly from the Entry main menu Safe balancing This choice will open the safe or office balancing application GL Export This option opens the general ledger export program Maintenance This is the database information editor viewer It is used to maintain database tables items operators and other system infor
416. s flag is used to exclude the sales of this sub department from the Net sales and Total sales of the store This is sometimes the case for sub departments used for bottle sales lottery returns etc No pts redemption This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR Si 3 Sets selective itemizer 3 Validation req d This item will require validation on the ECR General ledger Enter the GL to use for posting ssales with the GL interface option D or C 9Debit Credit Related to GL is this account a debit or credit account Restrictor code This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR Customer age This flag is available to restrict the sale of age sensitive products such as tobacco or alcohol When this flag is set the first item entered will prompt for customer age The value of 18 or 21 is programmed in the LRegister Setup Configuration Operator age This feature is not supported by the TEC ECR 2001 2008 Logivision 308 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Max amount High amount Is used to set the maximum dollar value that can be keyed into the sub department during a register transaction The TEC ECR will only support 7 digit 0 00 99 999 99 100 000 or greater L BOSS will send 99 999 99 the maximum value and a message is reported Min amount Low amount Is used to set the lowest amount that can be keyed into the sub department during a register transaction The TEC ECR will only support 7 digit 0 00 99
417. s panel contains the Report Section used to control the output for reports that repeat certain details depending on a certain table For example a list of sales details per cashier each cashier has the same information such as cash in drawer total sales etc The report must display the same details for each cashier breaking the report into sections Trigger Fields are fields that force the report to be broken into bands sections or details for each record For example if the report deals with cashier details there should be a report section for each cashier s details The cashier number field would be the Trigger Field that would separate the report with each cashier record repeating the same details Title Fields are associated with the Trigger Field they are the title for the report sections established by the trigger field Following the cashier example above the cashier number field is the actual trigger but in the report section the title should be the cashier name not the number Field On Form is the report template field that contains the Title fields Total fields lists fields that should be added sum together in the report Fields in a report template file can also contain formulas that calculate elements to generate totals New page is also linked with the Trigger field when selected it forces the report to print a new page for every time the Trigger field changes value To continue with the cashier example each
418. s the log_tab 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS Main Menus 43 2 1 8 7 Number of days to keep all log This is the number of days to keep all communication log LO Please note that the LOG files MUST be kept small This process is done daily and affects the log_tab Number of days to keep processed files This is the number of days to keep the processed files and the journal files Past this number of days the processed files C LBOSS Office ProcessealSales are zipped to the C LBOSS Office Archived directory and the journal files C LBOSS Office Journal to the journal directory Archived journal files can be viewed with the EJ program without any restriction This does not affect any table Number of days to keep daily sales information This is the number of days to keep the DAILY sales information Past this number of days the daily information is deleted from RPT_ITM_D RPT_CLK RPT_HOU RPT_SUB and RPT_DPT Prior to doing that the system executes the daily maintenance and monthly maintenance events which consolidates the daily records the ones with F1031 D together into weekly monthly and yearly totals and sets F1031 W or M or Y except for RPT_ITM_D in this one the records get moved from RPT_ITM_D to RPT_ITM_W M and Y with consolidated totals NOTE1 The weekly monthly and yearly sales information are never deleted NOTE2 Larger the files are slower is the system Number of days to keep PL
419. s the target profit margin which is the profit per sale divided by the total sale For example An item costs 1 00 and the item sells for 1 50 The Markup is 0 50 or 50 of the cost The Margin is the profit 0 50 expressed as a percentage of the total sale or 33 of the selling price NOTE It is important to remember that if you change this setting you must close the Maintenance application before the changes will take effect Allow duplicate alias Set this flag if you want to call up several different items in a list by typing in one PLU number For example you sell single muffins and six packs of muffins In a situation where the single is taxable but the 6 pack is non taxable the duplicate alias will work well for you You would create the single muffin and the 6 pack muffins as 2 different products Assign a common Alias code to each item When the common Alias code is entered on the POS terminal a list will appear with the 2 muffin choices 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS Main Menus 37 2 1 8 5 Process returns as payments L BOSS uses this flag to process a negative charge as a payment Allowing this behaviour means a customer who bought something two months ago would not be charged any interest if he returned something this period Do not select this flag and L BOSS will process the return as a negative charge in the period where it was entered That way you will still collect the interest on the olde
420. saded cadscnscapdiazsagdeceesanenciodsadeewstdnceeuatageeesiaenade eadievaneadavateadeaesiads 229 Print ANG review FeCeIVINGre i2 aici eh aiadidiehet iadaaa dida arda i aired lea 231 Physical count Adjustments crosan a aaa deadening TWANSION sci tvectecscecenicias ecetcoticestetdvevat caaseocacasdecensgadcdasapeiedotaggiceatsndoudescadiweetegad cues sasdcestanddvsas cai ovencenavedensaadeonasade Inventory reports irinin aiai a aitatiar ijara riadia iaiia iia 241 2001 2008 Logivision IV L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Other Entry Options 0 ccc cece eeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeseneeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeeeeseaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeeneeseaeeseeeeeeenes 248 2 PickUps and LOANS weiss eccc5 ectoiec ee ccdcce Ln 249 Section VI Events Tasks 252 1 Programming EVents sessscennienenn coecqeeeteconcedcdeneecesetencesdeeuqeeeseteneets 253 Section VII View Log 257 1 Logs and Messages ae eisi aco descnet cece ceedesteeeecueceesedsneeee auucees es ecedengsneees edesneesvesuceerexvanweeedueueet sseenects 257 2 Urgent MCSSAQCS ac ciicic neces edn ede cad ceed nn nni innaka ERRANA NEARNE nN ERA 259 3 Unprocessed Piles sossun 259 Section VIII Electronic Journal 261 1 Using the Electronic Journal cccceceececeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeneeseeesneeseeeeneeseeesneeseeeseaeseeesnenseeeenees 261 Section IX L Tracker overview 265 1 Main Sree ern A E A 265 2 L Tracker menu Options ccsseeecceseeeeeesseeeeeenseeeeee
421. saved 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 55 Maintenance Programmer File PLU Account Register Windows Help ou E operate 8 ciens Icons area This example shows the Maintenance application s Desktop 3 1 Maintenance Main Menus Maintenance Menus and Icons Overview The Maintenance application s help pages describe each menu s options in detail by menu name 2001 2008 Logivision 56 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 z Maintenance Programmer File PLU Account Register Windows Help eM Puy E Operator FRM ciens Icons area File The File menu is dynamic and either displays options for the Maintenance application when no tables are open or data type utilities depending on the data tables that are open for editing Edit This option is not visible until a data table is open for editing and contains editing options that correspond to the edit tools available on the toolbar PLU The PLU menu provides access to all item related data types such as department sub department bottle links mix amp match etc Account Accesses all customer account related tables such as customer information client shopper levels risk levels and discount table set up Register Provides access to all front end specific information for example Operators functions totalizers etc Windows Because the Maintenance application is a multi window env
422. se this flag to increase processing speed for many commands executed by L BOSS System date L BOSS allows two types of date rollover In a normal environment the fact the date changes at midnight is the ideal situation All sales made between store opening at 7 00AM for example and up to store close at 10 00PM for example belong to the same day and to the same balancing period In this type of environment the default selection change at midnight for system date is correct In a 24 hour store or in a store where the balancing period may not correspond to the sales made within a specific calendar date the system date should be set to change manually Most 24 hour stores will close the daily balancing period at either 7 00AM or 11 00PM But never exactly at the same time L BOSS allows you to define that the time stamp made to a transaction does not have to be the exact date of the operating system If the cashier working the last shift is ready to close at 11 07PM a command can be issued to force a date rollover at that point This way the data used to balance will correspond up to and including the last transaction made by the cashier L BOSS and L POS also realizes that any other cashiers still signed on while the date rollover command is executed are actually still working on the previous day s totals until they log out and log in again The command to execute the date rollover can be a back end event executed manually or automatically or it can
423. se to the folder where your picture is located 3 Press the open button after selecting the image The image will then be copied to the ADD folder and renamed to the item number JPG 2001 2008 Logivision 136 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Promotion Advertising File View Help Batch List te 2 Description Coke batch Look in 6 app a 400x300 Me 2006red_kovalev_800 jpg Me Arnotts TimTam Fingers jpg Me slloMamant Jpg Betty Crocker 01 jpg Me Arnotts Chicken Rix jpg Me Braile1 Jpg Me Arnotts Chilli Rix jpg MMe chicken of the Sea 01 jpg Me Arnotts Salt inegar Rix jpa Me chips rack jpg Me Arnotts TimTam Chunky jpg Me coke O1 jpg Te gt File name Betty Crocker 01 jpq Files of type Media Files z Cancel Generate 3 6 6 1 2 Adding a batch to the ads Batches will not be added to the ads unless yiou select them 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 137 Promotion Advertising File view Help Batch List Batch t 2 sa Coke batch Place a checkin N EndDate 01 03 2008 Total 6 Item s the box to add l this batch to the Price Pck Price advertising file 0 69 soU 0 79 0 69 0 69 0 69 00000000007763 1 25 Generate To view the items in a batch highlight that batch in the left hand portion of the window The items in the batch will appear ion the right 3 6 6 1 3 Running the Addbatch progr
424. ssigned to a contact when it is created A contact number may be required along with the account number at the POS to use the account if the Contact Required flag is set to on see above If no contact number is entered the transaction will be linked to the Main contact The main contact always appears as the first contact First name Enter the contact s first name Last name Enter the contact s last name Language This field allows you to set the default language the system will display for this customer English or French L POS will print receipts based on the customer s default language Account statements will also print using the default language Extension Is the contact s office telephone extension Birth Enter the contact s birth date If entered it will be used to validate age restricted items Home This field can contain the contact s main telephone number pager or other number The title to the left of the field is in red and can be modified by clicking the title and entering the phone type In the example shown above the title is Pager Note This field can be used to store additional checking account number for this customer On check transactions the POS will verify the main account number and all contacts of that account home phone number field for a matching check account number So if you get a bad check from the customer you can refuse checks from all his accounts this way without creating more account reco
425. ssigned to register groups The groups serve 3 purposes Programming reporting and exchanging data A program group is used to associate programming data such as prices accounts and register set up with registers The 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 171 report groups are used when the report program is executed When you request a report the report program will allow you to access data by register group If you need to report sales for each terminal or for all terminals several report groups are needed The exchange flag must only be set to the group called XAL An internal check in L BOSS warns if there is more than one target with the Exchange bit set In most situations within a single store the registers will belong to common program report and exchange groups You will send the same program data to all registers Reports will be requested for all terminals When you are using both touch screen and a keyboard POS set up in the same store you will need to set up a separate program group for each register type so the screen layouts stored in the L BOSS database do not get mixed up To add a terminal to an existing register group highlight the terminal Then highlight the group to which you want to add the selected terminal Now click the A tool between the 2 window areas to move the terminal into the selected group To remove a terminal from a register group use the tool You may include the sam
426. st outstanding invoices when the interest calculation is performed again Auto Declare The Auto declare option should be set to on if cashiers or other management personnel do not declare drawer amounts manually When set to on the system will force the declared amounts to be the same as the in drawer amounts collected by the system This way reports will balance by showing the in drawer amounts as the actual declared amounts leaving no Over Short When the Auto declare is not set to on reports will show Over Short amounts and the report will not balance until the manual declaration of in drawer amounts is performed from within the Entry module s Pickup and Loan option Please see the Entry module s help section in this manual for more about using pickups loans and manual declarations Host Comm Tab Settings Head office data communications In some situations it is necessary to transfer files from the POS system in a store to a central location for further processing The L BOSS communication method and set up is defined under the Comm tab By default no communication is defined Refer to the L Remote section of this guide for further help on remote communications 2001 2008 Logivision 38 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Configuration Company Email System Misc Comm Cleanup Load files Security Communication metho C Stores call head office C Head office calls stores Preserve report data p
427. stamp OO wict 2 3 Prohibit discount Override allowed No refund Restrictor code Customer age Operator age POS target PAL Restrictions Scalable Manual weight Not in gross No pts redemption Limits Max Amount 50 00 BE 50 00 20 Points Min Amount Max Yoid Max Refund SI 3 Validation req d 5001 General Ledger e D or C Debit Credit ECR s specific Preset price 12 50 E Single item E Negative E sii Ej Gas E sI 2 2 2 2 E Gift Card Dept Sub Link E Compulsory tare Sl 4 This example shows a Sub department table record Sub Department Is used to enter the record number this sub department will use The sub department is also the department number on the TEC ECR Department Is a compulsory link that associates the product to a larger group for reporting purposes This field is to program the Minor Groups at the TEC ECR valid entry is 0 30 POS target Use this filed to select the target for this sub department when you are working on a headquarters system For example when you need to send different tax programming to different target zones this will be how you do it Main Description Is used to set a main item descriptor used on the report system The TEC ECR will support 16 alphanumeric characters L BOSS does not support double sized 2001 2008 Logivision L Register interface 307 characters LRegister sends th
428. stock at current cost and retail 2001 2008 Logivision 248 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Stock Val ue G amp P Work Centre Page ee 310 Laurier 411 Beloeil Oc J3G 467 Printed Monday May 23 2005 4 56 57 PM 450 464 2131 Store 003 450 464 5673 Item group PAL All stores Price group PAL All stores Selection Hide plu at zero Cost group PAL All stores From Sub Dept lt F irst gt To lt Last gt Sh Description QtyVeight Cost ea Cost value Unit Retail value Profit 10 GROCERY 00000000000001 OREO COOKIES 17 1 50 28 33 1 67 25 50 10 0 00000000000004 Nachos 8 oz bag 361 0 50 1 805 00 5 00 180 50 90 0 Total 10 GROCERY 378 1 833 33 206 00 30 CIGARETTE 00000000001234 Camel Carton 3 37 00 135 00 45 00 111 00 17 8 Total 30 CIGARETTE 3 135 00 111 00 60 SOFT DRINKS 00000000000006 COKE CLASSIC 12 OZ CAN 602 0 45 501 67 0 83 270 90 46 0 00000000000007 DIET COKE 12 OZ CAN 441 0 54 324 69 0 79 222 63 31 4 00000002323232 COKE 355MLCANNETTE 79 0 50 62 41 0 79 39 50 36 7 Total 60 SOFT DRINKS 1052 888 77 533 03 100 FAST FOOD 00000000000013 LARGE COFFEE 129 0 75 153 51 1 19 96 75 37 0 Total 100 FAST FOOD 129 153 51 96 75 5 1 2 7 Other Entry Options Compute Option Use the compute selection to recalculate the current stock levels anytime you want to be sure that all transactions are being considered especially important if you are making inventory counts Fo
429. sts it will be displayed with the related price information If the price level does not exist the system allows you to create a new level on the fly To create a new level click the small up arrow to the right of the price level field If the new level does not exist a prompt to create the price level will appear Select Yes to create the next price level for the item The down arrow returns to the previous level If an item does not have a price for the level selected all the pricing fields will be blank After selecting the price level enter the pricing information as you would for the first level You can also create price levels by accessing the Maintenance application s PLU menu Price level option Items do not require a price in each price level For example if there are four 4 price levels and you want to assign an item to level 4 but not to level 2 or level 3 you can enter the level number or select level 4 from the price level table An item with no price on level 2 will normally sell for the price of level 1 unless you invoke the special flag to prohibit it This way you need only maintain prices for the levels actually used by the item All other items will switch to level 1 when sold Active and Next prices Active Next The Active and Next fields are for information only and are not editable The Active price shown in the yellow area is the system s current price for the selected item The Next price is the price du
430. sub dept Tax 1 Tax 2 Tax 3 Tax 4 Food stamp wic Prohibit discount Prohibit Qty Oty required Price required Visual verify Not for sale Hash item Gas PLU x Scalable Manual weight Override allowed No repeat No refund No pts redemption Bottle return _ Validation req d O MPF MPF 2 MPF 3 MPF 4 MPF 5 MPF 6 Vendor coupon Store coupon TTT Label M Print Divisor Tare link Var Tare Bottle Link Promo ID Rest code Client Age Oper Age Coupon family Type ABCD This example shows the Item table s POS tab POS Target This field is used in multi store environments when the status flags for the items are not the same in all stores To understand the Terminal table programming go to the Terminal table help page The default target for items is PAL To change the target for an item double click the Target field of the POS table and select the new target from the drop down list Targets are only available if they have been programmed as an Item target in the Maintenance application s Register menu Terminals option Follow Sub dept This flag can speed up the item creation process and help reduce potential errors Selecting this option sets the item flags to those programmed in the sub department table see Sub department table help For example if items in the automotive supplies sub department are all taxable and non discountable you could set those parameters in the sub departm
431. system LPOS LBOSS Keyreader Monitor plus one called LRFMON if you are using a worthington unit 3 in those sections you must type in the terminal s along with the IP s for those terminals and you also need to tell the monitor section which IP s you are going to monitor right now it should look similar to this example LBOSS 001901 192 168 0 106 001902 192 168 0 107 LPOS 001001 192 168 0 107 001002 192 168 0 108 001003 192 168 0 109 LRFMON 001400 192 168 0 106 KeyReader KeyReader 192 168 0 106 Monitor 2001 2008 Logivision L BOSS Main Menus 35 1 192 168 0 106 this is IP of the first machine listening to the registers 2 192 168 0 107 this is IP of the second machine listening to the registers PUMP 721600 192 168 0 46 pump server for store 721 721690 192 168 0 82 backup pump server for store 721 4 Copy this file on EVERY machine in the system the workstations the server the lanes etc in the C LBOSS folder for the L BOSS machines and C Poswin folder for the L POS machines 5 Reboot all the PC s 2 1 8 4 Misc Misc tabMisc Tab Settings The Misc tab provides several optional settings for the system Configuration Host Cleanup Load files Security S Gift certificate Printer Gift Cert Valid for lv Preview maximized 365 days M Re nit printer i Next number v Default Select Cost price calculation
432. t data per terminal Merge report data per store Encryption Cancel e Communication method select Stores call head office What am I Define the location as Head office Preserve report data per terminal Select this option to enable reporting per POS terminal at head office Otherwise select Merge report data per store If you select Preserve report data per terminal you need to create each store s POS and Back office terminals at Head office If you select Merge report data per store you will only create the back office terminal 901 for each store when defining the terminal list at head office e L Remote login Name and Password need to match at both ends Set the Port to FTP Encryption is used to set an encryption password to protect data Must be the same at both ends Comm tab set up for Head office calls the store s 2001 2008 Logivision L Remote communications 273 Configuration Company Email System Misc Comm Cleanup Load files Security Communication method What am I C No communication Head office C Stores call head office C Regional office Head office calls stores Store L Remote login Name hest Password m Preserve report data per terminal C Merge report data per store Encryption Cancel e Communication method Select Head office calls store What am I Define the location as Head office Preserve report data per terminal Select t
433. t is ever required Using the example of price zone P01 P02 and PAL follow these steps if you ever need to replace the price data in the stores L BOSS gt File gt Deploy individual file 1 Select the price_tab and check Replace 2 Deploy this file and select the PAL group when prompted Now the remote store L BOSS terminals will only have the PAL records 3 Select the price_tab again but do NOT check Replace 4 Deploy this file and select the P01 group when prompted Now the first remote store 001 L BOSS 901 terminal will have the P01 price records added to its price table 5 Repeat step 3 and 4 for the next store etc 6 Repeat the steps 1 to 4 at each store to send the price data to the lanes Follow similar logic for any other files that may be different in your remote stores Sending changes from the store back to the head office You can send data from a store back up to the head office Open a table for editing such as 2001 2008 Logivision 284 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 the Sub department table When the sub department table is open for editing click on the File menu The Send to host option is now visible Select it if you want to have the choice to send changes made locally back to the head office Every table that you edit has the option Send to host Changes you make to any of those tables will be sent whenever you use the satellite option Let s suppose you decide to Send to host the
434. t of the changes made on the local L BOSS machine back to a host system This means that changes can be made at a store and sent back up to the host system Select this option for the tables that may be edited locally in a store Please consider as well that changes sent back up to the headquarter system will be deployed to all terminals that are part of the same target group for that file type This means that if a price is changed at store 3 and all stores share the information on that product the change will make it to the other stores in the next communication cycle To force a change to make its way back up to the head office you must press the Satellite from the menu for that record Using the deploy all changes option will not return any information to the host system It is an item by item decision that can only be activated one item at a time with the satellite icon Sub department Programming Sub Department Table Settings M Sub Department cup gt Zv Sub Department GROCERY POS Description Department GROCERY EPICERIE NF Tax1 Sf Tax2 POS target PAL Tax 3 Tava Restrictions Wic Prohibit discount Customer age Override allowed No refund Operator age Scalable Manual weight Limits Not in gross No pts redemption Max Amount 99 00 MPF4 Min Amount MPFE Points Max Refund 5001 General Ledger cabbies c D or C Debit Credit ig Food stamp Restrictor code Max Void 2001 200
435. t the item is used to refund a bottle deposit amount It is compulsory to select the bottle link flag for this flag to function The bottle return amount is the value of the bottle link assigned in the bottle link flag Any price assigned to the item will be ignored Validation Req d Set this flag to require a print validation when this item is used MPF 1 6 The Multi Purpose Flags used for varying needs hence the name multi purpose Vendor Coupon This flag is used to set the price of the item to a negative value and to send the data to the vendor coupon total on reports Store Coupon This flag is used to set the price of the item to a negative value and to send the data to the store coupon total on reports Divisor Scalable items only Double click in this option window when you want to use a different measure than the default pound or kilogram when this product is sold The POS will divide the weight by the divisor you select before calculating the price Tare Link This flag is used to define a weight normally the packaging to be deducted from the total weight when the product is sold To assign a tare value double click in the tare link field and select the correct tare value for the item The Tare table is programmed using the Maintenance application s PLU menu Tare Table option If the correct tare value does not exist you must open the tare table and add a new record or modify an existing record Var Tare Variable
436. t to control each one you must set up each certificate in the table You may also decide to only sell gift certificates generically as an amount and give up the extra control that L POS can offer To add a gift certificate to the system access the Maintenance application and select the Gift certificate menu option 2001 2008 Logivision 174 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 abt ey 4D Bv Gift r Amount S0 Status Roo Issued 2000 10 16 Expiry date 2000 10 16 This example shows a Gift Certificate table record Enter the certificate number amount and set the expiry date The expiration date is extended by the number of days defined under the configuration menu miscellaneous tab Gift certificate expiration 1 If there is no date in the EXPIRATION field in the gift certificate maintenance AND there is no setting in LBOSS for number of days for gift certificate expiration the gift certificate will never expire 2 If the number of days for gift certificate in the miscellaneous tab of the configuration of L BOSS is set to 0 the expiration of the gift card if any will not be modified when it is sold If there is a number in that field L POS will set the expiration date to the date the certificate is sold plus the number of days in the configuration field for gift card expiration days 3 There is a new flag in the advance set up System Gift certificate never expires This option takes prec
437. t within the current transaction only Add item F2 This function posts the current item into the transaction Delete item F3 This function deletes the current item from the transaction Reset all items to zero This is used with the count function Reset on order to zero This will reset the on order quantity for this item back to zero Description search F7 This opens the search window based on product description View 2001 2008 Logivision 198 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Day info This window will display movement on this product for today and is most useful during the count function Extended day info This displays the contents of custom sql statements Order by This option allows you to determine the display order of items added to the transaction grid Select Entered to view as the items were added to the transaction or imported from the portable device If you are entering receiving off a supplier invoice this may assist in matching the 2 documents The transaction will print and re print in the same the order that was displayed on screen when you post the transaction Entered will appear as entered into the transaction PLU Vendor item code Description Store Case Unit Note The order is saved as entered by default Note 2 The entry menus and some buttons are dynamic meaning they can change depending on what you are doing For example when you are working on an open order the
438. ta within these tables An automated task is provided that searches all database tables for modified data and sends all changes to the front end set to execute daily However in certain situations it may be quicker to select a single table containing the modified data and send it immediately without searching all the tables for modifications 2001 2008 Logivision 24 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 This option allows you to send a single type of information or configuration file to the POS stations Sending modifications may interrupt the front end operations except for item operator and customer tables NOTE It is important to understand the Replace option before using the deploy individual file utility When the Replace option is used the receiving terminal s table must be locked to avoid multiple table access during the transfer It is important to note that the receiving POS terminals cannot operate during the replace operation NOTE 2 If the border of the Deploy individual file window is blue the current operator s security settings will not allow him to select the replace file option Replace Cancel x Deploy This example shows the Deploy one file table selection tool Deploy individual file This menu option opens a list of all the data tables and ini configuration files that can sent to the register When the Events Tasks are executed several tables are usually verified befo
439. tables are rarely accessed after the original configuration and do not have desktop icons Item Probably the most used option it opens the PLU or Item table that contains the PLU s main information Sub Department PLUs MUST be linked to a sub department Use this option to program the sub department table Department Sub Departments MUST be linked to Departments This option opens the Department table Bottle Link Opens the Bottle Link table to configure bottle values to link to bottled PLUs that must collect a deposit Tare Opens the tare table for editing scale related packaging weights Price Level The price level table contains a record for every price level PLUs will link to Category Items can be linked to categories for reporting purposes Mix amp Match This option opens the Mix amp Match table to configure records for PLUs to link to Batch Used when prices must be modified at future dates such as short or long term promotional pricing Vendor Use this option to add modify records in the vendor table so that PLUs can be linked with suppliers Scale Opens the scalable items programming interface for electronic scales Statistics A utility to verify item programming and links to other item tables Item Tables Item Table Tabs and Fields The item related tables are separated into tabs containing PLU information Each tab 2001 2008 Logivision 72 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0
440. tare This flag should be selected whenever the tare value is a percentage of the total weight of the item Enter the percentage of the total weight to use for tare removal Bottle Link This flag is available to automate the charge for bottle deposit in areas where deposits are charged on items like soda beer etc Select the link that is programmed with the appropriate bottle deposit amount Note that as an alternative to using bottle deposits you may enter a link PLU code in the Link to field on the POS_TAB Note that the internal advanced flags bottle follows WIC status bottle follows FS status and bottle follows TAX status is only functional with bottle link records from the bottle link table Promo ID This field contains the identifier for the promotional pricing for the item based on 2001 2008 Logivision 80 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 the Promo tab When the conditions for the defined promotion are reached the item sells at the special price or an electronic discount is applied based on the promotional programming See the ECL_TAB help in this section for more on how in store electronic coupons are programmed The Promo ID is also used to identify items that are part of the Free item promotion system available with the preferred shopper system The Free items are set up under the account programming menu This number is used to associate products to the free item promotion The promo ID number
441. ted Base is used to enter the regular price of an item usually a quantity of one item for that price Base pricing also accepts split priced items Such as lemons priced at 3 for 1 00 The front end L POS terminals will sell an item programmed at 3 for 1 00 by registering the first item for 34 cents and the remaining 2 at 33 cents each unless of course they were entered with the quantity key At the POS split priced items do not need to be sold sequentially they can be sold at any time within the same transaction and the correct price split will still occur NOTE Although the system allows items without a base price items should always have a Base price even if there are other pricing Methods programmed for the item 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 85 Package pricing is normally reserved for items on which you want to offer a price break based on quantity Package priced items will sell for the base price up until they reach the quantity assigned in the package price field An example of package pricing is where the base price for one can of a soft drink is set at 79 cents but a six pack is sold for 3 99 If the operator enters a quantity of 6 and keys or scans the item the register will ring 6 3 99 If the operator keys or scans each item separately the register will ring the first 5 soft drinks at 79 cents for a total of 3 95 and the sixth will ring at 04 cents for a package price of 3
442. tellite icon Department Programming Department Table Settings 2001 2008 Logivision 118 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 M Department cup gt v Department GROCERY puu POS Description Group GROCERY REGULAR SALES D o Taxi E Tax2 POS target PAL EH Tax3 Tax4 _ Food stamp Restrictor code o Wie E Prohibit discount Customer age M Override allowed Operator aga Restrictions No refund Scalable Manual weight Limits Not in gross No pts redemption Max Amount 10 00 Min Amount x Points sites er Max Refund This example shows a Department table record Department is the number that will be used to identify this department Group is a optional link that associates the product to a larger group used for filtering and reporting purposes POS target Use this filed to select the target for this department when you are working on a headquarters system For example when you need to send different tax programming to different target zones this will be how you do it Main Description is used to set a main item descriptor used on the report system POS Description field allows you to enter 2 descriptions that are used to give a description which will appear on register receipts if the department is used for manual sale entry Taxable 1 Select this flag if tax rate 1 should be applied when this item is used Taxable 2 Select this flag if tax rate 2 should be
443. tem is triggered and the Meal deal price is used Purchase any Pastry pastries may have several different prices and a coffee for 1 99 no matter what the total price would have been Set up 1 On each of the qualifying pastry items set the Promo ID POS Tab F383 to a common id number 2 Create a new PLU item called Pastry coffee duo 3 Set the sub department for this new item to where the revenue for the sale of the deal will be tracked This item is not set as Store Coupon or Vendor Coupon because we want to replace the individual price of each qualifying item to the price of the Pastry coffee duo 4 Set the price type of this item to D package price 5 Set the price of this item to be the meal deal price for this combo 6 Add a first qualifying record in the ECL tab of the new MEAL DEAL item Set this to type PID promo id and enter the promo id number you set on the pastry items in step 1 7 Add another record to the ECL table of the MEAL DEAL item Set this to ITM and entre the PLU number of the small coffee You have now instructed L POS to sell the MEAL DEAL item automatically when the products on the ECL tab are entered in the transaction 8 Deploy all changes to the POS Hint This can also be useful when you want to sell many UPC2 items read price from label for a total price rather than the scanned price of each package of meat or cheese Such as on Friday evening when the meat counter is full and you would like to sell any 5 i
444. tems in it for 19 99 All the qualifying items found in the counter would be given a common promo ID Create a PICK 5 ITEMS PLU would be set as Price type D with a price of 19 99 The ECL tab of this PICK 5 ITEMS PLU needs one record The record must have the PID number that was given to each of the individual meat items and the QTY field must be set to 5 This means that when 5 of the qualifying items are sold the system will trigger the PICK 5 ITEMS PLU and replace the unit price of each item with the package price of 19 99 NOTE Remember that although the Promo tab is displayed for all items it is only used in conjunction with items marked as Store Coupons in the POS tab NOTE 2 You cannot Error correct an item using Price method D as the meal deal items explained above 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 99 ECL qualifying record Type To create the promo rules for the store coupon select the promo tab and double click the type field A list of promo types appears allowing you to choose the promo type NOTE Depending on the type of promo some of the fields may not apply or the type of values each field contains may vary ITM Item Select the ITM type to use an item code and quantity or amount sold as the type of promo Once the quantity entered in the Qty field is reached during the period established in the Method field the POS will issue the coupon In a buy 6 get one free exampl
445. the change will make it to the other stores in the next communication cycle To force a change to make its way back up to the head office you must press the Satellite from the menu for that record Using the deploy all changes option will not return any information to the host system It is an item by item decision that can only be activated one item at a time with the satellite icon 2001 2008 Logivision 130 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 6 6 Batches Creating and Using Batches A Batch is a group of items that have been selected for modification often a temporary price reduction The L BOSS Item price table sale price column allows you to enter a promotional price for an item but you cannot enter 2 future sale prices for the same item without creating a batch You may also need the batches to schedule regular price changes at a future date This way you can avoid the need to be at the store the morning a price change comes into effect The batch module is used to enter the changes and stamp the batch with an effective date NOTE f you are using the Batch module DO NOT enter prices directly into the sale price column on the price tab because they will be erased by the system L BOSS updates the sale price column automatically from batches This means that pricing entered directly into the Sale price column of the PLU maintenance will be erased the next time the system checks to see if all batches are up to
446. the inventory flags for a re order item have been defined it will be possible to set up a link to a vendor s that supplies the item The vendor link is required to be able to define a cost and a purchase format for the item For example if you sell jars of mustard you probably order the mustard by the case In the cost link table you will define the purchase format for the item In the inventory information on the item maintenance you will define the minimum number of jars of mustard to keep on hand In the reorder quantity you will enter the number of cases you want the system to suggest as an order when the minimum is reached The Parent child fields are used to link items together for inventory tracking For example you purchase cartons of 200 cigarettes packaged as 8 packs of 25 cigarettes each The cigarettes are sold by both the carton and by the package You therefore need to create 2 items with separate UPC codes so that they both affect a common inventory level Here is an example for parent child set up e Create item 1111111111 the UPC code for a carton of 8 packs of 25 cigarettes of Brand A e Set this item 1111111111 to track inventory in the inventory tab Set the minimum and reorder quantity to the desired level e Inthe cost tab select the vendor and set the quantity per case as 1 with a case cost of 24 for our example of course you can set your real cost here Enter the vendor item code if required on your system This
447. the same mix match group means the consumer could buy one of each flavor to get the deal 2001 2008 Logivision 126 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 6 5 6 matey a gt Bye Mix Match number Description JELLO 79 EA 3 2 This example shows a Mix amp Match table record NOTE The price is entered into the PLU table The description of the Mix Match is only used as a reference field it does not print on the register receipt When you edit the mix match table the file menu includes the send to host option Send to host The Send to host option of the File menu options is only available when the Host active option is selected to return data to a headquarter system The send to host option will allow output of the changes made on the local L BOSS machine back to a host system This means that changes can be made at a store and sent back up to the host system Select this option for the tables that may be edited locally in a store Please consider as well that changes sent back up to the headquarter system will be deployed to all terminals that are part of the same target group for that file type This means that if a price is changed at store 3 and all stores share the information on that product the change will make it to the other stores in the next communication cycle To force a change to make its way back up to the head office you must press the Satellite from the menu for that record Using the d
448. they will over ride the points assigned here For items with no points assigned or for any manual entry made to the sub department the percentage assigned here will be used to issue points to the customer Note that when item points or sub department points are assigned the rounding on points issued occurs on each entry not at the end of the transaction General ledger Enter the associated general ledger account number D or C Debit Credit Is this a debit or a credit entry to the GL system Most subdepartment sales should be selected as credits or the letter C Restrictor code allows the user to decide whether on not sales into this department should be restricted at certain times This could be the case for example of alcoholic beverages that cannot be sold after 11 00PM The restrictor number is used with this sub department is assigned here The restrictor table is maintained in the PosSetup under System Restrictors Customer age This flag is available to restrict the sale of age sensitive products such as tobacco or alcohol When this flag is set the first item entered will prompt for customer age Operator age This flag is available to restrict the sale of age sensitive products such as tobacco or alcohol When this flag is set the POS will verify the age declared in the set up of the operator signed on Max amount is used to set the maximum dollar value that can be keyed into the sub department during a register transactio
449. this is the MINIMUM level required A user with a higher access level has access to all levels below Establishing access levels 2001 2008 Logivision 46 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 The System tab displays a list of data tables utilities and setup information The list has four 4 columns column 1 the name or description of the option to protect column 2 Access the minimum security level required to access the option column 3 Modify the minimum security level required to change data or settings column 4 Add Delete the minimum security level required to add or remove data Configuration Company Email System Misc Host Cleanup Load files Enter the minimum level required to access the Back Office 2 Cashier 4 Ass t Mar 6 Owner 6 Owner 6 Owner 4 Ass t Mar Items 3 Clerk 4 Ass t Mar 4 Ass t Mar ier 3 Clerk 4 Ass t Mar 4 Ass t Mar j2 Cashier 4 Ass t Mar 4 Ass t Mar 2 Cashier 4 Ass t Mar 4 Ass t Mar 2 Cashier 4 Ass t Mar 4 Ass t Mar 2 Cashier 4 Ass t Mar 4 Ass t Mar 2 Cashier 4 Ass t Mar 4 Ass t Mar v This example shows the Configuration panel s Security tab To assign security levels e Start by assigning security levels in the Access column e Select an option or table from the Access column by clicking on it e Right click or double click to open a list of security levels e Choose the minimum security l
450. tion A Select Language panel opens displaying a list of the available languages Click the language to change to Press the OK button to accept the language change or Press the Cancel button or top right hand window X to cancel the language change 2 1 4 View Internal Process What s Happening behind the scenes To understand how the L POS L BOSS communications work refer to the Understanding Communications help page in this manual View internal process When running L BOSS is constantly performing transactions exchanging information and processing commands The View Internal Process option launches the Viewer a utility that monitors the internal exchange system as it functions tracking activity This option can be used to view what the L BOSS mail exchange program is doing internally The viewer should be used to trouble shoot it is very useful in determining communication problems between the back end controller and the POS lanes NOTE The options and controls available in the viewer utility control the viewer only not the actual internal system processes In other words you cannot stop or freeze the actual internal processing system from the internal process viewer The Viewer Display Once the viewer window is open the utility begins to track the internal process displaying a line for every activity being tracked Each line consists of 2001 2008 Logivision 18 L BOSS Use
451. tion to edit is on the same Item table tab for example the Quick tab Sometimes several Item table tabs must be accessed to complete the editing 2001 2008 Logivision 176 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 for each item for example if you must enter a new cost then a new price The cursor s editing order can also jump from one tab to another within the Item table tabs Setting a new navigation To set a new cursor edit order open the Item table from the PLU menu or click the PLU icon on the desktop e Place the cursor in the first field to edit e Press and hold down the Ctrl key and press Enter e Move the cursor to the next field to edit and repeat the Ctrl and Enter key strokes e Continue adding the fields to edit in the order that you feel will be most efficient Memorizing a new navigation Once you ve established all the fields following the steps above you will probably want to save the cursor s editing order To save the memorized cursor order e Open the Navigation menu e Select the Save current navigation option A Save new navigation panel opens e Enter a meaningful name for this navigation for example Cost and Price edit NOTE Once a navigation has been memorized it will be used until you select a different navigation even if you leave the Item table or close the Maintenance application Selecting a different navigation If you have saved several navigation patterns they
452. tivation period You can add or remove items at any time This can be handy for recurring promotions that usually include the same items Keep in mind that keeping too many batches on file slows down the transfer of data to the POS terminals because LBoss must validate the best price to send to the lane For batches with the non active status the system needs to verify if the normal price was returned to the POS terminal NOTE f you remove items from a batch while they have a promotional sale column price L BOSS returns the item s price to the regular price during the next deploy to the front end It is also important to note that although you cannot delete active batches it is possible to de activate the batch then delete it As above L BOSS will return all items to their regular price during the next deploy all changes Deleting Batches You can delete a batch by locating the batch and using the E3 delete tool While editing any batch you can delete all expired batches by opening the Edit menu and selecting Delete expired batches Populating Batches using a Portable Device The L BOSS portable interface includes a item batch option that allows users to collect item information by scanning the products and entering pricing information The portable device is then connected to the L BOSS computer with a serial cable and the information is collected from the device and stored on the local drive Once the information is on disk the Bat
453. to define TT ox wae ey drm By tim Item number F2 Active Next ES aan ae JOREO COOKIES REG Over 50 Promo Quick Object POS Price Cost Inventor Sales Picture ECL Store number i Child Parent i Foll X Inv Mn 36 pet af Ov coe l Quantity This example shows the Item table s Inventory tab Store number is needed when you are working on a multi store inventory system because stock levels may not be the same at all stores Inv Inventory tracking Select this field to allow the stock to be tracked on this item If you place your cursor near this field an information field will appear that displays the number of items on hand Ord Reorder item Select this field if this is an item that is reordered using the L BOSS ordering system Min Minimum on hand Enter the minimum quantity in selling units that should be kept on 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 93 hand for this item ROQ Reorder quantity Enter the quantity that should be ordered in multiples of the purchase size This table does not require any entry for items that do not use inventory tracking For example if you are using an item code for miscellaneous sales you will most likely not need to order the item It is a non stock item No entry is required in the inventory table The same would be true if you purchased an end of line or some discontinued products Once
454. to the record within the table being accessed The i tool is used to add a new blank record to the table you are working with To copy an existing item to a new item or to replace an existing item with a new number enter the number directly into the item number field You will then be prompted for the action you want to take The tool is used to delete an existing record from the table you are working with The tool is used to undo changes that appear on the screen but that have not yet been posted It will not undo changes that have been posted The 4 tool is used to go back to the previous record in the table you are working with 2001 2008 Logivision 58 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 3 The tool is used to go forward to the next record in the table you are working with The a tool is used to send the modification made to the current record to the POS terminals immediately This icon changes color to green when a modification has been made to a record When the record is deployed the icon will return to the normal color displayed here NOTE Changing records in a store to send to the host system The Send to host option of the File menu options is only available when the Host active option is selected to return data to a headquarter system The send to host option will allow output of the changes made on the local L BOSS machine back to a host system This means that changes to prices accounts an
455. tomer can purchase and still get the discount Often used to limit special deals MailSlot The technology used to communicate information directly through the network Starting with version 1 8 x x L BOSS started using UDP Margin The profit an item generates expressed as a percentage of the selling price Markup A percentage of the cost added to the cost to obtain a selling price Operator Any system user including cashiers clerks managers programmers Operators are linked with a security level to establish system access rights Outbox A physical disk location folder where information is placed as a file when deployed ready to be sent to a target Paradox A common relational database format normally used for smaller installations where there is less data Larger installations that require multiple user access and contain large amounts of data usually use MSSQL type databases PDT Portable Data Terminal a hand held device used to collect item information for modification 2001 2008 Logivision 334 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Pickups The act of removing amounts from a cashier s drawer normally when the in drawer amounts exceed the highest allowable limits for that tender type PLU Price Look Up the same as item or UPC a unique number used to identify a single product Polling The communication process between front and back end terminals normally used in relation with sales data co
456. u can open the Window menu and select the window to bring to front from the list at the bottom of the menu 2001 2008 Logivision 178 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 Report System Report System Overview Viewing reports for all store activity is perhaps the ultimate reason for having a retail control system Without reports it is impossible to make important management decisions based on accumulated data With L BOSS reports quick simple up to date information is only several clicks away Report formats must also fit the store s needs containing only the information required L BOSS provides flexible reporting including content and format Information security is a must as well Not all users should be able to access financial reports for example but might still need to view item quantities or department lists L BOSS reports are security configurable actually hiding reports not just barring access If they do not have the required security level to access a report users do not even see that the report exists Because L BOSS compiles front end transactions by date as they occur the back end system is constantly updated with sales data from L POS terminals This means that on the fly reporting is always available allowing the manager to make decisions based on current information Report headers display the data selection such as terminal group cashier number department range or whatever is pertin
457. ule to create purchase orders or receive stock without placing an order The following help pages explain how to perform inventory operations 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 199 5 1 5 1 1 Inventory tracking Several procedures must be followed to use the inventory system You need to create the products You will also need to create the vendors who sell you those products It is necessary to set up the cost information minimum stock levels and re order information for your products Once the product information has been entered you will be ready to start ordering and receiving from your vendors This manual does not detail the entire process of creating the PLU file for the registers It does explain the fields necessary to use the Inventory control option available with L BOSS It also covers the use of the Entry module to create the inventory transactions such as ordering receiving and stock counts Steps to complete to use the Inventory option Assuming your software is licensed to use the inventory module you will need to 1 Create the vendors 2 Create the product file 3 Assign minimum and re order quantities 4 Create purchase order 5 Receive stock 6 Perform stock adjustments 7 Perform stock counts L BOSS general set up options related to inventory control There are a few options in L BOSS that control behavior of the inventory options on a system wide level For example certain items may be
458. umber Inventory store number is used to determine which store you are ordering for 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 211 Cost target allows you to choose the cost you are ordering at Remark is a compulsory field to store with the transaction The Load all items can be selected if you want L BOSS to select all items that belong to the vendor saving time entering all the item numbers manually You will still be required to modify the quantity for each item before posting the order transaction 5 1 2 1 2 Auto generate order The inventory module allows you to generate an order sheet for items controlled by the inventory tables The products require a few flags set before they can be ordered with L POS In the Maintenance application you must set the Inv and the Ord flags for each item Refer to the item maintenance help for further explanation on setting items for inventory tracking Auto generate order Select vendor information Vendor 03 01 2008 z Inv PO Generate Inventory Store number Cost target 003 Store 3 PAL Store program x Remark pa o o ooo OK BaseOnSale Cancel You need to provide the information required to store the transaction for future reference Vendor number is a compulsory field The date field can be used to modify the date the transaction will be saved for Inv can be used to enter an invoice number if known PO is the number you are assigning to this pur
459. ur Logivision dealer for technical support L BOSS provides a utility to handle database tables used to backup and restore information from the tables or re index and pack tables Some of the options controlled by the File maintenance utility can be run from within L BOSS as automated Events For example the backup operation However the File Maintenance utility is a Stand alone program not linked with the L BOSS program or other module To launch the File Maintenance utility open the Windows Start menu Programs LBOSS File maintenance option NOTE Since the File Maintenance utility accesses the data tables they must not be in use during operations To ensure the tables are not being accessed you should close L BOSS before running this utility 2001 2008 Logivision 328 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 3 File Maintenance PARADOX File Edit View File Size Test Help Date ALIAS_TAB BAT_TAB BATI_TAB BLK_TAB BTL_TAB BUTTON CAN_TAB CAT_TAB CLF_TAB CLK_TAB CLR_TAB CLT_TAB COST_TAB CPN_TAB DEPT_TAB DPTO_TAB FCT_TAB FC2Z_TAB mm a ALIAS_TAB sql BAT_TAB sq BATI_TAB sql BLK_TAB sq BTL_TAB sql BUTTON sql CAN_TAB sql CAT_TAB sql CLF_TAB sq CLK_TAB sq CLR_TAB sq l CLT_TAB sql COST_TAB sql CPN_TAB sql DEPT_TAB sql DPTO_TAB sq FCT_TAB sql FC2Z_TAB sql m m i 12 19 01 7 22 58 PM 12 19 01 7 22 58 PM 12 19 01 7 2
460. using the toolbar located below the Alias window The allow duplicate alias setting in L BOSS configuration allows another behavior Set this flag if you want to call up several different items in a list by typing in one PLU number For example you sell single muffins and six packs of muffins In a situation where the single is taxable but the 6 pack is non taxable the duplicate alias will work well for you You would create the single muffin and the 6 pack muffins as 2 different products Assign a common Alias code to each item When the common Alias code is entered on the POS terminal a list will appear with the 2 muffin choices Note that the alias item links are not available with an ECR front end terminal POS Tab Item PLU Maintenance POS Tab NOTE Throughout L BOSS records from different tables have check boxes to activate the option When a field appears to be grayed out it is not active This is true whether the check mark is selected or not A check box with a grayed out check mark is the same as a blank check box This is a peculiar default behavior of the database system used with L 2001 2008 Logivision Maintenance Application 77 BOSS Cu f ltem number F2 oooooo00000001 OREO COOKIES q gt Bv im Active REG Cost Next ECL List items avg cost Quick Object POS Price Cost Inventory Sales Picture ECL OREO COOKIES P03 POS target is 10 Sub Dept Follow
461. ve the 2001 2008 Logivision 256 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 suggested task number Follow the information above about each option in the task editor NOTE When adding a new task both Allow options appear selected but Grayed out because the system sees them as neither selected or not selected Click once to clear the grayed check mark then click again to select To remove a task from the list select the command to remove then right click with the mouse The right click menu includes a delete option Care must be exercised when removing tasks from the list be sure you do not remove required tasks from the list Changing the Events Tasks List Order You can change the order of the Events Tasks list placing the most used commands at the top of the list for easy access Changing the list order does not affect the way in which automated jobs execute To modify the order eSelect the event to move ePress and hold down the Alt key eUse the up arrow key to move the event up on the list eUse the down arrow key to move the event down the list eRelease the Alt key then select another task to move another event in the list Using Command directories Tasks can also be moved to a command Directory by selecting the command to move with the mouse To move a command so that it will appear in a directory e Select the task with the left mouse button e Hold down the left mouse button and Drag
462. ventory adjustments 00000000000002 2 1 2 3 43 12 18 77 4 0 00 2 1 2 30 00 120 180 00 26 40 67 96 144 00 24 36 00 144 216 00 144 216 00 144 216 00 120 180 00 50 75 00 0 0 00 500 750 00 0 0 00 1 1 50 15 22 50 200 300 00 20 30 00 12 18 00 12 16 00 2 3 00 1 1 1 3 00 Receiving summary This report displays all receiving transactions for the period and vendors you select 2001 2008 Logivision Entry Module 247 Receiving Summary G amp P Work Centre Page 210 Laurier 171 Beloeil Qc JIG 4G7 Printed Monday May 23 2005 4 54 51 PM 450 464 2131 From Tuesday March 01 2005 daleer Ier to Monday May 23 2005 Store 003 Date Po Invoice Remark Qty Amount Weight 1 Joe s Fresh Produce o 1 Joe s Fresh Produce 37292005 Rev store 3 4 4 2005 4 4 05 Y1 4 7 2005 111 4f7 2005 vc 4 7 2005 1 4 2 2005 rev 12 04 05 V1 4 21 2005 rey 42512005 PB 50425 1 42512005 HH 61 42512005 HH 63 42512005 PB 1019 420 1 12 18 77 120 180 00 50 40 67 157 189 50 91 84 25 120 180 00 D 98 08 0 10 35 10 20 25 20 30 00 256 237 50 836 1 089 37 64 000 23 000 52 000 139 000 101 Best Supplier Ltd 4 20 2005 vC 4 20 2005 PO 1017 PBS 4 22 2005 PB man 101 4 26 2005 ph 4 26 0 7 50 0 144 49 360 204 95 144 13 00 504 369 94 5 000 97 000 10 000 112 000 Stock value This reports displays the value of the
463. will see the ECR X report folder and the End of day LRegister reports to use with the ECR s Field numbers in system Error messages Overview Errors with Plu s sub departments cashier operators Field Numbers alert the operator of an out of limit entry in the L BOSS program In the event that this occurs from one of the following areas PLU Sub Departments Operators etc a log is provided in Field Numbers to assist the operator L BOSS will display a window during communications with a Field Number ex Field F1007 out of limit This number represents the option that was programmed incorrectly or an erroneous entry put in the field By referencing this number from the Urgent Message window to the Field Numbers description provides a quick reference to rectify the incorrect entry If the Field Number is not listed in the Urgent Message please contact your Authorized Toshiba TEC America Dealer PLU Field Numbers and description F04 Sub Dept Department Link Valid entry field 1 to 99 Address 1 on the TEC ECR F06 Tare Link Tare Table Number Valid entry 0 to 9 Address 11 on the TEC ECR F18 Report Code PLU Group Number Valid entry 0 to 99 Address 9 on the TEC ECR F1007 Package Price Valid entry 0 01 to 9999 99 positive entry only F1126 Cashier Number Valid entry 1 99 If cashier number is set to 100 or greater 99 is sent to the TEC ECR 100 or greater is for a L BOSS Operator only F1138 Var Tare Tare 2 Rate
464. y NOTE f you enter more than one field in an object box it will also appear blue Object Right Click Menu Once an object is selected right clicking over the object opens a special menu containing object controls and options The options available depend on the type of object selected New Description Label objects only Modify the label s text Justify Used to position the field value or text within the object It does not affect the object s template position The justify utility also has special Currency and Amount options for monetary fields Center on Page Places the selected object in the center of the template It does not affect the label text or field value s position within the object Copy Used to copy the object to the Form editor s clip board for pasting elsewhere in the template Font Opens the font panel allowing you to override the default template font set using the Configuration menu s Set default font option Changes the font for the selected object only Delete Remove the selected object from the template 2001 2008 Logivision 322 L BOSS User Manual 2 2 3 0 14 2 Condition This option is used to determine how the object behaves in multi page reports and if it should display zero values All Pages Use this condition if the object should appear in all report pages Last Page Only If the object should appear on the last page only First Page Only If the obje
465. y Maintenance Process As the front end L POS terminals perform transactions they place the resulting information in their local Electronic Journals and SIL backup folders as well as in their own Outbox The L BOSS 901 controller station picks up this sales data and posts it to the report tables in the database This creates many daily records that occupy large amounts of space in the database The daily maintenance process consolidates the information from all L POS lanes into one daily total per store eliminating many of the records For example during a daily period a front end lane has sold 300 different PLUs and the same 300 PLUs were sold on lane 2 Each different PLU sold results in a new a record in the sales file By default every 14 days the Daily Maintenance process will combine the 300 records from lane 1 with the 300 records from lane 2 saving database space Monthly Maintenance Process As time passes in an operational situation data continues to grow Each month L BOSS runs another maintenance operation to control database size The Monthly maintenance process further reduces the database size by eliminating daily data from the past In most situations daily data is not required after about 90 days With the exception of daily financial data the monthly process eliminates daily data keeping weekly monthly and yearly totals Every month when the process runs it leaves the most recent 90 days of daily data untouched but remov
466. y Maintenance Process 10 Move Filtered items to Batch 68 Moving an Object 320 multiple copies 109 N Navigating 7 network situations 30 New item 106 Next Event 252 Next event will occuron 253 Next number 35 No Refund 76 No Repeat 76 No Return 76 nodes 320 Non referenced POS 137 Non referenced PRICE 137 Not for Sale 76 O Object Dimensions 322 Object Inspector 323 2001 2008 Logivision Index 339 Object nodes 320 Object Right Click Menu 320 Object table 75 Oper Age 76 operator 15 Operator 156 Operator Table Programming 156 Ord Reorder item 91 Other Dynamic Edit Menu Options 70 Other Dynamic File Menu Options 67 Other Item Related Tables overview 120 Over Short 35 249 Override Allowed 76 P Pack 327 Package 81 PAL target group 167 Parent child 91 password programming 156 Pause 21 Physical Backup 11 Pick 5 deal 96 Pickups and Loans 249 Picture Tab 95 PID 96 PLU fields 71 Points 81 Polling Process 9 Populating Batches using a Portable Device 130 POS descriptor 73 POS Target 76 Posting Batches 130 preferred language 16 prevent unwanted access 16 Price Level Table Programming 124 price levels 81 Price Modify 81 Price Required 76 Price Target 81 price look up 73 Print 76 a single page 8 the entire manual 8 Print name 156 Printer section 35 Printing help pages 8 Printing Labels 186 Product Life 128 Programming Departments 117 Programming
467. you change the cost of line items using the amount field that change will only affect the current transaction You will be given an option to save the cost changes when the transaction is posted You will not be able to save a new cost for specific items only when the amount was edited manually If you want to save the new cost for specific products only you must use the F4 function to update the file for each of those items e During the entry you can use a built in calculator that allows simple math operations in the unit case amount and weight fields e To view movement information on this product for today s date press the F6 Info button Select the Auto refresh flag if you want this window to update each time you enter a new product code onto your order e Press F4 Cost to post the received products list into the database You will have the option to print the transaction Printing your stock transaction Once the transaction has been posted you will be prompted with the following window You can use any of the printing options as many times as required Once you are satsified with the printed contents of your transaction press close to continue other operations Print Options NOTE tems entered into an inventory transaction can be sorted several ways to improve reconciliation with supplier invoices or for any other reason Open the View menu and select the Order By option By default items are sorted in the order they are ente
468. you set a filter by right clicking on a logical field such as taxable the window appears like the example below Filter PC x Logical field Taxable 3 co This example shows the Filter setting tool In a logical field if you mark the selection box the filter will list the items that have the field selected as well If you leave the selection empty only the items that do not have the field selected will be listed Filters may be set on several fields to pinpoint exactly the items you are searching for When a filter is activated the field being filtered becomes yellow To view the fields that are currently filtered press the w icon The system will display the list of fields currently being filtered To activate the search on the filtered items press the E icon The system will create a table and list the items which respond to the search When you need to clear the filter press the e icon While the filter is active the next record icon and the previous record icon will move ahead to the next record that responds to the active filter Combining Filters and Global Modifications It is also possible to perform Global Modifications on the item file To use global modifications you must first establish a filter explained above Several tools are provided to set the modification Press the M to enter the Modification mode Right click each field to modify When you have completed the modifications it is possible to
469. ys items that have been associated with the ECL tab in PLU maintenance e Financial reports for store balancing periodic financials for accounting e Inventory includes several types of product lists useful for justfying inventory levels on hand amounts and stock evaluation totals e Labels allows printing different label types with various product information Labels are often customized by the reseller to fit specific needs The existing label templates were designed to print on standard label stock such as Avery 5160 5260 5159 etc e List for example system operators or PLUs by vendor These reports are lists only and do not show amounts e Others Contains a few reports for tracking various information such as gift certificate status hourly movement layaway status and rental tracking PLU sales Item movement totals with various sort and selection criteria Sub Department sales reports summarized by sub department totals System displays system set up information End of day report This is the report most businesses use to print daily or periodic sales totals containing department sub department and financial information Controlling Reports When a report has been selected but not launched from the list there is a special right click menu that controls the report properties such as security level required to access it or if is it visible or hidden Right Click Menu Hide Select this option to hide the re

L-BOSS User Manual - Orca Dynamics Ltd.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents